advertisement
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
TRUCK, TRACTOR, LINE HAUL, 6X4
M915 (NSN 2320-01-028-4395) (EIC B4A)
M915P1 (NSN 2320-01-525-7451) (EIC BAY)
TRUCK, TRACTOR, LINE HAUL, 6X4
M915A1 (NSN 2320-01-125-2640) (EIC B4B)
M915A1P1 (NSN 2320-01-525-7444) (EIC BAZ)
LIGHT EQUIPMENT TRANSPORTER (LET), 6X6, W/WINCH
M916 (NSN 2320-01-028-4396) (EIC B4C)
M916P1 (NSN 2320-01-531-2626) (EIC BFS)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 8X6, FOR 20 TON DUMP TRUCK
M917 (NSN 3805-01-028-4389) (EIC EZZ)
M917P1 (NSN 3805-01-531-2623) (EIC BFX)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 6X6, FOR BITUMINOUS
DISTRIBUTOR TRUCK,
M918 (NSN 3895-01-028-4390) (EIC EXC)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 8X6, FOR CONCRETE-MOBILE®
MIXER TRUCK,
M919 (NSN 3895-01-028-4391) (EIC EXD)
MEDIUM EQUIPMENT TRANSPORTER (MET), 8X6, W/WINCH
M920 (NSN 2320-01-028-4397) (EIC B4D)
M920P1 (NSN 2320-01-531-2638) (EIC BG2)
*TM 9-2320-273-10 dated 12 OCTOBER 2012 supersedes TM 9-2320-273-10 dated
15 MAY 1980, TM 9-2320-283-10 dated 15 MAY 2006, LO 9-2320-273-12 dated
14 JANUARY 1983, TB 9-2320-273-13&P-1 dated 1 JUNE 2006, and
TB 9-2320-273-13&P-2 dated 31 MARCH 2008, including all changes.
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A.
Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
14 DECEMBER 2012
TM 9-2320-273-10
FIRST AID DATA
For information on first aid, refer to FM 4-25.11. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
WARNING
EXHAUST GASES CAN KILL
Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless, deadly poison which, when breathed, deprives the body of oxygen and causes suffocation. Exposure to air containing carbon monoxide produces symptoms of headache, dizziness, loss of muscular control, apparent drowsiness, and coma. Permanent brain damage or death to personnel may result from severe exposure. Carbon monoxide occurs in exhaust fumes of internal combustion engines.
Carbon monoxide may become dangerously concentrated under conditions of inadequate ventilation. The following precautions must be observed to ensure safety of personnel.
1.
DO NOT operate vehicle in an enclosed area without proper ventilation.
2.
BE ALERT for exhaust poisoning symptoms: a.
Headache b.
Dizziness c.
Sleepiness d.
Loss of muscular control
3.
If you see another person with exhaust poisoning symptoms: a.
Remove person from area.
b.
Expose to fresh air.
c.
Keep person warm.
d.
DO NOT permit physical exercise.
e.
Administer Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR), if necessary.
f.
Notify a medic.
4.
BE AWARE. The field protective mask for Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) protection WILL NOT protect you from carbon monoxide poisoning.
* For artificial respiration procedures, refer to FM 4-25.11.
The Best Defense Against Carbon Monoxide Poisoning Is Good Ventilation!
a
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
This warning summary contains information on first aid, general safety warnings, and hazardous materials warnings found in the body of this manual that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of this equipment. Failure to observe these warnings could result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the limits specified in the TM in accordance with (IAW) AR 70-1. Operation beyond these limits without written approval from the Commander, U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle
Management Command, ATTN: AMSTA-CG, Warren, MI 48397-5000, is prohibited.
Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew
Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Operators must know the location and understand the proper use of all controls and indicators before operating the tractor. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Operating tractor with air pressure below the normal operating range indicates a loss in air supply and will limit the number of times the brakes can be applied before losing front wheel brakes. Failure to stop tractor and allow air pressure to build up may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
If low pressure warning lamp illuminates and buzzer sounds while driving tractor, stop immediately and investigate the cause. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Operating tractor with air pressure below the normal operating range indicates a loss in air supply and will limit the number of times the brakes can be applied before the forward-rear axle emergency park/spring brakes are automatically activated. Failure to stop tractor and allow air pressure to build up may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Before backing operations, ensure the backup alarm override switch is in the down position. Do not disable the alarm when personnel or equipment safety may be sacrificed as a result. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Never use the parking brake in place of the service brake for stopping the tractor.
Sudden lockup of spring brakes may result in loss of control of tractor and possible damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
b
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Do not attempt to check and reset circuit breakers while driving the tractor. Always pull safely to side of road first. If tractor cannot be safely operated due to a circuit breaker that cannot be reset, do not attempt to operate tractor. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Hazard switch will override brake lights when in use. Use hand signals and exercise extra care when using hazard switch. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Operators must know how to use the controls and indicators before starting and driving the vehicle. In addition, operators must know the capabilities and limitations of the vehicle and be able to use the features of the vehicle in the safest and most efficient way to accomplish their mission. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The driver and passenger must wear seatbelts during vehicle operation. Ensure seatbelts are fastened and properly adjusted before placing vehicle in motion. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The driver and companion seatbelts must be connected and adjusted for proper fit prior to placing the vehicle in motion. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Seatbelt must be completely extended from nonlocking retractor device. All excess webbing must then be adjusted at the buckle. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not start engine with parking brake control pushed in (released). The vehicle could roll in either direction once brake system reaches operating pressure and spring brakes release. Always pull out parking brake control prior to starting engine or damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
On M915 and M915A1 vehicles, cab controlled fifth wheel control lever must be in the
LOCK position when a trailer is connected to the tractor fifth wheel. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
To prevent fifth wheel movement during transit, ensure cab mounted sliding fifth wheel control lever is in LOCK position before moving vehicle. Follow procedure to verify fifth wheel control lever is locked in position when tractor is coupled to trailer, and never move fifth wheel control lever to UNLOCK position during transit. Failure to comply may result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not operate vehicle with low tire pressure on wet smooth roads at high speeds.
Doing so may result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
c
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Never allow vehicle to coast in neutral (N) position. Engine braking action is not available when transmission is out of gear, and damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Center of gravity is higher on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit. Always use slower speeds when driving vehicle. DO NOT operate vehicle on steep hills or inclines.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Visibility is reduced on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit. Always use a ground guide when maneuvering vehicle near obstacles. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit have different door handles and latching hardware. Exercise caution when opening and closing armor doors to not allow clothing or equipment to catch on door hardware. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
DO NOT park vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit on a hill or incline. The parking brake may have insufficient braking capacity to hold vehicle due to increased vehicle weight. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not use engine retarder on slippery road surfaces. Using engine retarder on wet, icy, or snow covered roads may result in loss of vehicle control. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Failure to comply to downhill driving procedures may cause loss of vehicle control and result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Excessive use of the service brake to control downhill speed will result in loss of braking power due to heat build up. Failure to comply may result in severe injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The engine brake loses its effectiveness to control speed of tractor when tractor is pushed by additional weight of trailer on downhill grades. Failure to downshift transmission to lower gear range and use service brakes to keep tractor and engine speeds under control may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Never downshift to a gear range lower than the tractor road speed on slippery pavement. Sudden increase in engine rpm may cause drive wheels to lose traction with pavement and result in loss of control of tractor or jackknifing of trailer. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not use the pusher axle as a step when in the raised position. When pusher axle wheels are off the ground, it freewheels. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
d
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Never park tractor on a steep grade. It is never good practice to park a heavy truck on a steep slope even when parking brake holding capability exceeds federal safety standards. Failure to comply may result in tractor moving unexpectedly, damage to equipment, and injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
All personnel must stand clear of tractor and trailer during coupling operations. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
To avoid unintentional fifth wheel movement during tractor operation, always ensure fifth wheel control is in the LOCK position before placing tractor in normal operation.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Never move fifth wheel control to the UNLOCK position during normal tractor operation. Failure to comply may result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure no one is standing behind tractor or trailer during the coupling procedure.
Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure the kingpin couples with the fifth wheel. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment, and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Hearing protection is required during winching operations. Failure to comply may result in damage to hearing. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Avoid quick jerking action on cables when operating winch to prevent excessive loading on the cable. Keep personnel not involved in winching away from winch cables and payload. A snapping cable or shifting load can cause serious injury. Stop winching immediately if shifting payload presents a hazard, or if any component fails, and notify
Field Maintenance. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Always wear heavy gloves when handling the winch wire rope. Never allow the cable to run through your hands as broken wires can cause painful injuries. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Improper use of lifting equipment and attachment of cables to tractor may result in injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Lifting sling must have a weight capacity greater than the weight of the vehicle. Refer
to specified vehicle weight in Equipment Description and Data (WP 0003). Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure lifting area is clear of all non-essential personnel prior to lifting and no personnel enters during lifting operation. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
e
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Chock wheels to keep vehicle from moving before brakes are released. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Hearing protection is required for personnel when engine is running for an extended period of time and personnel are close to vehicle. Noise levels produced by vehicle may exceed 85 dB. Long-term exposure to this noise level may cause hearing loss.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap in two steps. First, place a thick cloth over the cap and slowly rotate cap left to its first stop, pause, and let pressure escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap further left until you can remove it. Failure to comply may result in serious burns. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless, deadly poison which, when breathed, deprives the body of oxygen and causes suffocation. Exposure to air containing carbon monoxide produces symptoms of headache, dizziness, loss of muscular control, apparent drowsiness, and coma. Permanent brain damage or death to personnel may result from severe exposure. Carbon monoxide occurs in exhaust fumes of internal combustion engines.
Carbon monoxide may become dangerously concentrated under conditions of
inadequate ventilation. Refer to page a of Warning Summary for further precautions
that must be observed to ensure safety of personnel.
Do not remove fill cap when hydraulic oil is hot. The hydraulic tank is pressurized to 5 psi (35 kPa). Remove fill cap slowly. Failure to comply may result is severe injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Observe all warnings, cautions, and notes while performing Preventive Maintenance
Checks and Services (PMCS). Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
After raising engine compartment hood, ensure S-shaped safety hook is properly inserted through two matching holes in prop channel to prevent hood from accidentally falling. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
While performing PMCS with engine running, wear approved hearing protection.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
When working in engine compartment with engine running, keep clear of cooling fan.
The fan can engage at any time and serious injury to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The engine must be shut off before performing PMCS steps 34 through 44. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Engine must be off to check the fan clutch and actuator. Failure to comply may result in severe injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
f
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
During normal operation the exhaust pipe and muffler will become very hot. Exercise caution not to make body contact or touch hot exhaust components with bare hands.
Failure to comply may result in severe burns to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Remove all jewelry such as rings, bracelets, and identification tags. If jewelry comes in contact with battery terminals, a direct short can occur resulting in instant heating of jewelry or tools and damage to electrical system. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Exercise caution when raising or lowering spare wheel and tire assembly. All personnel must stand clear during lifting operations. Should wheel and tire assembly fall over or drop from lift, serious injury to personnel may result. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Stay clear of wheel when checking tire air pressure and inflating tire. Injury or death to personnel may result from exploding wheel components. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not touch hot clutch disc when raising or lowering spare wheel and tire assembly winch brake. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure winch cable drum has a minimum of four full turns of cable prior to lifting spare wheel and tire assembly. Failure to comply may result in cable pulling off cable drum and injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure wheel and tire assembly does not suddenly drop from truck by guiding it down between fuel tank and fender. Failure to comply could cause winch cable to snap and injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The vehicle’s hydraulic jack is intended only for lifting and is not a safe support for performing maintenance. Do not get under vehicle unless it is properly supported by jack stands or wood blocks. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure parking brake is released and chocks are placed behind tires at opposite end of vehicle to be raised prior to jacking operations. Do not place chocks in front of tires at opposite end of vehicle to be raised. If vehicle is not free to roll during jacking operations, it may topple jack. Move chocks tight against tires after jacking and set parking brake. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Check to make sure that the batteries are connected as shown in figure 1. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Let radiator cool before performing this task. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
g
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Winch system retains some pressure even when not in use. Wear goggles/face shield when opening winch reservoir. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTIONS
Leaking or spilled lubrication material called out in this work package may cause a slip and fall hazard. When draining lubrication material, clean any leaking or spilled lubrication material immediately using suitable absorbent materials. Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials in accordance with local procedures and plans. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
When fueling vehicle, ensure pump nozzle contacts the filling tube on top of the fuel tank to carry off static electricity. Do not smoke or have open flame in fueling area.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not smoke, have open flame, or make sparks when performing battery maintenance.
Batteries may explode causing severe injury to personnel. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not perform fuel filter/water separator draining while smoking or near fire, flames, or sparks. Fuel may ignite causing injury or death to personnel and/or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Leaking or spilled coolant may cause a slip and fall hazard. When draining cooling system, clean any leaking or spilled coolant immediately using suitable absorbent materials. Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials in accordance with local procedures and plans. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Accidental or intentional introduction of liquid contaminants into the environment is a
violation of state, federal, and military regulations. Refer to Army POL (WP 0001) for
information concerning storage, use, and disposal of these liquids. Failure to comply may result in damage to environment and health of personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Contact with any lubrication material called out in this work package may cause skin irritation. Use chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages. DO
NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
h
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful. Always wear safety goggles and rubber gloves when performing battery maintenance. Failure to comply may result in severe injury to personnel if acid contacts eyes or skin. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Contact with sealing compound may cause skin irritation. Use chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages. DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
If Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) exposure is suspected, personnel wearing protective equipment should handle all air cleaner media. Consult your CBRN Officer or CBRN NCO for appropriate handling or disposal procedures.
CBRN contaminated filters must be handled using adequate precautions and must be disposed of by trained personnel. Wear eye protection when removing A/C air filter.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Contact with cleaning solvent may cause skin irritation. Use chemical resistant gloves.
In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least
15 minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages. DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Contact with fire extinguisher chemicals may cause skin irritation. Use caution while discharging chemicals. Do not spray on or at any personnel. Use chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages. DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
i
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Cleaning solvent is combustible. DO NOT use or store near heat, sparks, flame, or other ignition sources. Use mechanical ventilation whenever product is used in a confined space, heated above ambient temperatures, or agitated. Keep container sealed when not in use. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Hot coolant is under pressure. Be careful when removing coolant filler cap or inspecting cooling system. Engine cooling system is under pressure and may cause severe injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Methyl alcohol is highly flammable, poisonous, and can be absorbed through your skin.
Do not drink or breathe it. If you spill any on your skin, wash it off with water immediately. Keep it away from sparks and flame. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
j
TM 9-2320-273-10
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES
NOTE: This manual supersedes TM 9-2320-273-10 dated 15 MAY 1980,
TM 9-2320-283-10 dated 15 MAY 2006, LO 9-2320-273-12 dated
14 JANUARY 1983, TB 9-2320-273-13&P-1 dated 1 JUNE 2006, and
TB 9-2320-273-13&P-2 dated 31 MARCH 2008, including all changes. Zero in the
“Change No.” column indicates an original page or work package.
Date of issue for the original manual is:
Original: 14 DECEMBER 2012
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR
MATTER IS 44 AND TOTAL NUMBER OF WORK
PACKAGES IS 39,
CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page/WP No.
Front cover
Warning Summary (10 pgs) i – xii
Chp 1 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0001 (6 pgs)
WP 0002 (40 pgs)
WP 0003 (14 pgs)
WP 0004 (8 pgs)
Chp 2 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0005 (38 pgs)
WP 0006 (4 pgs)
WP 0007 (6 pgs)
WP 0008 (10 pgs)
WP 0009 (10 pgs)
WP 0010 (30 pgs)
WP 0011 (2 pgs)
WP 0012 (22 pgs)
WP 0013 (12 pgs)
WP 0014 (10 pgs)
WP 0015 (2 pgs)
WP 0016 (6 pgs)
WP 0017 (2 pgs)
WP 0018 (4 pgs)
WP 0019 (4 pgs)
WP 0020 (4 pgs)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Change No.
0
Page/WP No.
WP 0021 (4 pgs)
Chp 3 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0022 (2 pgs)
Chp 4 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0023 (24 pgs)
Chp 5 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0024 (6 pgs)
WP 0025 (54 pgs)
WP 0026 (2 pgs)
WP 0027 (2 pgs)
WP 0028 (2 pgs)
WP 0029 (8 pgs)
WP 0030 (16 pgs)
WP 0031 (2 pgs)
WP 0032 (2 pgs)
WP 0033 (2 pgs)
WP 0034 (4 pgs)
WP 0035 (16 pgs)
Chp 6 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0036 (2 pgs)
WP 0037 (8 pgs)
WP 0038 (2 pgs)
WP 0039 (4 pgs)
INDEX-1 – INDEX-6
Back cover
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Change No.
0
A/B blank
*TM 9-2320-273-10
HEADQUARTERS,
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 14 DECEMBER 2012
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
TRUCK, TRACTOR, LINE HAUL, 6X4
M915 (NSN 2320-01-028-4395) (EIC B4A)
M915P1 (NSN 2320-01-525-7451) (EIC BAY)
TRUCK, TRACTOR, LINE HAUL, 6X4
M915A1 (NSN 2320-01-125-2640) (EIC B4B)
M915A1P1 (NSN 2320-01-525-7444) (EIC BAZ)
LIGHT EQUIPMENT TRANSPORTER (LET), 6X6, W/WINCH
M916 (NSN 2320-01-028-4396) (EIC B4C)
M916P1 (NSN 2320-01-531-2626) (EIC BFS)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 8X6, FOR 20 TON DUMP TRUCK
M917 (NSN 3805-01-028-4389) (EIC EZZ)
M917P1 (NSN 3805-01-531-2623) (EIC BFX)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 6X6, FOR BITUMINOUS
DISTRIBUTOR TRUCK,
M918 (NSN 3895-01-028-4390) (EIC EXC)
MIXER TRUCK,
M919 (NSN 3895-01-028-4391) (EIC EXD)
MEDIUM EQUIPMENT TRANSPORTER (MET), 8X6, W/WINCH
M920 (NSN 2320-01-028-4397) (EIC B4D)
M920P1 (NSN 2320-01-531-2638) (EIC BG2)
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS
You can help improve this publication. If you find any errors, or if you would like to recommend any improvements to the procedures in this publication, please let us know. The preferred method is to submit your DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) through the
Internet on the TACOM Unique Logistics Support Applications (TULSA) Web site. The Internet address is https://tulsa.tacom.army.mil. Access to all applications requires CAC authentication, and you must complete the Access Request form the first time you use it. The DA Form 2028 is located under the TULSA Applications on the left-hand navigation bar. Fill out the form and click on SUBMIT.
Using this form on the TULSA Web site will enable us to respond more quickly to your comments and to better manage the DA Form 2028 program. You may also mail, e-mail, or fax your comments or DA Form 2028 directly to the U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command. The postal mail address is U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/
TECH PUBS, MS 727, 6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000. The e-mail address is [email protected]. The fax number is DSN 786-1856 or Commercial (586)
282-1856. A reply will be furnished to you.
*TM 9-2320-273-10 dated 12 OCTOBER 2012 supersedes TM 9-2320-273-10 dated
15 MAY 1980, TM 9-2320-283-10 dated 15 MAY 2006, LO 9-2320-273-12 dated
14 JANUARY 1983, TB 9-2320-273-13&P-1 dated 1 JUNE 2006, and
TB 9-2320-273-13&P-2 dated 31 MARCH 2008, including all changes.
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A.
Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
i
TM 9-2320-273-10
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 1 - General Information, Equipment Description, and Theory of Operation
Figure 2. M915 Right Rear View ........................................................... WP 0002-7
Figure 4. M916 Right Rear View ......................................................... WP 0002-11
Figure 6. M917 Right Rear View ......................................................... WP 0002-15
Figure 8. M918 Right Rear View ......................................................... WP 0002-19
Figure 10. M919 Right Rear View ....................................................... WP 0002-23
Figure 11. M920 Left Front View ......................................................... WP 0002-25
Figure 12. M920 Right Rear View ....................................................... WP 0002-27
Figure 13. M915A1 Left Front View .................................................... WP 0002-29
Figure 14. M915A1 Right Rear View ................................................... WP 0002-31
Figure 16. A/C Evaporator Components ............................................... WP 0002-33
Figure 19. Windshield Armor Frame and Ballistic Glass .................... WP 0002-36
Figure 20. Roof Armor, Rear Armor, and Escape Hatch ..................... WP 0002-37
Figure 21. Armor Door Assembly ......................................................... WP 0002-38
Table 1. Differences Between Models .................................................... WP 0003-1
Figure 2. Front and Rear Suspension ...................................................... WP 0004-3
Figure 4. M915 through M920 Transmission Controls .......................... WP 0004-5
Figure 5. M915A1 Transmission Controls .............................................. WP 0004-6
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions
Description and Use of Operator Controls and Indicators ............................. WP 0005
Table 1. Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators ................................ WP 0005-1
Figure 1. Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators ............................... WP 0005-1
Table 2. Instrument Cluster and Gauges ................................................. WP 0005-2
ii
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions - Continued
Figure 2. Instrument Cluster and Gauges ............................................... WP 0005-2
Table 3. Instrument Cluster, Gauges, and Indicator ............................... WP 0005-4
Figure 3. Instrument Cluster, Gauges, and Indicator .............................. WP 0005-4
Table 4. Engine Run Switch, Start Button, and
Figure 4. Engine Run Switch, Start Button, and
Table 6. Ether Quick-Start and Clearance Lamps
Figure 6. Ether Quick-Start and Clearance Lamps
Table 8. Lights and Engine Retarder Switch ........................................ WP 0005-10
Figure 8. Lights and Engine Retarder Switch ....................................... WP 0005-10
Table 9. Wiper and Washer Controls and Indicators ........................... WP 0005-12
Figure 9. Wiper and Washer Controls and Indicators .......................... WP 0005-12
Table 10. Inter-Axle Differential Control ............................................. WP 0005-13
Figure 10. Inter-Axle Differential Control ............................................ WP 0005-13
Table 11. Tractor and Trailer Parking Brake Controls ......................... WP 0005-14
Figure 11. Tractor and Trailer Parking Brake Controls ....................... WP 0005-14
Table 13. Air Filter Restriction Indicator ............................................. WP 0005-17
Figure 13. Air Filter Restriction Indicator ............................................ WP 0005-17
Table 14. Circuit Breaker and Relay Access Panel .............................. WP 0005-18
Figure 14. Circuit Breaker and Relay Access Panel ............................ WP 0005-18
Table 15. Circuit Breaker and Relays ................................................... WP 0005-19
Figure 15. Circuit Breaker and Relays .................................................. WP 0005-19
Table 16. Circuit Breakers and Glove Compartment Door .................. WP 0005-20
Figure 16. Circuit Breakers and Glove Compartment Door ................ WP 0005-20
Table 17. Cab Floor Mounted Controls ................................................ WP 0005-22
Figure 17. Cab Floor Mounted Controls ............................................... WP 0005-22
Table 18. Range Selector Control M915A1 ......................................... WP 0005-24
Figure 18. Range Selector Control M915A1 ........................................ WP 0005-24
Table 19. Fifth Wheel Control Lever M915A1 .................................... WP 0005-26
Figure 19. Fifth Wheel Control Lever M915A1 ................................... WP 0005-26
Table 20. Steering Wheel and Column Mounted Controls .................. WP 0005-27
iii
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions - Continued
Figure 20. Steering Wheel and Column Mounted Controls ................. WP 0005-27
Table 21. Transmission Air Control M915 through M920,
Fan Clutch Actuator Override M919, PTO Control M916 and
M920, and Pusher Axle Controls M917, M919, and M920 ......... WP 0005-28
Figure 21. Transmission Air Control M915 through M920,
PTO Control M916 and M920, Fan Clutch Actuator Override
M919, and Pusher Axle Controls M917, M919, and M920 ......... WP 0005-28
Table 22. Transmission Ratio Selector, M915 through M920 ............. WP 0005-30
Figure 22. Transmission Ratio Selector, M915 through M920 ............ WP 0005-30
Table 23. Seat Adjustment Controls ..................................................... WP 0005-32
Figure 23. Seat Adjustment Controls .................................................... WP 0005-32
Table 24. Additional Cab Controls ....................................................... WP 0005-33
Figure 24. Additional Cab Controls ...................................................... WP 0005-33
Table 25. Crew Protection Cab Doors, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-34
Figure 25. Crew Protection Cab Doors, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-34
Table 26. Defroster Fans, Dome, and Map Lamps .............................. WP 0005-35
Figure 26. Defroster Fans, Dome, and Map Lamps ............................. WP 0005-35
Table 27. Air Conditioning Kit Controls, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-36
Figure 27. Air Conditioning Kit Controls, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-36
Table 28. Rear Sliding Window, M916 through M920 ....................... WP 0005-37
Figure 28. Rear Sliding Window, M916 through M920 ...................... WP 0005-37
Table 29. Crew Protection Kit Escape Hatch, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-38
Figure 29. Crew Protection Kit Escape Hatch, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-38
Figure 1. Applying Parking Brake and Selecting Neutral,
Figure 2. Turning On Ignition and Observing Warning Indicators ....... WP 0008-3
Figure 3. Control Lever, Cab Controlled Fifth Wheel ........................... WP 0008-4
iv
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions - Continued
Figure 4. Disengaging PTO, (M916 through M920 Models) ................ WP 0008-5
Figure 5. Differential Control Switch and Engine Start Button ............. WP 0008-6
Figure 6. Engine Retarder Foot Switch and Accelerator Pedal ............. WP 0008-7
Figure 8. Instrument and Indicator Panel Gauges and Indicators .......... WP 0008-9
Cold Weather Starting Below +32° F (0° C) ................................................. WP 0009
Figure 1. Applying Parking Brake and Selecting Neutral ...................... WP 0009-2
Figure 2. Turning Engine Run Switch On and
Observing Warning Indicators .......................................................... WP 0009-3
Figure 3. Control Lever, Cab Controlled Fifth Wheel ........................... WP 0009-3
Figure 4. Disengaging PTO, (M916 through M920 Models) ................ WP 0009-4
Figure 5. Differential Control Switch and Engine Start Button ............. WP 0009-5
Figure 6. Engine Retarder Foot Switch and Accelerator Pedal ............. WP 0009-6
Figure 8. Instrument and Indicator Panel Gauges and Indicators .......... WP 0009-9
Figure 1. Instrument Panel Gauges and Indicators ................................. WP 0010-3
Figure 2. Instrument Panel Indicators and Controls ............................... WP 0010-3
Figure 3. Transmission Control Lever .................................................... WP 0010-4
Figure 4. Service, Park, and Trailer Brake Controls and
Figure 5. Transmission Control Lever and Range Indicator .................. WP 0010-7
Figure 7. Water Temperature Gauge ....................................................... WP 0010-9
Figure 8. Air Pressure Gauges and Low Air Pressure Indicator ........... WP 0010-9
Figure 9. Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge ................................... WP 0010-10
Figure 13. Transmission Control Lever Range Indicator ..................... WP 0010-21
Figure 14. Transmission Range Indicator ............................................. WP 0010-23
Figure 15. Engine Retarder Switch ....................................................... WP 0010-24
Figure 16. Accelerator and Engine Retarder Control Pedals ............... WP 0010-25
Figure 17. Inter-axle Differential Lockup Controls .............................. WP 0010-27
Figure 19. M917 & M919 Pusher Axle Air Pressure for Vehicle
Figure 20. M920 Pusher Axle Air Pressure for Vehicle Weight
Stopping, Shutting Down Engine, and Parking Vehicle ................................ WP 0011
v
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions - Continued
Fifth Wheel Operation and Coupling and Uncoupling Trailers ..................... WP 0012
Figure 1. M915 Fifth Wheel Controls ..................................................... WP 0012-2
Figure 2. M916 and M920 Fifth Wheel Controls ................................... WP 0012-3
Figure 3. M915A1 Fifth Wheel Controls ................................................ WP 0012-5
Figure 4. Chock Block Placement (Level Ground) ................................ WP 0012-6
Figure 5. Fifth Wheel Equipment Checks ............................................... WP 0012-7
Figure 6. Tractor and Trailer Coupling ................................................... WP 0012-9
Figure 7. M915, M916, and M920 Air Hose and Cable
Figure 8. M915A1 Air Hose and Cable Connections .......................... WP 0012-10
Figure 9. Chock Block Placement (Level Ground) .............................. WP 0012-11
Figure 11. Pintle Towing Trailer Connections ..................................... WP 0012-14
Figure 15. PTO Control Knob and Indicator Light .............................. WP 0012-19
Figure 16. Winch Operator Station ....................................................... WP 0012-21
Figure 17. Securing Winch Wire Rope ................................................. WP 0012-22
Figure 2. M915 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs ......... WP 0013-2
Figure 3. M916 and M918 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and
Figure 4. M917, M919, and M920 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles,
Figure 5. M915A1 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs .... WP 0013-5
Figure 7. NATO Slave Receptacle .......................................................... WP 0013-7
Figure 10. Opening Cab Rear Sliding Window .................................... WP 0013-10
Figure 1. Sunvisor Instruction and Information Decals ......................... WP 0014-1
Figure 2. Instrument Panel Instruction and Information Decals ............ WP 0014-2
Figure 3. Driver Door Data Plates and Instruction Information
Figure 4. M915A1 Circuit Breaker and Relay Identification Decals ..... WP 0014-4
Figure 5. Driver Seat Instruction Decals ................................................. WP 0014-5
vi
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions - Continued
Figure 6. Engine Compartment Decals ................................................... WP 0014-6
Figure 9. Winch Decals and Data Plates ................................................ WP 0014-9
Figure 1. Spring Brake Power Spring ..................................................... WP 0020-2
Figure 1. Air Pressure Hose Connections ............................................... WP 0021-3
Chapter 3 - Troubleshooting Master Index
Chapter 4 - Troubleshooting Procedures
Chapter 5 - Maintenance Instructions
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) Introduction ............ WP 0024
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) ................................. WP 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and
Figure 2. Trailer Coupling Air Hoses ..................................................... WP 0025-3
Figure 10. Floor and Firewall Armor (Left Side) ................................. WP 0025-18
Figure 12. Side Armor (Right Side) ...................................................... WP 0025-21
Figure 13. Floor and Firewall Armor (Right Side) .............................. WP 0025-22
Figure 14. Roof Armor and Escape Hatch ........................................... WP 0025-23
vii
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 5 - Maintenance Instructions - Continued
Figure 21. Fan Clutch and Actuator ...................................................... WP 0025-35
Figure 22. Power Steering Pump Reservoir .......................................... WP 0025-37
Figure 25. Ether Quick-Start Assembly ................................................ WP 0025-40
Figure 29. A/C Evaporator Assembly ................................................... WP 0025-49
Figure 3. Filling Empty Cooling System ................................................ WP 0029-5
Figure 6. Adding Coolant to Cooling System ........................................ WP 0029-7
Figure 1. M915, M918, and M915A1 ..................................................... WP 0030-2
Figure 3. M917, M919, and M920 .......................................................... WP 0030-3
Figure 4. Spare Wheel and Tire Carrier
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-5
Figure 5. Spare Tire Carrier Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-5
Figure 6. Wheel and Tire Assembly on Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-7
Figure 7. Lower Wheel and Tire Assembly
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-7
viii
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 5 - Maintenance Instructions - Continued
Figure 8. Raising Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-9
Figure 9. Wheel and Tire Assembly on Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-9
Figure 10. Install Tire on Spare Tire Carrier
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ......................................................... WP 0030-11
Figure 11. Secure Side Panel (M915, M916, and M915A1) ............... WP 0030-11
Figure 12. Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence ......................................... WP 0030-13
Figure 14. Front Axle Jack Placement, M915 and M915A1 ............... WP 0030-15
Figure 15. Front Axle Jack Placement, M916 through M920 ............. WP 0030-15
Figure 16. Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear Axle Jack Placement ........... WP 0030-16
Figure 1. Battery Box, Battery, and Cables Inspection .......................... WP 0031-2
Fan Clutch Lockup Procedure (M915 Through M920) ................................. WP 0032
Figure 1. A/C Air Filter Replacement ..................................................... WP 0033-2
Figure 1. Lubrication Locations (M915 and M915A1) .......................... WP 0035-6
Figure 2. Lubrication Locations (M916 and M918) ............................... WP 0035-7
Figure 3. Lubrication Locations (M917, M919, and M920) .................. WP 0035-8
Figure 4. Power Steering Pump Level Check and Fill ........................... WP 0035-9
Figure 5. Front Wheel Bearing Level Check and Fill (M915A1) ....... WP 0035-10
Figure 6. Fuel Filter/Water Separator Drain Moisture ......................... WP 0035-10
Figure 7. Engine Oil Level Check and Fill .......................................... WP 0035-12
Figure 8. Transmission Level Check and Fill ....................................... WP 0035-12
Figure 9. Fifth Wheel Lubrication
(M915, M916, M920, and M915A1) ............................................. WP 0035-14
Figure 10. Winch Reservoir Level Check and Fill
Figure 11. Pintle Hook Lubrication
(M915, M916, M917, M920, and M915A1) ................................. WP 0035-16
Chapter 6 - Supporting Information
Components of End Item (COEI) and Basic Issue Item (BII) ...................... WP 0037
ix
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 6 - Supporting Information - Continued
Table 1. Additional Authorization List (AAL) ....................................... WP 0038-2
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List ......................................... WP 0039-2
x
TM 9-2320-273-10
ABOUT YOUR MANUAL
Equipment operators must familiarize themselves with the format and use of this
Technical Manual (TM) prior to operating equipment or performing routine maintenance. Learning how to use this manual will enable personnel to quickly locate information, gain proper knowledge of the equipment, and shorten the time necessary to complete the required procedure. Features of this TM are:
Work Package Format - This TM is organized in work package (WP) format. Each WP is an individual, stand-alone unit of information identified by a four-digit sequence number. WPs are positioned within the TM in sequential order
(i.e., 0001, 0002, 0003, etc.) and each WP is page numbered consecutively after the
sequence number at the bottom of each page (i.e., 0001-1, 0001-2, 0001-3, etc.). A WP
may contain as many as thirty pages.
Text Design - A Table of Contents (TOC) is located in the front matter section of the
TM. WP titles and sequence numbers are listed in the TOC in sequential order. WPs are organized into chapters based on subject and chapters are listed in the TOC.
Chapter title pages are positioned sequentially within the manual. In addition to the
TOC and chapter title pages, a separate subject index is located in the back of the TM.
The subject index is organized in alphabetical order with WP sequence and page numbers provided. Each WP contains identification information which includes the following:
1.
Maintenance level(s) - This identifies what maintenance level(s) can perform the task.
2.
WP title - This identifies the name and title of the procedure and where applicable, the title of the subtasks within the WP.
3.
Effectivity notice - This is only listed when a WP does not apply to all configurations or models of the equipment, in which case only the model(s) that apply are listed.
4.
Initial setup - Initial setup requirements may be listed after the WP identification information above. The Initial Setup contains a list of all tools, materials/parts, authorized personnel, reference information, and equipment conditions that must be performed first. Special environment conditions and any other specific information required to perform and complete the task may also be included.
Use of Text and Illustrations - WP text may be presented as general information written in paragraphs, a single task having numbered steps, or two or more subtasks each containing separate information (e.g., removal, inspection, installation). Where steps are used, they must be followed in the order which they are numbered. When illustrations are used, they are located after the text to which they apply on facing two-page modules and are identified in the text by figure and item numbers. Each illustration has a figure number and title beneath it and may contain item numbers with arrows pointing to each part called out in the corresponding text. Illustration callouts are numbered sequentially starting at the 11 o’clock position and continuing clockwise around the illustration. Tables and figures are numbered sequentially within each WP.
TM 9-2320-273-10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL - CONTINUED
Abbreviations and acronyms are only spelled out within the text the first time they appear in the manual. A list of all abbreviations and acronyms used in this TM is
provided in General Information, WP 0001.
HOW TO USE YOUR MANUAL
The format of this manual is designed to make accessing information quick and easy.
The following example is intended as a guide and should be reviewed and put to memory before attempting to use this manual. If you have any questions after reviewing the following example, don’t hesitate to ask your supervisor.
PROBLEM: You observe while leaving the motor pool that the semi-trailer brakes will not apply when the vehicle service brake is used or trailer brake hand control on steering column is used.
SOLUTION: You must find information on the vehicle brake system in the operator’s manual, review the operating procedures, and if necessary, perform the appropriate troubleshooting tasks to solve the problem.
1.
Refer to the TOC to determine what chapter and WP contains information on brake system operation. If there is not an obvious WP title that indicates the specific information on brakes, you may locate the information more quickly by using the subject index. After reviewing the TOC and/or subject index, you
determine that Chapter 2, Operation Under Usual Conditions, WP 0006, and
Chapter 4, Troubleshooting Procedures, WP 0023, contain the information you
desire.
2.
Go to WP 0006 and review the operating procedures pertaining to coupling and
stopping semi-trailer. Then go to WP 0022 and look through the list of
malfunctions in the Troubleshooting Master Index until you identify the malfunction that most accurately fits the problem.
3.
Go to WP 0023-10, Trailer Brakes Will Not Apply When Brake Pedal Is Used or
Hand Control on Steering Column is Used, and follow the steps listed. As you perform the procedure you discover that one of the inter-vehicular air hoses is leaking due to a damaged pressure coupling. Now you must notify Field
Maintenance as instructed.
4.
When maintenance is allocated at the operator’s level, you must perform and complete all instructions as outlined.
xii
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION,
AND THEORY OF OPERATION
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
SCOPE
This Technical Manual (TM) contains operator level instructions for the operation and servicing of M915, M915A1, M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920 trucks and
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 trucks equipped with Crew
Protection and Air Conditioning Kits. Operating instructions include safety requirements, description of equipment, use of controls, and operation under usual and unusual conditions. Servicing instructions include operator level Preventive
Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS), lubrication, maintenance procedures, and troubleshooting as allocated by the Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC). Replacement and repair of components are allocated for field level or higher maintenance, and are subsequently not authorized at the operator’s level nor included in this manual.
Type of Manual - Operator/crew
Model Number and Equipment Name -
M915, M915A1, M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920 Truck, Tractor, Truck Chassis, and Light and Medium Equipment Transporters.
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 Truck, Tractor, Truck Chassis, and Light and Medium Equipment Transporters.
Purpose of Equipment:
1.
The M915 is a line haul truck tractor used to haul semi-trailers on Class I good roads only (30,000 lb (13,608 kg) on 5th wheel).
2.
The M916 tractor is used to transport medium weight payloads/semi-trailers (up to
40,000 lb (18,144 kg) on 5th wheel) on and off roads.
3.
The M917 truck is a 20-ton dump truck with a hydraulic hoist used to haul 12 cubic yards of aggregate and similar materials on and off road (15.2 cubic yards heaped and 19.6 yards with side boards).
4.
The M918 is a bituminous distributor truck used for spraying liquid asphalt. The
M918 can be operated on and off roads.
5.
The M919 truck is a Concrete-Mobile® mixer truck used to transport up to 8 cubic yards of dry concrete material and mix at construction sites. The M919 can be operated on and off roads.
6.
The M920 tractor is used to transport heavy payload/semi-trailers (up to 40,000 lb on 5th wheel) on and off roads.
7.
The M915A1 is a line haul truck tractor used to haul semi-trailers for over the road use (30,000 lb (13,608 kg) on 5th wheel).
8.
The M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 is a standard truck equipped with an armored cab and air conditioning for improved ballistic protection and climate control of cab.
Special Inclusions - Operation and operator maintenance procedures for vehicle-equipped options are covered in this TM.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0001
MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS
Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by (as applicable) DA PAM 750-8, The Army Maintenance
Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual; DA PAM 738-751, Functional Users
Manual for The Army Maintenance Management Systems - Aviation (TAMMS-A); or
AR 700-138, Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability.
REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIR)
If your vehicle needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the only one who can tell us what you do not like about your equipment. Let us know why you do not like the design or performance.
All non-Aviation/Missile EIRs and PQDRs must be submitted through the Product Data
Reporting and Evaluation Program (PDREP) Web site. The PDREP site is: https://www.pdrep.csd.disa.mil/.
If you do not have Internet access, you may submit your information using an SF 368
(Product Quality Deficiency Report). You can send your SF 368 using email, regular mail, or fax using the addresses/fax numbers specified in DA PAM 750-8, The Army
Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual. We will send you a reply.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC)
Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) of Army materiel is a continuing concern. It is important that any corrosion problems with this item be reported so that the problem can be corrected and improvements can be made to prevent the problem in future items.
Corrosion specifically occurs with metals. It is an electrochemical process that causes the degradation of metals. It is commonly caused by exposure to moisture, acids, bases, or salts. An example is the rusting of iron. Corrosion damage in metals can be seen, depending on the metal, as tarnishing, pitting, fogging, surface residue, and/or cracking.
Plastics, composites, and rubbers can also degrade. Degradation is caused by thermal
(heat), oxidation (oxygen), solvation (solvents), or photolytic (light, typically UV) processes. The most common exposures are excessive heat or light. Damage from these processes will appear as cracking, softening, swelling, and/or breaking.
SF Form 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report should be submitted to the address specified in DA PAM 750-8, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS)
Users Manual.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0001
ARMY PETROLEUM, OIL, AND LUBRICANTS (POL)
Proper disposal of hazardous waste material is vital to protecting the environment and providing a safe work environment. Materials such as batteries, oils, and antifreeze must be disposed of in a safe and efficient manner.
DO NOT overfill any fluid reservoir. If a fluid starts to flow out of reservoir, stop
IMMEDIATELY to avoid spillage. Immediately clean up spilled fluid before proceeding with any task.
Refer to local procedures and plans for preventing and responding to fluid spills or leaks. Comply with local regulations when disposing of clean up material and fluids.
The following references are provided as a means to ensure that proper disposal methods are followed:
Waste Disposal Instructions (MEIS/MIDI CD ROM)
National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA)
Clean Air Act (CAA)
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability
Act (CERCLA)
Emergency Planning and Community Right to Know Act (EPCRA)
Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA)
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
The disposal of Army Petroleum, Oil, and Lubricants (POL) products are affected by some of the above regulations. State regulations also may apply to POL. If you are unsure of which legislation affects you, contact state and local agencies for regulations regarding proper disposal of Army POL.
DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
Procedures for destruction of army materiel to prevent enemy use can be found in
TM 750-244-6, Procedures for Destruction of Tank-Automotive Equipment to Prevent
Enemy Use.
TM 9-2320-273-10
DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE - CONTINUED
0001
PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT
Storage and shipment instructions are located in TM 9-2320-273-23, Preparation for
Storage or Shipment, and in TM 746-10, Marking, Packaging and Shipment of
Supplies, and Equipment: General Packaging Instructions for Field Use.
NOMENCLATURE CROSS REFERENCE LIST
The following is a list of official nomenclature used in this manual and the corresponding unofficial nomenclature (common names or jargon terms) used in the field.
OFFICIAL TM
NOMENCLATURE
Antifreeze, ethylene glycol mixture
Ether quick-start system
Engine retarder
Wire rope
Quick disconnect coupling
Air hose tender
UNOFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE
Engine coolant
Cold start system
Engine brake, Jake brake, Jacobs brake
Cable
Gladhand
Pogo stick
0001-4
TM 9-2320-273-10 0001
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS
Abbreviations and acronyms appearing in this manual are defined in the paragraph from where they first appear, after which only the abbreviation or acronym is used. The following is a quick-reference list of all abbreviations and acronyms and their corresponding word or compound term used in this manual.
@ - at dB - Decibel
° - Degrees DIA - Diameter
– - Minus, negative
% - Percent
+ - Plus, positive
°C - Degrees Celsius (e.g., 0° C)
°F - Degrees Fahrenheit (e.g., 32° F) ac - alternating current
EA - Each
EIR - Equipment Improvement
Recommendation etc. - etcetera
F - Fahrenheit
FAX - facsimile
FM - Field Manual
FMVSR - Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Regulation ft - foot, feet
A/C - Air Conditioner
AAL - Additional Authorization List
ABS - Anti-Lock Brake System
AR - Army Regulation
ATF - Automatic Transmission Fluid
BII - Basic Issue Item
BK - Bulk
CAGEC - Commercial and Government
Entity Code
CBRN - Chemical, Biological,
Radiological, and Nuclear cfm - cubic feet per minute cm - centimeter cm
3
- cubic centimeter
CID - Cubic Inch Displacement
COEI - Components of End Item
CPC - Corrosion Prevention and Control
CTA - Common Table of Allowance
DA - Department of the Army
DA PAM - Department of the
Army-Pamphlet
GAA - Grease, Artillery, and Automotive gal. - gallon(s)
GVW - Gross Vehicle Weight
GVWR - Gross Vehicle Weight Rating hp - horsepower
HR - Hand Receipt
IAW - In Accordance With
ID - Identification in. - inch k - kilo, thousand kg - kilogram km - kilometer kPa - kilopascal kph - kilometers per hour
L - Liter(s) lb - pound(s)
0001-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS - CONTINUED
lb-ft - pound-feet lb-in. - pound-inch psi - pounds per square inch pt - pint
LPM - Liters Per Minute m - meter qt - quart qty - quantity
MAC - Maintenance Allocation Chart mi - mile
Recm. - Recommended
Rqr. - Required ml - milliliter
MLC - Military Load Classification rpm - revolutions per minute
SF - Standard Form mm - millimeter mpg - miles per gallon
SI - Supply Instruction mph - miles per hour
N•m - Newton-meter
N/A - Not Applicable
TAMMS - The Army Maintenance
Management System
TAMMS-A - The Army Maintenance
Management System - Aviation
TB - Technical Bulletin
NATO - North Atlantic Treaty
Organization
TM - Technical Manual
NCO - Noncommissioned Officer
NSN - National Stock Number
OEA - Oil Engine Arctic
TULSA - TACOM Unique Logistics
Support Applications oz - ounce
PAM - Pamphlet
U/I - Unit of Issue
UV - Ultraviolet w/ - with PMCS - Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
PQDR - Product Quality Deficiency
Report w/o - without
WP - Work Package
0001
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0001-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES
WARNING
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the limits specified in the TM in accordance with (IAW) AR 70-1. Operation beyond these limits without written approval from the Commander, U.S.
Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN:
AMSTA-CG, Warren, MI 48397-5000, is prohibited. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
If the vehicles are equipped with crew protection kit, vehicles will be heavier than usual and weight increases will change vehicle handling characteristics. Refer to Operation
Under Usual Conditions, WP 0006.
M915 AND M915A1
Capabilities of the M915 and M915A1 tractors are:
1.
The M915 and M915A1 are capable of carrying maximum loads of 30,000 lb
(13,608 kg) on the fifth wheels, and have a towing capacity from its rear pintle of
50,000 lb (22,680 kg). The M915 and M915A1 have a maximum Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) of 50,000 lb (22,680 kg) and a Gross Combination
Weight Rating (GCWR) of 105,000 lb (47,627 kg).
2.
While operating on Class I roads, the M915 and M915A1 can maintain speeds of
55 mph on level roads. The M915 can maintain 25 mph while ascending a 3.9
percent grade at GCWR, and the M915A1 can maintain 25 mph while ascending a 3 percent grade at GCWR. They are capable of climbing a 17 percent grade at
GCWR in both forward and reverse directions, and can operate on side slopes up to 10 percent where adequate traction is available. In addition, the M915A1 can ford hard-bottom water crossings up to 20 in. (50.8 cm) in depth for 5 minutes without damage or requiring maintenance before further operation.
3.
Average cruising ranges at GCWR with a full tank of fuel (118 gal. (447 L)) vary based on driving habits, climate, and road conditions. For example, during highway operation under full power at 2,100 rpm, the fuel rate is 20.5–21.4 gal.
(77.6–81.0 L) per hour. Traveling at an average of 40 mph at GCWR results in a
300-mile operating range on a full tank.
4.
The M915 and M915A1 are capable of operating in temperatures from
-25 to 125° F (-32 to 52° C) and can operate to -50° F (-46° C) with arctic engine and personnel heater kits installed.
0002-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0002
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES - CONTINUED
M916
Capabilities of the M916 tractor are:
1.
The M916 is capable of carrying a maximum load of 78,500 lb (35,607 kg) on its fifth wheel, and has a towing capacity from its rear pintle of 50,000 lb
(22,680 kg). The M916 has a maximum Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of 56,000 lb (25,401 kg) and a Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) of
106,000 lb (48,081 kg).
2.
The M916 can start and climb a 25 percent grade at GCWR in both forward and reverse directions.
3.
The M916 is capable of operating on side slopes up to 10 percent where adequate traction is available.
4.
The M916 is capable of operating in temperatures from -25 to 125° F
(-32 to 52° C) and can operate to -50° F (-46° C) with arctic engine and personnel heater kits installed.
M917
The M917 dump truck body provides the capability of hauling and dumping, or spreading heavy loads of hot asphalt, aggregate, dirt, and similar materials. The M917 vehicle chassis has off-road capabilities providing a variety of terrain in which the dump truck can operate. The body contains a sealed hydraulic system for raising and lowering the bed. The hydraulic system is powered by the vehicle chassis PTO unit.
The tailgate can be adjusted for dumping the load or for controlled spreading while the vehicle is moving. For additional information, refer to TM 5-3805-274-13&P.
M918
The M918 is a bituminous distributor truck used for spraying liquid asphalt. The M918 can be operated on and off roads. The M918 consists of an E. D. Etnyre & Company
Bituminous Distributor, Model D 63 storage tank with a low pressure heating system, hydraulic powered pumping unit, and an adjustable spray bar for distributing bituminous material. For additional information, refer to TM 5-3895-371-10.
M919
The M919 Concrete-Mobile® mixer unit is a combination materials transporter and concrete mixing plant. The mixer carries sufficient unmixed material to produce fresh concrete in any quantity up to 8 cubic yards (6.12 cubic meters). The concrete is mixed on-site and the unit has been precisely calibrated so mixes produced meet or exceed
American Concrete Institute and American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials standards for design strength. The unit can be used on an intermittent or continuous basis. However, continuous operation is dependent on the availability of raw material at the site. Some control settings for mix operations vary from truck to truck and site to site. For additional information, refer to
TM 5-3895-372-10.
0002-2
TM 9-2320-273-10 0002
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES - CONTINUED
M920
Capabilities of the M920 tractor are:
1.
The M920 is capable of carrying a maximum load of 99,730 lb (45,237 kg) on its fifth wheel, and has a towing capacity from its rear pintle of 75,000 lb
(34,019 kg). The M920 has a maximum Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of 75,000 lb (34,019 kg) and a Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) of
130,000 lb (58,967 kg).
2.
The M920 can start and climb a 25 percent grade at GCWR in both forward and reverse directions.
3.
The M920 is capable of operating on side slopes up to 10 percent where adequate traction is available.
4.
The M920 is capable of operating in temperatures from -25 to 125° F
(-32 to 52° C) and can operate to -50° F (-46° C) with arctic engine and personnel heater kits installed.
AIR CONDITIONING KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
Capabilities of the Air Conditioning Kit:
1.
The Air Conditioning Kit provides the M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 with cooling of the vehicle cab.
2.
The Air Conditioning Kit consists of a compressor, condenser, receiver/dryer, evaporator assembly, switch box, hoses, and electrical harness.
CREW PROTECTION KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
Capabilities of the Crew Protection Kit:
1.
The Crew Protection Kit provides the M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 with improved armor protection for vehicle occupants.
2.
The Crew Protection Kit consists of armor panels installed on the cab floor, firewall, roof, rear of cab, driver side, passenger side, door assemblies, windshield frame, ballistic glass, and an escape hatch.
0002-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
0002
M915
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on cab top used to mark vehicle cab. Lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on cab top on driver side and is air operated.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle and trailer when coupled.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries are low.
DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to the side of the tank.
FRESH AIR VENTS - There is a cab air vent on each side of the cab cowl. The vent is opened and closed from inside the cab by a hand-operated lever.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on the top of each front fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
ENGINE
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
AIR HORN
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
TOWING EYES
AND SHACKLES
TURN SIGNAL
LIGHTS
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
LIGHT
BLACKOUT
MARKER LIGHT
FRESH AIR
VENTS
FUEL
TANK
Figure 1. M915 Left Front View.
DRIVING
AXLES
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M915
TRAILER RAMPS - There are two steel ramps mounted on the frame rails adjacent to the fifth wheel. The trailer ramps help with alignment during coupling, and prevent the trailer from contacting the vehicle frame or fifth wheel too low during coupling.
FIFTH WHEEL - A fifth wheel is mounted on the vehicle frame over the tandem rear axles. Kingpin lock is air-actuated by a control lever in the cab.
SPARE TIRE HOIST - The spare tire hoist is for lifting the spare tire on and off the carrier.
AIR HOSE TENDER - The air hose tender is located in front of the spare tire carrier and supports a coiled air hose for connecting to the trailer.
SPARE TIRE CARRIER - The spare tire carrier, located directly behind the cab on the vehicle frame, is a steel frame structure that holds the spare wheel and tire assembly.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the cab.
SPARE TIRE RACK - The spare tire rack is mounted to the left frame rail next to the spare tire carrier. The rack assembly supports the hoist for lifting the spare tire on and off the carrier.
DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle.
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender and at the back of the truck behind the rear tires.
TOWING PINTLE - The towing pintle, located at the center of the frame rear crossmember, is provided for interface with trailers requiring a pintle.
0002-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
TRAILER
RAMPS
SPARE TIRE
CARRIER
AIR HOSE
TENDER
SPARE TIRE
HOIST
FIFTH
WHEEL
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
TOWING
PINTLE
MUD
FLAPS
DRIVING AXLES
SPARE TIRE
RACK
BATTERY BOX
Figure 2. M915 Right Rear View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M916
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle designed to protect the grille/headlight area.
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab top used to mark the vehicle cab. The lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the cab top on the driver side and is air operated.
WINCH CONTROLS AND OPERATOR STATION - Winch and controls used to pull out stuck vehicles and for pulling trailers onto vehicle fifth wheel.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries are low.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to the side of the tank.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on the top of each front fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle is mounted to the front suspension assembly and is a steering axle and driving axle.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
0002-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
BRUSH
GUARD
ENGINE
AIR HORN
WINCH
CONTROLS AND
OPERATOR
STATION
TOWING
EYES AND
SHACKLES
BLACKOUT
DRIVE LIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
LIGHTS
REAR
DRIVING
AXLES
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
FRONT
DRIVE
AXLE
BLACKOUT
MARKER
LIGHT
FUEL
TANK
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
Figure 3. M916 Left Front View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M916
TRAILER RAMPS - There are two steel ramps mounted on the frame rails adjacent to the fifth wheel. The trailer ramps help with alignment during coupling and prevent the trailer from contacting the vehicle frame or fifth wheel too low during coupling.
FIFTH WHEEL - A fifth wheel is mounted on the vehicle frame over the tandem rear axles. Kingpin lock is air-actuated by a control lever in the cab.
WINCH CONTROLS - Controls used to operate the winch.
SPARE TIRE HOIST - The spare tire hoist for lifting the spare tire on and off the carrier.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension assembly and is a steering axle and driving axle.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the cab.
SPARE TIRE CARRIER - The spare tire carrier, located directly behind the cab on the vehicle frame, is a steel frame structure that holds the spare wheel and tire assembly.
AIR HOSE TENDER - The air hose tender is located in front of the spare tire carrier and supports a coiled air hose for connecting to the trailer.
DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle .
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender and at the back of the truck behind the rear tires.
TOWING PINTLE - The towing pintle, located at the center of the frame rear crossmember, is provided for interface with trailers requiring a pintle.
0002-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
TRAILER
RAMPS
FIFTH
WHEEL
WINCH
CONTROLS
SPARE TIRE
HOIST
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
TOWING
PINTLE
MUD
FLAPS
DRIVING
AXLES
SPARE
TIRE
CARRIER
AIR
HOSE
TENDER
FRONT DRIVING
AXLE
BATTERY
BOX
Figure 4. M916 Right Rear View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M917
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle designed to protect the grille/headlight area.
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab top used to mark the vehicle cab. The lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the cab top on the driver side and is air operated.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle and trailer when coupled.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries are low.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle.
PUSHER AXLE - The pusher axle is a non-driving axle located directly in front of the driving axle.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to the side of the tank.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on the top of each front fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
CLEARANCE
MARKER LIGHTS
BRUSH
GUARD
ENGINE
AIR HORN
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
~
TOWING EYES
AND SHACKLES
BLACKOUT
MARKER
LIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
LIGHTS
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
LIGHT
FUEL
TANK
PUSHER
AXLE
REAR DRIVING
AXLES
Figure 5. M917 Left Front View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M917
DUMP BODY - The dump truck body provides the capability of hauling and dumping, or spreading heavy loads of hot asphalt, aggregate, dirt, and similar materials. The dump body contains a sealed hydraulic system for raising and lowering the dump bed.
For additional information, refer to TM 5-3805-274-13&P.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension assembly and is a steering axle and driving axle.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the cab.
MUD GUARD - The mud guard is located in front of the pusher axle tires to limit mud being thrown off tires and onto vehicle.
PUSHER AXLE - The pusher axle is a non-driving axle located directly in front of the driving axle.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear suspension assembly and function as driving axles of the vehicle.
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender and at the back of the truck behind the rear tires.
TOWING PINTLE - The towing pintle, located at the center of the frame rear crossmember, is provided for interface with trailers requiring a pintle.
0002-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
DUMP BODY
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
TOWING
PINTLE
MUD
FLAPS
REAR
DRIVING
AXLES
MUD
GUARD
PUSHER
AXLE
FRONT
DRIVING
AXLE
BATTERY
BOX
Figure 6. M917 Right Rear View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M918
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle designed to protect the grille/headlight area.
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab top used to mark the vehicle cab. The lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the cab top on the driver side and is air operated.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries are low.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below cab driver door.
The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to the side of the tank.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on top of each front fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-16
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
BRUSH
GUARD
ENGINE
AIR HORN
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
~
FUEL
TANK
TOWING
EYES AND
SHACKLES
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
LIGHT
TURN SIGNAL
LIGHTS
BLACKOUT
MARKER
LIGHT
Figure 7. M918 Left Front View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M918
BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR BODY - The bituminous distributor body is used for spraying liquid asphalt. The bituminous distributor body consists of a storage tank with a low pressure heating system, hydraulic powered pumping unit, and an adjustable spray bar for distributing bituminous material. For additional information, refer to
TM 5-3895-371-10.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension assembly and is a steering axle and driving axle.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the cab.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle.
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender and at the back of the truck behind the rear tires.
0002-18
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
BITUMINOUS
DISTRIBUTOR BODY
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
MUD
FLAPS
REAR
DRIVING
AXLES
Figure 8. M918 Right Rear View.
BATTERY
BOX
FRONT
DRIVING
AXLE
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M919
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab top used to mark the vehicle cab. Lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the cab top on the driver side and is air operated.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries are low.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to the side of the tank.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on top of each front fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle designed to protect the grille/headlight area.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-20
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
BRUSH
GUARD
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
ENGINE
AIR HORN
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
~
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
TOWING EYES
AND SHACKLES
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
LIGHT
FUEL
TANK
TURN SIGNAL
LIGHTS
BLACKOUT
MARKER LIGHT
Figure 9. M919 Left Front View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M919
CONCRETE MIXER BODY - The M919 Concrete-Mobile® mixer unit is a combination materials transporter and concrete mixing plant. The mixer carries sufficient unmixed material to produce fresh concrete in any quantity up to 8 cubic yards (6.12 cubic meters). The concrete is mixed at the site and since the unit has been precisely calibrated, mixes can be produced that meet or exceed American Concrete
Institute and American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials standards for design strength. For additional information, refer to TM 5-3895-372-10.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension assembly, is a steering axle and driving axle.
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the cab.
PUSHER AXLE - The pusher axle is a non-driving axle located directly in front of the driving axle.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear suspension assembly and function as driving axles of the vehicle.
0002-22
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
CONCRETE
MIXER BODY
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
REAR
DRIVING
AXLES
PUSHER
AXLE
MUD
FLAPS
BATTERY
BOX
FRONT
DRIVING
AXLE
Figure 10. M919 Right Rear View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M920
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab top used to mark the vehicle cab. The lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the cab top on the driver side and is air operated.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle and trailer when coupled.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries are low.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to the side of the tank.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on top of each front fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle designed to protect the grille/headlight area.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-24
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
BRUSH
GUARD
ENGINE
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
AIR HORN
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
~
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
TOWING EYES
AND SHACKLES
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
LIGHT
FUEL
TANK
TURN SIGNAL
LIGHTS
BLACKOUT
MARKER LIGHT
Figure 11. M920 Left Front View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M920
TRAILER RAMPS - There are two steel ramps mounted on the frame rails adjacent to the fifth wheel. The trailer ramps help with alignment during coupling, and prevent the trailer from contacting the vehicle frame or fifth wheel too low during coupling.
FIFTH WHEEL - A fifth wheel is mounted on the vehicle frame over the tandem rear axles. Kingpin lock is air-actuated by a control lever in the cab.
WINCH CONTROLS - Controls used to operate the winch.
WINCH - Used to pull out stuck vehicles and for pulling trailers onto vehicle fifth wheel.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension assembly, is a steering axle and driving axle.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the cab.
PUSHER AXLE - The pusher axle is a non-driving axle located directly in front of the driving axle.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear suspension assembly and function as driving axles of the vehicle.
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender and at the back of the truck behind the rear tires.
TOWING PINTLE - The towing pintle, located at the center of the frame rear crossmember, is provided for interface with trailers requiring a pintle.
0002-26
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
TRAILER
RAMPS
WINCH
CONTROLS
FIFTH
WHEEL
WINCH
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
AND MUFFLER
TOWING
PINTLE
MUD
FLAPS
REAR
DRIVING
AXLES
PUSHER
AXLE
FRONT DRIVING
AXLE
BATTERY
BOX
Figure 12. M920 Right Rear View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M915A1
FRONT SPOTTER MIRRORS - There is an adjustable convex mirror mounted on each front fender. The left mirror is intended to provide a view of the area directly in front of the vehicle, and the right mirror is intended to provide a view of the lower right side of the vehicle.
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle designed to protect grille/headlight area.
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 BIG CAM III diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab top used to mark the vehicle cab. Lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the driver side cab top and is air operated.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle and trailer when coupled.
WORK LAMP RECEPTACLE - There is a small receptacle with a removable rubber dust cap on each side of the cab at the bottom outside corner adjacent to the door handle. The receptacle is provided as a power supply for the 12 Volt work lamp.
DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear suspension assembly and function as driving axles of the vehicle.
SPRING BRAKE CHAMBERS - An air chamber, located at each wheel end on the rear tandem axles, mechanically operates the rear brakes by releasing when air pressure is raised and applying when air pressure is released.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to the side of the tank.
FRESH AIR VENTS - There is a cab air vent on each side of the cab cowl. The vent is opened and closed from inside the cab by a hand-operated lever.
FRONT AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension, is a nondriving front axle.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on top of each front fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-28
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
FRONT
SPOTTER
MIRRORS
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
BRUSH
GUARD
ENGINE
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
LIGHT
~
AIR HORN
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
WORK LAMP
RECEPTACLE
~
TOWING
EYES AND
SHACKLES
BLACKOUT
MARKER
LIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
LIGHTS
FRONT
AXLE
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
FUEL
TANK
FRESH
AIR
VENTS
SPRING
BRAKE
CHAMBERS
Figure 13. M915A1 Left Front View.
DRIVING
AXLES
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
M915A1
TRAILER RAMPS - There are two steel ramps mounted on the frame rails adjacent to the fifth wheel. The trailer ramps help with alignment during coupling, and prevent the trailer from contacting the vehicle frame or fifth wheel too low during coupling.
CAB CONTROLLED FIFTH WHEEL - A fifth wheel is mounted on the vehicle frame over the tandem rear axles. Kingpin lock is air-actuated by a control lever in the cab.
SPARE TIRE HOIST AND RACK ASSEMBLY - The spare tire rack is mounted to the left frame rail next to the spare tire carrier. The rack assembly supports the hoist for lifting the spare tire on and off the carrier.
CAB SLIDING REAR WINDOW AND STONE SHIELD - There is a sliding window protected by a steel grid located on the back panel of the vehicle cab.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
FRONT WHEEL MUD FLAP - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender.
BATTERY BOX AND NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries, a NATO slave receptacle, and two steps for entering the cab.
SPARE TIRE CARRIER - The spare tire carrier, located directly behind the cab on the vehicle frame, is a steel frame structure that holds the spare wheel and tire assembly.
AIR HOSE TENDER - The air hose tender is located in front of the spare tire carrier and supports a coiled air hose for connecting to the trailer.
REAR WHEEL MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted behind each wheel on the rear-rear axle.
BLACKOUT TAIL AND STOPLAMPS - There is a tail lamp located below the rear towing eye on the left and right frame rail that contains the bulbs for blackout tail and stoplamps.
SERVICE TAIL AND STOPLAMPS - There is a tail lamp mounted below the frame rear crossmember at each side of the towing pintle. The service tail lamp provides tail, turn signal, and stop lighting. A separate single-filament bulb functions as the backup lamp.
REAR AIR LINE COUPLINGS - There are two air line quick-disconnect couplings located at the rear of the vehicle below the towing pintle.
TOWING PINTLE - The towing pintle, located at the center of the frame rear crossmember, is provided for interface with trailers requiring a pintle.
REAR TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There is a towing eye mounted on the side of each frame rail adjacent to the towing pintle.
0002-30
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
CAB SLIDING
REAR WINDOW AND
STONESHIELD
REAR TOWING
EYES AND
SHACKLES
SPARE TIRE
HOIST AND
RACK ASSEMBLY
CAB
CONTROLLED
FIFTH
WHEEL
TOWING
PINTLE
TRAILER
RAMPS
EXHAUST
STACK AND
MUFFLER
~
SPARE TIRE
CARRIER
FRONT WHEEL
MUD FLAP
REAR
AIR LINE
COUPLINGS
BLACKOUT
TAIL AND
STOPLAMPS
SERVICE TAIL
AND STOPLAMPS
REAR WHEEL
MUD FLAPS
AIR HOSE
TENDER
BATTERY BOX
AND NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
Figure 14. M915A1 Right Rear View.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
AIR CONDITIONING KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
CONDENSER - Located on the roof of the cab, it is a part of the A/C system where heat dissipation occurs. Inside the condenser, refrigerant gas is cooled and condensed into liquid form and then delivered back to other parts of the system, where it is expanded into a cool gaseous form to cool the cab.
CONDENSER
Figure 15. A/C Condenser.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
SWITCH BOX - Located to the left of the evaporator assembly, it features an ON/OFF switch and HIGH/LOW fan speed switch.
EVAPORATOR ASSEMBLY - The unit mounted below the lower control panel, it functions to remove heat and humidity from the cab by providing cooled air passing through it when the fan is operated.
A/C FILTER - Located below the evaporator assembly, it filters the air passing through the evaporator and out the cold air vents.
EVAPORATOR
ASSEMBLY
SWITCH BOX
A/C FILTER
Figure 16. A/C Evaporator Components.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
A/C ELECTRICAL HARNESS - The electrical harness that powers the A/C system, which includes the magnetic clutch on the compressor and blower fan in the evaporator assembly.
A/C HOSES - The plumbing that routes refrigerant between the compressor, evaporator, condenser, and receiver/dryer.
A/C COMPRESSOR - Is a belt-driven pump, located on the engine, that circulates refrigerant through the A/C system to cool the passenger compartment.
A/C ELECTRICAL
HARNESS
A/C HOSES
COMPRESSOR
Figure 17. A/C Compressor.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
A/C RECEIVER/DRYER - Located on vehicle frame, it stores compressor oil and refrigerant until needed by the A/C system, contains a filter that traps debris, and contains a desiccant that absorbs moisture.
0002
A/C HOSES
A/C ELECTRICAL
HARNESS
RECEIVER/DRYER
Figure 18. A/C Receiver/Dryer.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
CREW PROTECTION KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
WINDSHIELD ARMOR FRAME AND BALLISTIC GLASS - Located in front of cab above instrument panel, it provides armor protection for the windshield area of the cab.
WINDSHIELD ARMOR
FRAME
BALLISTIC GLASS
~
~
Figure 19. Windshield Armor Frame and Ballistic Glass.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
ROOF ARMOR - Armor plate mounted on roof of vehicle cab.
REAR ARMOR - The armor plate located on rear of cab.
ESCAPE HATCH - Located on rear of cab in place of rear window, it provides an emergency exit for vehicle occupants.
0002
ESCAPE HATCH
ROOF ARMOR
REAR ARMOR
Figure 20. Roof Armor, Rear Armor, and Escape Hatch.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
ARMOR DOOR ASSEMBLY - Located on each side of cab, the armored door with ballistic glass provides armor protection for vehicle occupants.
GLOVE BOX ARMOR - The armor plate mounted in front of glove box and access panel on passenger side of cab.
FIREWALL ARMOR, RIGHT HAND - The armor plate mounted on firewall in front of driver side of cab.
GLOVE BOX
ARMOR
~
FIREWALL ARMOR,
RIGHT HAND
Figure 21. Armor Door Assembly.
ARMOR DOOR
ASSEMBLY
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
0002
FIREWALL ARMOR, CENTER - The armor plate mounted in front of firewall.
FLOOR ARMOR - The armor plate mounted on floor of cab, it provides armor protection for the floor area of the cab.
FIREWALL ARMOR, LEFT HAND - The armor plate mounted on firewall in front of the driver side of cab.
FIREWALL ARMOR,
LEFT HAND
FIREWALL ARMOR,
CENTER
~
FLOOR ARMOR
END OF WORK PACKAGE
Figure 22. Interior Armor.
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
EQUIPMENT DATA
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN MODELS
Table 1. Differences Between Models
.
ITEM
Driving Front Axle
Transfer Case
Pusher Axle
Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly
Spare Wheel and Tire
Hoist
Towing Pintle
Fifth Wheel
Winch
Work Lamps
External Receptacle for Work Lamps
Power Take-Off
(PTO)
Hose Tender and
Cable Support
Backup Alarm
Special Bodies:
Dump Body
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bituminous Distributor
Concrete-Mobile®
Mixer
Auxiliary Power
Steering Cylinder
Double Rail Frame
Front Shock
Absorbers
X X X X
Tires:
Highway X X X X
On/Off Road
Crew Protection Kit
Air Conditioning Kit
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TM 9-2320-273-10
EQUIPMENT DATA
NOTE
Refer to the following for specific equipment data.
0003
WEIGHTS
Curb weight
M915A1 ...................................................................................................
19,720 lb (8945 kg)
M915 ........................................................................................................
19,630 lb (8781 kg)
M916 ....................................................................................................
M917 ....................................................................................................
M918 ....................................................................................................
M919 ....................................................................................................
M920 ....................................................................................................
27,500 lb (12,474 kg)
34,030 lb (15,459 kg)
30,280 lb (14,216 kg)
37,540 lb (17,028 kg)
30,270 lb (13,730 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
M915A1 .............................................................................................
M915 ..................................................................................................
M916 ....................................................................................................
M917 ....................................................................................................
50,000 lb (22,680 kg)*
50,000 lb (22,680 kg)*
56,000 lb (25,402 kg)
75,000 lb (34,019 kg)
M918 ....................................................................................................
M919 ....................................................................................................
M920 ....................................................................................................
56,000 lb (25,402 kg)
75,000 lb (34,019 kg)
75,000 lb (34,019 kg)
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
M915A1 .............................................................................................
M915 ..................................................................................................
105,000 lb (47,627 kg)
105,000 lb (47,627 kg)
M916 ..................................................................................................
106,000 lb (48,082 kg)
M917 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M918 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M919 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M920 ..................................................................................................
130,000 lb (58,968 kg)
Front Axle Empty
M915A1 ....................................................................................................
9,730 lb (4,414 kg)
M915 .........................................................................................................
9,920 lb (4,500 kg)
M916 .......................................................................................................
13,370 lb (6,065 kg)
M917 .......................................................................................................
18,670 lb (8,469 kg)
M918 .......................................................................................................
11,980 lb (5,434 kg)
M919 .......................................................................................................
14,280 lb (6,477 kg)
M920 .......................................................................................................
14,700 lb (6,668 kg)
0003-2
TM 9-2320-273-10 0003
WEIGHTS - CONTINUED
Pusher Axle
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................................
N/A
M915 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M916 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M917 .........................
20,000 lb (9,072 kg) (with 40,000 lb (18,144 kg) on 5th wheel)
M918 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M919 ..................................
20,000 lb (9,072 kg) (with 35,550 lb (16,125 kg) payload)
M920 .........................
20,000 lb (9,072 kg) (with 44,730 lb (20,290 kg) on 5th wheel)
Front Axle Loaded
M915A1 ..................................................................................................
11,580 lb (5,253 kg)
M915 .........................
11,055 lb (5,015 kg) (with 30,000 lb (13,608 kg) on 5th wheel)
M916 .........................
14,570 lb (6,609 kg) (with 38,000 lb (12,700 kg) on 5th wheel)
M917 ..................................
10,780 lb (4,890 kg) (with 40,000 lb (18,144 kg) payload)
M918 ....................................
M919 ....................................
12,520 lb (5,679 kg) (with 12,000 lb (5,443 kg) payload)
9,210 lb (4,178 kg) (with 35,500 lb (16,125 kg) payload)
M920 ...........................
8,870 lb (4,023 kg) (with 44,730 lb (20,290 kg) on 5th wheel)
Front Axle Loaded Capacity
M915A1 ..................................................................................................
13,000 lb (5,897 kg)
Rear Axles Empty
M915A1 ....................................................................................................
9,100 lb (4,128 kg)
M915 .........................................................................................................
9,710 lb (4,405 kg)
M916 .......................................................................................................
14,130 lb (6,409 kg)
M917 .......................................................................................................
15,360 lb (6,967 kg)
M918 .......................................................................................................
19,300 lb (8,754 kg)
M919 ....................................................................................................
M920 .......................................................................................................
23,260 lb (10,551 kg)
15,570 lb (7,063 kg)
Rear Axles Loaded
M915A1 ...............................................................................................
M915 ......................
M916 ......................
36,540 lb (16,574 kg)
37,660 lb (17,083 kg) (with 30,000 lb (13,608 kg) on 5th wheel)
40,930 lb (18,566 kg) (with 28,000 lb (12,700 kg) on 5th wheel)
M917 ................................
44,200 lb (20,049 kg) (with 40,000 lb (18,144 kg) payload)
M918 ..................................
30,760 lb (13,953 kg) (with 12,000 lb (5,443 kg) payload)
M919 ................................
43,880 lb (19,904 kg) (with 35,500 lb (16,125 kg) payload)
M920 ......................
46,010 lb (20,870 kg) (with 44,730 lb (20,290 kg) on 5th wheel)
Rear Axles Combined Rated Capacity
M915A1 ...............................................................................................
40,000 lb (18,144 kg)
*Tire load limit to 50,000 lb (22,680 kg) GVW
0003-3
TM 9-2320-273-10 0003
DIMENSIONS
Length Overall Chassis (Less Pintle Hook and Lifting Shackles)
M915A1 ..........................................................................................................
21.8 ft (6.70 m)
M915 ...............................................................................................................
22.4 ft (6.83 m)
M916 ...............................................................................................................
24.5 ft (7.50 m)
M917 ...............................................................................................................
29.2 ft (8.91 m)
M918 ...............................................................................................................
29.2 ft (8.91 m)
M919 ...............................................................................................................
31.2 ft (9.52 m)
M920 ...............................................................................................................
26.6 ft (8.11 m)
Length w/M872 Trailer
M915A1 ........................................................................................................
54.9 ft (16.75 m)
Width (Including Mirrors)
All ...................................................................................................................
10.3 ft (3.14 m)
Width (Mirrors Folded)
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................
M915 through M920 ......................................................................................
8 ft (2.44 m)
8.75 ft (2.70 m)
Height (Over Exhaust Stack, Empty)
M915A1 ..........................................................................................................
11.8 ft (3.60 m)
M915 ...............................................................................................................
11.2 ft (3.42 m)
M916 ...............................................................................................................
11.8 ft (3.60 m)
M917 ...............................................................................................................
11.8 ft (3.60 m)
M918 ...............................................................................................................
11.8 ft (3.60 m)
M919 ...............................................................................................................
11.8 ft (3.60 m)
M920 ...............................................................................................................
11.8 ft (3.60 m)
Height (Reduced, Over Horns, Empty)
M915A1 ............................................................................................................
M915 ...............................................................................................................
9.6 ft (2.93 m)
10.7 ft (3.26 m)
M916 ...............................................................................................................
10.7 ft (3.26 m)
M917 ..................................................................................................................
Not Reducible
M918 ...............................................................................................................
10.7 ft (3.26 m)
M919 ...............................................................................................................
M920 ...............................................................................................................
10.7 ft (3.26 m)
10.7 ft (3.26 m)
Wheelbase
M915A1 ................................................................................................
167.00 in. (424.2 cm)
M915 ....................................................................................................
M916 ....................................................................................................
168.25 in. (427.4 cm)
186.00 in. (472.4 cm)
M917 ....................................................................................................
M918 ....................................................................................................
M919 ....................................................................................................
M920 ....................................................................................................
211.00 in. (535.9 cm)
186.00 in. (472.4 cm)
211.00 in. (535.9 cm)
211.00 in. (535.9 cm)
0003-4
TM 9-2320-273-10 0003
DIMENSIONS - CONTINUED
Minimum Ground Clearance (Under Rear Walking Beam Bracket) (Empty)
M915A1 .........................................................................................................
M915 .........................................................................................................
10 in. (25.4 cm)
10.25 in. (26.0 cm)
M916 .........................................................................................................
11.62 in. (29.5 cm)
M917 .........................................................................................................
12.00 in. (30.5 cm)
M918 .........................................................................................................
11.62 in. (29.5 cm)
M919 .........................................................................................................
12.00 in. (30.5 cm)
M920 .........................................................................................................
11.62 in. (29.5 cm)
Shipping Cube, Minimum
M915Al .............................................................................................
1,674 cu ft (47.4 cu m)
CAPACITIES
Engine Oil (Including Filters)
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................
44 qt (41.6 l)
M915 through M920 .........................................................................................
46 qt (43.53 l)
Engine Filters (Refill Capacity)
M915A1 ................................................................................................................
4.8 qt (4.5 l)
M915 through M920 .............................................................................................
4 qt (3.78 l)
Engine Bypass Filter (Refill Capacity)
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................................
N/A
M915 through M920 .........................................................................................
14 qt (13.24 l)
Cooling System (Refill Capacity)
M915A1 .........................................................................................................
M915 through M920 ...................................................................................
17.3 gal (65.5 l)
16.25 qt (61.49 l)
Fuel Tank
Maximum ......................................................................................................
118 gal (446.63 l)
Usable Capacity
M915A1 ........................................................................................................
M915 through M920 .....................................................................................
112 gal (423.9 l)
110 gal (416.3 l)
Power Steering Reservoir
All ............................................................................................................................
2 qt (1.9 l)
Transmission Oil
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................
8 gal (30.3 l)
M915 through M920 ......................................................................................
5.5 gal (20.82 l)
Transfer Case
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................................
N/A
M915 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M916 through M920 .............................................................................................
5 qt (4.73 l)
0003-5
TM 9-2320-273-10 0003
CAPACITIES - CONTINUED
Rear Axles (Forward/Rear)
M915A1 ............................................................................................
40/36 pt (18.93/17.03 l)
M915 .................................................................................................
40/36 pt (18.93/17.03 l)
M916 through M920 ........................................................................
34/28 pt (16.09/13.25 l)
Winch Reservoir
M916 and M920 ..........................................................................................
42 gal. (158.97 l)
Winch Drum
M916 and M920 ....................................................................................................
Front Axle
5 qt (4.73 l)
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................................
N/A
M915 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M916 through M920 .........................................................................................
27 pt (12.78 l)
PERFORMANCE
Operating Mode and Drive
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................
M915 ....................................................................................................................
On-road, 6x4
On-road, 6x4
M916 .....................................................................................................
M917 .....................................................................................................
M918 .....................................................................................................
M919 .....................................................................................................
M920 .....................................................................................................
On and Off road, 6x6
On and Off road, 8x6
On and Off road, 6x6
On and Off road, 8x6
On and Off road, 8x6
Operating Temperatures
Without additional kits .........................................
With arctic kit .......................................................
-25° F (-31.7° C) to +125° F (51.7° C)
-50° F (-45.6° C) to +125° F (51.7° C)
Drawbar pull (maximum at 0.7 coefficient)
M915A1 ..................................................................................................
20,541 lb (9,317 kg)
M915 ....................................................................................................
M916 ....................................................................................................
25,028 lb (11,262 kg)
45,725 lb (20,576 kg)
M917 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M918 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M919 ....................................................................................................................................
N/A
M920 ....................................................................................................
47,403 lb (21,501 kg)
Maximum Towed Load (w/M872 Trailer – 28,400 lb (12,882.2 kg)
M915A1 ...............................................................................................
M915 ....................................................................................................
54,000 lb (24,494 kg)
54,000 lb (24,494 kg)
Maximum Towed Load (w/M870 Trailer – 40,000 lb (18,144 kg)
M916 and M920 ..................................................................................
60,000 lb (27,216 kg)
0003-6
TM 9-2320-273-10 0003
PERFORMANCE - CONTINUED
Maximum Forward Speed (@ 2100 rpm in top gear)
M915A1 .....................................................................................................
M915 ................................................................................................
58 mph (93.3 kph)
66.60 mph (107.16 kph)
M916 through M920 ...............................................................................
59 mph (94.93 kph)
Maximum Sustained Speed
M915A1 (@800/1200 rpm) .............................................................
1.5/2 mph (2.4/3.2 kph)
M915 (@1300 rpm) ...............................................................................
2.31 mph (3.72 kph)
M916 through M920 ..............................................................................
Speed on Grade (on 3.9% grade) ........................................................
2.23 mph (3.59 kph)
25.00 mph (40.22 kph)
Maximum Grade at GCWR
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................................
19%
M915 ....................................................................................................................................
17%
M916 through M920 ...........................................................................................................
25%
Angle of Approach (Loaded)
M915A1 .................................................................................................................................
38°
M915 ......................................................................................................................................
38°
M916 through M920 .............................................................................................................
42°
Maximum Side Slope (w/ adequate tractive surface) ..........................................................
10%
Maximum Fording Depth ........................................................................
20.00 in. (50.80 cm)
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB
Engine
Make and Model
M915A1 ...........................................................................
Cummins, NTC-400 Big Cam III
M915 through M920 ..............................................................................
Type ..........................................................................
Cummins, NTC-400
4-stroke, Turbocharged, In-line Diesel
Cylinders .....................................................................................................................................
6
Displacement ......................................................................................................
855 CID (14 l)
Compression Ratio .............................................................................................................
14.0:1
Torque (Gross @ 1300 rpm)
M915A1 (Gross @ 1300 rpm) ..........................................................
1,250 lb-ft (1695 N•m)
M915 through M920 (Gross @ 1500 rpm) ......................................
1,150 lb-ft (1559 N•m)
Maximum horsepower
M915A1 (@ 1300 rpm) ..............................................................................
M915 through M920 (@ 2100 rpm) ...........................................................
400 HP (298 kw)
400 HP (298 kw)
Maximum Governed Speed
M915A1 (Load) ........................................................................................................
M915A1 (No Load) ..................................................................................................
2,100 rpm
2,460 rpm
M915 through M920 .................................................................................................
2,100 rpm
0003-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
0003
Oil Filter Quantity and Type
M915A1 ..................................................
2, Engine mounted, On-Replacement Elements
M915 through M920 ....................................................
1, Full Flow, Replaceable Element
Engine Retarder (Internal with Engine) ........................................................
Jacobs, Model 30
Fuel System
Type ...................................................................................................................
Diesel Injection
Fuel Tank (Quantity and Type) .............
1, 26-in. (66-cm) Diameter Cylinder, Aluminum
Air Cleaner (Quantity and Type) ......................................................................
1, Dry Element
Cooling System
Type .........................................................................................................
Radiator, Pressurized
Working Pressure
M915 through M920 .......................................................................................
M915A1 .............................................................................................................
10 psi (0.7 bar)
9 psi (0.6 bar)
Transmission and Torque Converter
Make
M915A1 ..........................................................................................................................
Allison
M915 through M920 ................................................................................................
Caterpillar
Model
M915A1 (transmission) ........................................................................................
HT 754CRD
M915A1 (torque converter) .................................................................
TC 498, lock-up type
M915 through M920 ..................................................................................
D-7155 Overdrive
Type
M915A1 .........................................................................................
M915 through M920 .....................................................................
5-speed, Fully Automatic
16-speed Semi Automatic
Shifter ..................................................................................................
Remote Control Cables
Electrical System
Type ................................................................................................
Basic 12V, 24V Cranking
Alternator ..................................................................................................
12/24V, 85/15 amps
Circuit Breakers .........................................................
Re-settable, Recycling for Headlamps
Batteries ..........................................................................................................
Maintenance-free
Quantity and Type. .................................................................................
4, Maintenance Free
Volts. ..................................................................................................................
12 Volts Each
Connection. ........................................................................................................
Series/Parallel
Capacity. ..................................
950 Cold Cranking Amps @ 0° F (-18° C) @ 24 Volts
Axles
Make
M915A1 .............................................................................................................................
Eaton
M915 through M920 ..................................................................................................
Rockwell
0003-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
0003
Front Axle Type and Model
M915A1 ....................................................................................................
I-Beam, EFA 13F3
M915 ..................................................................................................................
l-Beam FF931
M916 through M920 .................................................................................
Hypoid, FDS-1807
Rear Axle Type and Model
M915A1 Forward-Rear ..............................................................................
Tandem, DS-401P
M915A1 Rear-Rear .......................................................................................
Tandem, RS-401
M915 ...............................................................................................................
M916 through M920 ......................................................................................
Tandem, SQHP
Tandem, SUHD
Pusher Axle Model
M917, M919, and M920 .....................................................................................
TKND 967-P
Capacity at Ground
M915A1 Front ........................................................................................
13,000 lb (5,897 kg)
M915 Front .............................................................................................
12,000 lb (5,400 kg)
M916 through M920 Front ....................................................................
M915A1 Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear ...............................................
20,000 lb (9,000 kg)
40,000 lb (18,144 kg)
M915 Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear ....................................................
38,000 lb (17,100 kg)
M916 through M920 Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear ...........................
58,000 lb (26,100 kg)
M917, M919, and M920 Pusher Axle ..................................................
20,000 lb (9,000 kg)
Steering Angle (Front)
M915A1 .................................................................................................................................
40°
M915 ......................................................................................................................................
32°
M916 through M920 .............................................................................................................
28°
Gear Ratio
M915A1 ............................................................................................................................
4.33:1
M915 .................................................................................................................................
4.44:1
M916 through M920 ........................................................................................................
6.17:1
Differential Lockup .............................................................................................
Air Controlled
Lubrication ......................................................................................................................
Pressure
Transfer Case (M916 through M920)
Make and Model .....................................................................
Oshkosh 18,000 Series F-U29
Ratio .........................................................................................................................................
1:1
Steering
Gear and Type .........................................................................................
M915A1 and M915 ...............................................................................
Ross, Integral Power
Ross, Integral Power
M916 and M920 .............................................
Ross, Integral Power With Assist Cylinder
Power Steering Pump and Type ..................................................
Eaton B165R, Gear Driven
Actuation ..........................................................................................
Hydraulic Power Booster
Steering Gear Ratio ............................................................................................................
20.4:1
0003-9
TM 9-2320-273-10
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
0003
Turning Radius
M915A1 and M915 ........................................................................................
M916 and M918 ................................................................................................
53.5 ft (16.3 m)
80 ft (24.4 m)
M917, M919, and M920 ................................................................................
89.5 ft (27.3 m)
Wheels
Make and Model
M915A1 .........................................................................................................
Firestone, 27404
M915 ..........................................................................................................
M916 through M920 ..................................................................................
Budd No. 47890-3
Budd No. R49210
Quantity
M915A1 ..................................................................................................................................
M915 .......................................................................................................................................
M916 .......................................................................................................................................
M917 .......................................................................................................................................
M918 .......................................................................................................................................
M919 .......................................................................................................................................
M920 .......................................................................................................................................
10
14
14
11
11
11
14
Size (Diameter x Width)
M915A1 ................................................................................
22.5 x 8.25 in. (57.2 x 21 cm)
M915 ..........................................................................................
20 x 8 in. (50.8 x 20.3 cm)
M916 through M920 .....................................................................
24 x 8 in. (61 x 20.3 cm)
Studs and Diameter of Bolt Circle ..............
10 per wheel, 11.25 in. (285.8 mm) diameter
Stud Size ...................................................................................................
1.125 in. (28.6 mm)
Rated Capacity
M915A1 .................................................................................................
7,000 lb (3,157.2 kg)
M915 .........................................................................................................
7,280 lb (3,276 kg)
M916 through M920 ................................................................................
7,430 lb (3,344 kg)
Tires*
Type
M915A1 ...............................................................................
Radial Ply, Tubeless, On-Road
M915 ..........................................................................................................
Bias Ply, On-Road
M916 through M920 ..........................................................................
Bias Ply, On/Off Road
Size
M915A1 ..............................................................
11R22.5, 11 x 22.5 in. (27.9 x 57.2 cm)
M915 ........................................................................................
10 x 20 in. (25.4 x 50.8 cm)
M916 through M920 ...................................................................
11 x 24 in. (27.9 x 61 cm)
0003-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
0003
Weight, with Wheel
M915A1 .........................................................................................................
M915 ............................................................................................................
208 lb (94.3 kg)
218 lb (98.88 kg)
M916 through M920 .................................................................................
326 lb (147.87 kg)
Rated Capacity, On-Road
M915A1 and M915, Single ..................................................................
6,040 lb (2,739.7 kg)
M915A1 and M915, Dual ....................................................................
5,300 lb (2,404.1 kg)
M916 through M920, Single ....................................................................
M916 through M920, Dual ...................................................................
7,430 lb (3,370 kg)
5,220 lb (2,367.8 kg)
Load Range/Ply Rating
M915A1 ..............................................................................................................................
M915 ....................................................................................................................................
G/14
N/A
M916 through M920 ...........................................................................................................
N/A
* Tactical tires, if used, should replace on road tires at all drive wheels.
Tire Air Pressure
M915A1
Front (Maximum Cold Pressure) ................................................................
105 psi (724 kPa)
Rear (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...................................................................
95 psi (655 kPa)
M915
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) .....................................................
75 psi (517 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...........................................
80 psi (552 kPa)
95 psi (655 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ......................................................
50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) .............................................
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
50 psi (345 kPa)
70 psi (483 kPa)
M916
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) .....................................................
90 psi (621 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...........................................
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ......................................................
90 psi (621 kPa)
95 psi (655 kPa)
50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) .............................................
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
50 psi (345 kPa)
90 psi (621 kPa)
M917
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) .....................................................
95 psi (655 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) .........................................
65 psi (448 kPa)
100 psi (689 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ......................................................
50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) .............................................
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
60 psi (414 kPa)
90 psi (621 kPa)
0003-11
TM 9-2320-273-10
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
0003
M918
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) .....................................................
75 psi (517 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...........................................
65 psi (448 kPa)
80 psi (552 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ......................................................
50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) .............................................
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
50 psi (345 kPa)
50 psi (345 kPa)
M919
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...................................................
100 psi (689 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) .........................................
90 psi (621 kPa)
100 psi (689 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ....................................................
50 psi (3454 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) .............................................
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
60 psi (414 kPa)
90 psi (621 kPa)
M920
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...................................................
100 psi (689 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ..........................................
100 psi (689 kPa)
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) .........................................
100 psi (689 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ......................................................
50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) .............................................
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................
50 psi (345 kPa)
90 psi (621 kPa)
Brake System
Actuating ...........................................................................................
Air Mechanical (S-Cam)
Fail Safe (Spring Brakes)
M915A1 ........................................................................................................
Forward-Rear (2)
M915 through M920 ........................................................
Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear (4)
Pressure Range
M915A1 ......................................................................................
M915 through M920 .....................................................................
65-150 psi (448-1034 kPa)
65-125 psi (448-862 kPa)
Fifth Wheel
Type
M915A1 .........................................
Cab Controlled, Air Lock, Sliding, 12 in. (305 mm)
M915 ...........................................................
M916 through M920 .........................
36 in. (91.4 cm) Diameter Single Oscillating
36 in. (91.4 cm) Diameter Full 4-Way Oscillating
Height
M915 ...............................................
Unloaded 53 in. (135 cm), Loaded 50 in. (127 cm)
M916 through M920 ........................................................................
Loaded 64 in. (163 cm)
0003-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
0003
Rated Capacity
Vertical .................................................................................................
Drawbar ..............................................................................................
40,000 lb (18,144 kg)
150,000 lb (68,039 kg)
Plate Diameter/Oscillation. .............................................................
36 in. (91.4 cm) diameter
Kingpin Size. ....................................................................................................
2 in. (50.8 mm)
M915A1 and M915 through M919 ................................................................
2 in. (50.8 mm)
M920 ............................................................................................................
3.5 in. (88.9 mm)
Pitch (Front/Rear) ..............................................................................................................
15/10°
Pintle
Make and Model ............................................................................................
Holland, No. 760
Rated Capacity
M915A1 ........................................................................................
25 tons (22.7 metric tons)
M915 through M920 ....................................................................
30 tons (27.2 metric tons)
Towing Eyes
Quantity
M915A1 ...........................................................................................................
2 Front, 2 Rear
M915 ................................................................................................................
2 Front, 2 Rear
M916 ................................................................................................................
2 Front, 2 Rear
M917 ................................................................................................................
2 Front, 2 Rear
M918 ..............................................................................................................................
M919 ..............................................................................................................................
2 Front
2 Front
M920 ................................................................................................................
2 Front, 2 Rear
Maximum load up to 45° angle from long axis (each) ........................
60,000 lb (27,216 kg)
Cab
Make ........................................................................................................................
AM General
Type .................................................................
2 Passenger, All Steel, with Butterfly Hood
ACCESSORIES
Floodlights
M915, M916, and M920 .................................................................................................
2 Fixed
Arctic Heater Kit, Engine (Optional)
M915, M915A1, M916, and M920 ...........................................................................
Fuel Fired
Arctic Heater Kit, Personnel (Optional)
M915, M915A1, M916, and M920 ...........................................................................
Fuel Fired
Tool Box ........................................................
1 Under Passenger Seat and Center of Cab
0003-13
TM 9-2320-273-10 0003
ACCESSORIES - CONTINUED
Air Horn
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................
M915 ....................................................................................................................
M916 ....................................................................................................................
M917 ....................................................................................................................
M918 ....................................................................................................................
M919 ....................................................................................................................
M920 ....................................................................................................................
1, Top of Cab
2, Top of Cab
2, Top of Cab
1, Top of Cab
2, Top of Cab
2, Top of Cab
2, Top of Cab
Heater/Defroster ..........................................................................
Fresh Air Type, Standard
MILITARY LOAD CLASSIFICATION (MLC)
Vehicle Without Trailer
M915A1 .......................................................................................................................................
8
M915 ...........................................................................................................................................
8
M916 .........................................................................................................................................
12
M917 .........................................................................................................................................
50
M918 .........................................................................................................................................
21
M919 .........................................................................................................................................
45
M920 .........................................................................................................................................
14
Vehicle With Trailer, Unloaded/Loaded
M915A1
M871 ..................................................................................................................................
14/35
M872 ..................................................................................................................................
14/46
M1062 ................................................................................................................................
11/34
M967 ..................................................................................................................................
13/29
M969 ..................................................................................................................................
14/30
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0003-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
THEORY OF OPERATION
INTRODUCTION
This work package (WP) describes how components of the vehicle work and is provided to give the operator a basic knowledge of the vehicle prior to its use. A description of each functional system is provided below.
0004-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0004
POWER TRAIN FUNCTION
The power train is the mechanism by which power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. The power train is mounted to a channel type frame, and together they make up the chassis. The vehicle power train consists of a diesel engine and automatic transmission connected to two rear tandem axles. The engine and transmission transmit power to the forward-rear axle through a transfer case (if equipped) and a propeller shaft. An inter-axle propeller shaft connects the forward-rear axle to the rear-rear axle. The front axle of the M915 and M915A1 is a non-driving axle as indicated by its 6 x 4 drive designation. The front axle of the M916 through
M920 is a driving front axle indicated by the 8 x 6 or 6 x 6 drive designations. The front driving axle is driven by a propeller shaft from the transfer case. The M917,
M919, and M920 are equipped with pusher axles located in front of the rear driving tandem axles. The pusher axles are non-driving axles used to help distribute the weight of loads carried on the vehicle across three axles instead of two. The pusher axles are connected to the chassis by swing arms and air bags. The pusher axle is raised and lowered using the pusher axle controls in the cab to adjust the amount of weight carried by the pusher axle.
REAR-REAR
AXLE
DIESEL ENGINE
INTER-AXLE
PROPELLER SHAFT
PRIMARY
PROPELLER
SHAFT
FRONT AXLE
Figure 1. Power Train.
FORWARD-REAR
AXLE
PUSHER AXLE
TM 9-2320-273-10
POWER TRAIN FUNCTION - CONTINUED
0004
Front and tandem rear axles are connected to the chassis by separate suspension systems. The front suspension consists of two leaf spring assemblies and shock absorbers connected to the front axle beam or driving axle and the vehicle frame. The tandem rear axle suspension features two equalizer beams connecting the forward-rear and rear-rear axles so both are sprung by a single leaf spring assembly at each side of the vehicle frame. In addition, a torque rod assembly is connected to the tandem rear axles and frame rear suspension crossmember to limit the amount of axle housing rotation when power is transmitted to the ground.
FRAME
TORQUE
ROD
SHOCK
ABSORBER
LEAF
SPRING
LEAF
SPRING
FRONT
AXLE
Figure 2. Front and Rear Suspension.
EQUALIZER
BEAM
TM 9-2320-273-10 0004
ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION FUNCTION
The vehicles are equipped with a Cummins NTC-400 engine. It is an in-line, six-cylinder, four-stroke, four-cycle, turbocharged diesel. The engine powers the drive wheels as well as the following accessories:
• Exhaust-driven turbocharger
• Belt-driven water pump
• Belt-driven cooling fan
• Belt-driven alternator
• Gear-driven air compressor
• Gear-driven fuel injector pump
• Gear-driven power steering pump
• Gear-driven engine oil pump
TURBOCHARGER
AIR
COMPRESSOR
WATER
PUMP
ALTERNATOR
COOLING
FAN
ENGINE
OIL
PUMP
Figure 3. Engine and Accessories.
POWER
STEERING
PUMP
FUEL
INJECTOR
PUMP
TM 9-2320-273-10
ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION FUNCTION - CONTINUED
0004
The M915 through M920 vehicles use Caterpillar Model D-7155 Overdrive 16-Speed semi-automatic transmissions with remote air control power shift. Gear selection is accomplished through a manual control lever mounted on a control tower in the cab.
The manual control lever is connected to the transmission by air hose using operating air from vehicle air supply. The transmission will not operate unless the transmission air control valve is pushed in to provide transmission with operating air from vehicle air supply.
MANUAL
CONTROL
LEVER
TRANSMISSION
AIR CONTROL
VALVE
Figure 4. M915 through M920 Transmission Controls.
TM 9-2320-273-10
ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION FUNCTION - CONTINUED
0004
The M915A1 vehicles use the Allison HT 754CRD transmission, a fully automatic,
5-speed type. Gear selection is accomplished through a remote control cable connecting a range selector lever on the side of the transmission to a manual control lever mounted on a control tower in the cab. During normal driving operation, shifting is controlled automatically by the transmission modulator control, which determines the transmission gear range setting from the position of the engine fuel control lever on the fuel injector pump. The transmission drives the speedometer through a gear and cable.
MANUAL
CONTROL
LEVER
SPEEDOMETER
CABLE
RANGE
SELECTOR
LEVER
Figure 5. M915A1 Transmission Controls.
FUEL SYSTEM FUNCTION
The vehicle fuel system consists of a fuel injection pump driven off the air compressor which is driven by the engine accessory drive. The fuel injection pump has a built-in governor that meters fuel through a screen filter, solenoid shutoff valve, and into the injectors.
CREW PROTECTION KIT FUNCTION
The Crew Protection Armor Kit consists of two armored doors, roof armor, windshield ballistic glass, floor armor, firewall armor, rear cab armor panels, and an armored emergency exit. The floor armor consists of three panels and is installed under the seat and operator floor controls. The door armor assembly consists of an armored door, hinge, sliding ballistic glass, and armored frame that is mounted to the existing door opening. The rear armor consists of two panels and rests on the floor armor.
TM 9-2320-273-10
CREW PROTECTION KIT FUNCTION - CONTINUED
0004
The roof armor consists of two panels that are supported by door frames, rear armor, and a center support. The windshield and side windows are constructed of ballistic glass. The remaining armor panels are fastened to the vehicle using attachment brackets and Grade 8 attachment hardware.
AIR CONDITIONING KIT FUNCTION
Air Conditioning Kit is installed on an armored vehicle to control the temperature inside the cab. A belt-driven compressor is installed on the engine, a condenser is installed on the cab roof, an evaporator assembly is installed on the interior of the cab, and a receiver/dryer is installed on the outside of the cab. Refrigerant is transferred to each of these components through O-ring sealed hoses. Electrical power is tied into the existing electrical system on the vehicle. The entire system is controlled by an A/C
ON/OFF switch and fan speed LOW/MEDIUM/HI switch inside the cab.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0004-7/8 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 2
OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
INTRODUCTION
WARNING
Operators must know the location and understand the proper use of all controls and indicators before operating the tractor.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Prior to operating the vehicle, become familiar with the location, function, and use of all controls and indicators. This work package (WP) describes each control or indicator by name and function. Illustrations are provided to aid in identifying each control and indicator.
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Refer to the following tables for information on controls and indicators.
1
Table 1. Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators
.
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
CONTROL
PANEL
CIRCUIT BREAKER AND
RELAY ACCESS PANEL
~
~
~
~
Key
1.
GLOVE BOX
TACHOGRAPH
SECTION
LOWER CONTROL
PANEL
Figure 1. Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators.
Control/Indicator Function
Instrument Panel The Instrument Panel is located below the cowl and windshield, and supports the instrument cluster, tachograph, control panel, lower control panel, circuit breaker and relay access panel, and glove box.
TM 9-2320-273-10
1
Table 2. Instrument Cluster and Gauges
.
3
2
5
0005
1
2
M915 THROUGH M920
3
4
5
Key
1.
2.
M915A1
Figure 2. Instrument Cluster and Gauges.
Control/Indicator Function
Fuel Gauge This gauge indicates the amount of fuel in the fuel tank when the ENGINE RUN switch is in the ON position.
Voltmeter The VOLTS meter indicates battery voltage from 8–18
Volts. The normal operating range is 12–15 Volts.
Below 11 Volts (Red Area on Voltmeter):
Indicates a low battery or possible malfunction. Stop truck and report problem to Field Maintenance.
Above 15 Volts (Red Area on Voltmeter):
Indicates batteries are being overcharged due to a malfunction. Report problem to Field Maintenance.
Key
3.
4.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0005
Table 2. Instrument Cluster and Gauges - Continued.
Control/Indicator Function
Between 11 and 12 Volts (Yellow Area on Voltmeter):
Indicates battery is undercharged. Turn off all electrical circuits (if possible) and run engine at highest rpm permitted for the existing conditions. Voltmeter should indicate charge in green area. Report problem to Field
Maintenance.
12 to 15 Volts (Green Area on Voltmeter):
Indicates normal operating range.
Transmission Oil
Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates temperature of transmission oil in degrees Fahrenheit and Centigrade. The normal operating range is 100–250° F (38–121° C).
Transmission Oil
Temperature Gauge
Decal (M915A1
Only)
CAUTION
If transmission oil temperature rises to the red zone,
300° F (149° C), stop tractor in a safe place, shift to
NEUTRAL position, and operate engine at 1,500 rpm until gauge indicator is in normal operating temperature. If temperature cannot be lowered to normal operating temperature, below 300° F
(149° C), after operating in neutral for 3 minutes, shut down engine and notify Field Maintenance.
Continued operation at excessive temperatures will cause damage to transmission.
This decal, located on the instrument cluster directly above the TRANS OIL TEMP gauge, is a quick reference for the three color-coded operating ranges on the transmission oil temperature gauge.
5.
Oil Pressure
Gauge
CAUTION
The minimum engine oil pressure at 1,700–2,100 rpm is 30 psi (207 kPa) for safe engine operation.
At idle, the minimum safe engine oil pressure is
10 psi (69 kPa). If engine oil pressure is below minimum levels, shut down engine immediately and investigate cause. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
This gauge indicates engine oil pressure with engine running. At 2,100 rpm rated engine speed, the normal oil pressure range is 35–50 psi (241–345 kPa). At idle, minimum oil pressure limit is 10 psi (69 kPa).
0005-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 3. Instrument Cluster, Gauges, and Indicator
.
1
4
3
2
0005
4
3
2
1
Key
1.
Figure 3. Instrument Cluster, Gauges, and Indicator.
Control/Indicator Function
FRONT AIR PSI
Gauge
WARNING
Operating tractor with air pressure below the normal operating range indicates a loss in air supply and will limit the number of times the brakes can be applied before losing front wheel brakes. Failure to stop tractor and allow air pressure to build up may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
This gauge registers the amount of air pressure in the front brake system. Normal operating range is
105–140 psi (724–965 kPa) for M915A1 or
105–120 psi (724–827 kPa) for M915 through M920 vehicles.
Key
2.
3.
4.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0005
Table 3. Instrument Cluster, Gauges, and Indicator - Continued.
Control/Indicator
LOW AIR
PRESSURE Indicator
Function
WARNING
If low pressure warning lamp illuminates and buzzer sounds while driving tractor, stop immediately and investigate the cause. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
This indicator illuminates red when either the front or rear air system pressure is between 64–76 psi
(441–524 kPa) and below. The low air pressure buzzer will sound at the same time the LOW AIR
PRESSURE indicator comes on.
REAR AIR PSI
Gauge
WARNING
Operating tractor with air pressure below the normal operating range indicates a loss in air supply and will limit the number of times the brakes can be applied before the forward-rear axle emergency park/spring brakes are automatically activated.
Failure to stop tractor and allow air pressure to build up may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
This gauge registers the amount of air pressure in the rear brake system. Normal operating range is
105–140 psi (724–965 kPa) for M915A1 or
105–120 psi (724–827 kPa) for M915 through M920 vehicles.
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Gauge
CAUTION
Do not operate vehicle if coolant temperature rises above 220° F (104° C) or engine overheating will occur. Shut down engine and do not start until coolant temperature is in normal range. If problem persists, notify Field Maintenance. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
The TEMP gauge (M915A1) or WATER gauge (M915 through M920) indicates engine coolant temperature in degrees Fahrenheit and Centigrade. The normal operating range is 180–200° F (82–93° C) for M915A1 and 165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through M920 vehicles.
0005-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 4. Engine Run Switch, Start Button, and Cigar Lighter/Utility Plug
.
1 2
3
0005
Key
1.
Figure 4. Engine Run Switch, Start Button, and Cigar Lighter/Utility Plug.
Control/Indicator
ENGINE RUN
Switch
Function
The ENGINE RUN switch is a three-position, key operated switch. To operate switch, insert key and turn switch to ON position. In the ON position, power to the ignition and accessories is connected; the low oil pressure and parking brake warning lamps will illuminate, and if air system pressures are below 60 psi (414 kPa), the low air pressure lamp and warning buzzer will come on. After starting engine and with all systems operational, the low oil pressure lamp, low air pressure lamp, and warning buzzer will go off. The parking brake warning lamp will remain on until the brake is released. The engine run switch is used to shut down the engine and disconnect power to all accessories by turning switch to OFF position.
2.
ENGINE START
Button
CAUTION
Do not depress and hold engine start button for more than 15 seconds at a time. Allow two minute intervals between cranking engine for starter motor to cool. Once engine is running, do not depress start button. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
3.
CIGAR
LIGHTER/Utility
Plug
The ENGINE START button is operated by depressing and holding the button down until the engine starts.
Release button once engine starts.
The utility plug, located on the instrument cluster adjacent to the ENGINE START button, is used as a
12V power source for accessories.
1
RPM
HAND
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 5. Tachograph
.
CLOCK
HANDS
RPM
HAND
MPH
HAND
CHART
0005
Key
1.
MPH
HAND
M915 THROUGH M920
Control/Indicator
Tachograph
M915A1
KEY
1
Figure 5. Tachograph.
Function
The Tachograph, located on the instrument panel to the right of the instrument cluster, indicates and records the following data on a 7-day graph chart:
Ground speed is indicated by the mph hand.
Engine speed is indicated by the rpm hand.
Distance traveled is indicated in miles on the odometer.
Hours and minutes are indicated by analog clock hands.
CAUTION
Do not operate tractor without tachograph chart installed or damage to tachograph will result.
The chart is replaced by opening the front of the tachograph. Insert key in bezel lock and turn key counterclockwise until tachograph can be opened.
Swing tachograph down to its horizontal position and remove and replace the chart. Ensure new chart is seated prior to closing.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 6. Ether Quick-Start and Clearance Lamps Buttons and Indicators
.
0005
4
1
4
1
2
3
2
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 6. Ether Quick-Start and Clearance Lamps Buttons and Indicators.
Control/Indicator
Clearance Lamp
Button
CL LPS (Clearance
Lamps) Indicator
ETHER Indicator
(M915A1 Only)
Ether Quick-Start
Button
Function
This button is depressed to flash the tractor and trailer clearance and marker lamps on and off.
This indicator is designed to aid the operator in locating the clearance lamps button. This indicator will illuminate when the LIGHTS switch is pulled out to the first and second positions, and its brightness can be adjusted by rotating the LIGHTS switch knob.
The ETHER indicator is designed to aid the operator in locating the ether quick-start push button. This indicator will illuminate when the LIGHTS switch is pulled out to the first and second positions, and its brightness can be adjusted by rotating the LIGHTS switch knob.
This button is depressed to inject ether in the engine intake manifold for cold weather starting. Depress and release switch button to operate.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 7. Control Panel Indicators
.
0005
1
2
3
4
5
6
4.
5.
6.
Key
1.
2.
3.
Figure 7. Control Panel Indicators.
Control/Indicator Function
ENG OIL Indicator This indicator illuminates red when engine oil pressure is below 10 psi (69 kPa) for M915A1 or 5 psi (34 kPa) for
M915 through M920 vehicles, the minimum operating limit.
ENG TEMP Indicator This indicator illuminates red when engine coolant temperature exceeds 220° F (104° C) for M915A1 or
225° F (107° C) for M915 through M920 vehicles, the maximum operating limit.
DIFF LOCK OUT
Indicator
This indicator illuminates red when the INTERAXLE
DIFFERENTIAL control is placed in the LOCK position and inter-axle differentials are engaged. On M916–M920 the front driving axle is also locked.
PTO Indicator (M916 through M920)
PARK BRAKE
Indicator
This red light comes on when the PTO control is engaged.
This indicator illuminates red when SYSTEM PARK control knob is pulled out.
HIGH BEAM
Indicator
The HIGH BEAM indicator illuminates blue when the cab floor-mounted headlamp dimmer switch is depressed for high beam operation.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 8. Lights and Engine Retarder Switch
.
1
2
3
5
4
Key
1.
2.
Figure 8. Lights and Engine Retarder Switch.
Control/Indicator
LIGHTS Switch
Function
CAUTION
Do not operate service lamps for extended periods of time with engine off. Failure to comply may prevent engine from starting due to run down batteries.
ENGINE
RETARDER
Switch
The LIGHTS switch is a combination switch and rheostat that controls all tractor service lamps. Pulling the LIGHTS switch knob out to the first position turns on the marker/turn signal lamps, service tail and stop lamps, clearance lamps, and instrument panel lamps.
Pulling the LIGHT switch knob out to the second position turns on the service head lamps in addition to the same lamps operated in the first position. Turning the LIGHTS switch knob when in the first or second position will dim or brighten the instrument panel lights.
This switch is located on the control panel to the right of the LIGHTS switch and controls the number of engine cylinders activated when the engine retarder foot switch is depressed. The HIGH position designates all 6 cylinders for maximum engine braking, MED position designates 4 cylinders, and
LOW position provides 2 cylinders for minimum engine braking.
0005
Key
3.
4.
5.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 8. Lights and Engine Retarder Switch - Continued.
Control/Indicator Function
WARNING
Before backing operations, ensure the backup alarm override switch is in the down position. Do not disable the alarm when personnel or equipment safety may be sacrificed as a result. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
0005
BACKUP
ALARM Override
Switch (M916 through M920)
WORK LAMPS
Switch
(M916 and M920)
OPERATION
Switch
This switch is located on the control panel under the engine retarder switch and allows the operator to disable the backup alarm in “Quiet Zones”. Place this switch in the up position to turn off the backup alarm.
Return the switch to the down position to activate the backup alarm.
This switch is located on the control panel under the backup alarm override switch. Place this switch in the
ON position to turn the stationary work lamps on, and the OFF position to turn off.
CAUTION
Do not operate blackout lamps for extended periods of time with engine off. Failure to comply may prevent engine from starting due to run down batteries.
This switch is a two-position switch used to select either the blackout or service lamps, but does not turn lamps on. The LIGHTS switch is used to turn all lamps on and off. To operate this switch, pull the toggle out and move to either position. This feature prevents accidental engagement or disengagement of the service lamps. In the NORMAL position, all blackout lamps are inoperable and all service lamps are operable. In the BLACKOUT position all service lamps, backup lamps, and horn are automatically locked out, and the blackout marker, tail, and stop lamps will operate when the LIGHTS switch is pulled to its first position. Pulling the LIGHTS switch to its second position turns on the blackout drive lamps in addition to the same blackout lamps operated in the first position. The blackout stop lamps (brake lights) will operate with the LIGHTS switch in either position.
0005-11
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 9. Wiper and Washer Controls and Indicators
.
3
0005
4
2
Figure 9. Wiper and Washer Controls and Indicators.
Key Control/Indicator
1.
2.
3.
WIPER Control
WIPER Indicator
Function
The WIPER control is a valve for operating the windshield wiper motor. Pull out the WIPER control knob to operate the pneumatic wiper motor, and rotate the switch knob for variable HI and LOW speed adjustment.
Push in the knob to turn the wipers off.
This indicator is designed to aid the operator in locating the WIPER switch. This indicator will illuminate when the LIGHTS switch is pulled out to the first and second positions, and its brightness can be adjusted by rotating the LIGHTS switch knob.
WASHER Indicator This indicator, located on the control panel to the right of the WIPER indicator, is designed to aid the operator in locating the WASHER switch. This indicator will illuminate when the LIGHTS switch is pulled out to the first and second positions, and its brightness can be adjusted by rotating the LIGHTS switch knob.
4.
WASHER Control The WASHER Control, located on the control panel below the WASHER indicator, is a valve for operating the windshield washer pump. Depress and hold the
WASHER Control knob to spray cleaning compound on the windshield. Release knob to stop spray.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 10. Inter-Axle Differential Control
.
1
1
0005
Key
1.
M915 and M915A1
M916 THROUGH M920
Figure 10. Inter-Axle Differential Control.
Control/Indicator
INTER-AXLE
DIFFERENTIAL
Control
Function
CAUTION
Never move the inter-axle differential control to the
LOCK position while tractor is moving or any wheel is spinning or damage to equipment will result.
This control is a valve for operating the air actuated inter-axle differential lockup on all models. This control engages the front driving axle on the M916 through M920.
M915 and M915A1
To engage the differential lock, bring tractor to a complete stop and move control lever to LOCK position. The DIFF LOCK OUT indicator will illuminate red when control lever is in LOCK position. To disengage the differential lock, move the control lever to UNLOCK position while the tractor is moving.
M916 through M920
To engage the differential lock and engage the front driving axle, bring tractor to a complete stop and move control lever to LOCK position. The DIFF
LOCK OUT indicator will illuminate red when control lever is in LOCK position. To disengage the differential lock, let up on accelerator and move the control lever to UNLOCK position temporarily, then place switch in the center (OFF) position for normal driving while the tractor is moving.
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 11. Tractor and Trailer Parking Brake Controls
.
0005
2
Key
1.
Figure 11. Tractor and Trailer Parking Brake Controls.
Control/Indicator
TRAILER AIR
SUPPLY Control
(M915, M916, M917,
M920, and M915A1)
Function
CAUTION
If air system pressure drops to 60 psi (414 kPa) as a result of a release of system pressure or an air leak, the trailer air supply protection valve will automatically trip and apply the trailer spring brakes to prevent the tractor spring brakes from locking up.
Failure to stop tractor and allow air system pressure to build up will result in damage to equipment.
This control is a valve used to supply compressed air to the trailer air reservoirs and brakes. Whenever the
SYSTEM PARK control is pulled out to apply the tractor parking brakes, the TRAILER AIR SUPPLY control knob will automatically pop out to apply the trailer brakes. To release the trailer brakes, push in the
TRAILER AIR SUPPLY control knob after releasing the tractor parking brakes.
Key
2.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0005
Table 11. Tractor and Trailer Parking Brake Controls - Continued.
Control/Indicator
SYSTEM PARK
Control
Function
WARNING
Never use the parking brake in place of the service brake for stopping the tractor. Sudden lockup of spring brakes may result in loss of control of tractor and possible damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The SYSTEM PARK control is a valve used to apply or release the parking brakes. To apply the parking brakes, bring tractor to a complete stop, then pull the
SYSTEM PARK control knob out. The PARK
BRAKE indicator will illuminate red when the
SYSTEM PARK Control is in the out position. Push the knob in to release the parking brakes. If tractor is connected to a trailer, push in the TRAILER AIR
SUPPLY control knob after releasing the tractor parking brakes.
0005-15
1
2
TM 9-2320-273-10
3
Table 12. Lower Control Panel
.
4 5 6
7
0005
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CENTER
BUTTON
ADJUSTMENT
KNOB
HEAT Control
FAN Switch
DRIVER Control
PASSENGER
Control
FRESH VENT
Control
RECIR VENT
Control
Figure 12. Lower Control Panel.
Control/Indicator
THROTTLE Control
(M916 through
M920)
Function
This control is used for setting engine speed for operating the PTO or maintaining fast idle. Press the center of the button and pull out the control knob until desired engine speed set. Release the center button. For fine tuning, turn adjustment knob. Press button and push in control to return engine to idle.
This knob opens and closes a valve that controls the amount of engine coolant flowing through the heater core.
To increase the heater temperature, pull the HEAT control knob out, and to decrease the temperature, push knob in.
The heater fan has three speeds controlled by a 4-position rotary switch. Turn the FAN switch knob clockwise to
LOW, MED, or HIGH positions to operate the fan. Turn knob counterclockwise to OFF position to stop fan motor.
This knob operates the air vents for the driver side of cab. Pull DRIVER control knob out to divert air to the driver side; push in knob to close air vents.
This knob operates the heater air vents for the passenger side of cab. Pull PASSENGER control knob out to divert air to passenger side; push in knob to close air vents.
This knob controls the fresh air vent. Pull FRESH VENT control knob out to send fresh air to passenger side; push in knob to close fresh air vent.
This knob controls the recirculation vent. Pull RECIR
VENT control knob out to recirculate cab air through the heater; push in knob to close vent.
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 13. Air Filter Restriction Indicator
.
RESET BUTTON
1
0005
WINDOW
Key
1.
WINDOW
M915 THROUGH M920
RESET BUTTON
M915A1
Figure 13. Air Filter Restriction Indicator.
Control/Indicator
Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
Function
NOTE
Air cleaner maintenance is required when red band is visible on air filter restriction indicator. Notify
Field Maintenance to service air filter.
This indicator, mounted on the instrument panel adjacent to the lower control panel, is designed to indicate when the engine air cleaner requires cleaning.
A clear or green band visible through the window indicates there is adequate air flow through the air cleaner; a yellow or red band indicates the air cleaner is restricted and must be cleaned. Resetting is accomplished by depressing a reset button.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 14. Circuit Breaker and Relay Access Panel
.
0005
SCREWS
1
Key
1.
Figure 14. Circuit Breaker and Relay Access Panel.
Control/Indicator
Panel Cover
Function
There is a panel cover that must be unlocked and opened to gain access to the circuit breaker and relay access panel. To open panel, turn three slotted head screws one quarter turn counterclockwise, and swing the cover down.
To close cover, raise cover and turn three screws one quarter turn clockwise.
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 15. Circuit Breaker and Relays
.
2
0005
3
Key
1.
2.
3.
Control/Indicator
Service, Blackout, and Trailer Lamp
Relays
Starter Relay
Figure 15. Circuit Breaker and Relays.
Relay Identification
Decals
Function
There are nine relays on this panel that function when the tractor and trailer lamp switches are switched on and off.
There is nothing the operator can do to these relays if a problem is experienced in one of the lamp systems; notify
Field Maintenance.
This relay energizes and closes the starter solenoid circuit. Operator can do nothing to this relay if the starter becomes inoperable; notify Field Maintenance.
Below each relay is an identification decal that identifies the component or components controlled by that relay.
Field Maintenance uses the decals to identify relays when troubleshooting a problem.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 16. Circuit Breakers and Glove Compartment Door
.
1
0005
KNOB
3
2
Key
1.
2.
Figure 16. Circuit Breakers and Glove Compartment Door.
Control/Indicator
Glove Compartment
Door
Circuit Breaker
Identification Decals
Function
The glove compartment door is opened by turning the fastener knob a quarter turn and swinging the door down.
To close, swing door up and latch by turning knob.
Each circuit breaker is identified by a number (e.g., CB5) directly below its reset button. Each number corresponds to an electrical circuit protected by that circuit breaker.
Field Maintenance uses the numbers to identify circuit breakers when troubleshooting a problem.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0005
Key
3.
Table 16. Circuit Breakers and Glove Compartment Door - Continued.
Control/Indicator
Circuit Breaker
Buttons
Function
WARNING
Do not attempt to check and reset circuit breakers while driving the tractor. Always pull safely to side of road first. If tractor cannot be safely operated due to a circuit breaker that cannot be reset, do not attempt to operate tractor. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
There are nine 20 amp circuit breakers on the access panel. If an electrical component will not function or ceases to function (for example, the heater fan stops with FAN switch in HIGH position), the circuit breaker may have tripped and should be checked and reset. To reset any circuit breaker, open panel cover, identify circuit breaker by its number or if button is out, and depress the button. If button remains in after depressing it and component becomes operational, close panel cover. If circuit breaker trips again, an overload or short in the circuit has taken place. If tractor can be safely operated without the affected electrical item, complete mission and notify Field
Maintenance. If tractor cannot be safely operated, secure tractor and notify Field Maintenance.
0005-21
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 17. Cab Floor Mounted Controls
.
0005
Key
1.
2.
3.
2
Accelerator Pedal
4
3
5
Figure 17. Cab Floor Mounted Controls.
Control/Indicator
Headlamp Dimmer
Switch
Decontamination
Apparatus
Function
To operate the service lamp high beams, pull the LIGHTS switch out to the second position and depress and release the floor-mounted foot switch. The HIGH BEAM indicator on the control panel will illuminate blue when the high beams are on. To dim head lamps, depress and release foot switch again.
NOTE
The decontamination apparatus is used to spray a decontaminating agent on vehicles and equipment to reduce levels of chemical toxic agents to the minimum extent to make them safe and allow for their continued operation.
On M915 through M920 vehicles, a decontamination apparatus is mounted under the lower control panel. To use, remove from bracket, pull ring pin, lift handle until it locks, aim and press top. Maintenance requirements are in TM 3-4230-204-12&P.
To increase engine speed, place right foot on floor-mounted accelerator pedal and press down gradually. To reduce engine speed, let up on pedal.
Key
4.
5.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 17. Cab Floor Mounted Controls - Continued.
Control/Indicator
Service Brake Pedal
Function
NOTE
If tractor is coupled to trailer, the trailer service brakes will also be applied when using the tractor service brake pedal.
0005
Engine Retarder
Foot Switch
To apply service brakes, place right foot on service brake pedal and push down in proportion to the amount of braking force required to stop or hold tractor from moving.
NOTE
The accelerator pedal must be released to the full up position before the engine retarder foot switch will operate engine retarder.
To activate the engine retarder, identify driving conditions and set the ENGINE RETARDER switch, located on the control panel, for the amount of engine braking desired. Release accelerator pedal and depress floor-mounted foot pedal to engage engine retarder.
Release foot pedal to disengage engine retarder.
0005-23
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 18. Range Selector Control M915A1
.
1
PUSH
BUTTON
SELECTOR
LEVER
GEAR RANGE
INDICATOR
Key
1.
GEAR RANGE
DIAL
Figure 18. Range Selector Control M915A1.
Control/Indicator
Transmission Range
Selector Control
(M915A1)
Function
CAUTION
Do not allow tractor to coast in neutral (N) position. Failure to comply may result in severe damage to transmission and loss of engine braking.
NOTE
The selector lever push button must always be depressed to move the selector lever except when manually up-shifting from 1-2 to 1-3, 1-3 to 1-4, and 1-4 to 1-5.
The tractor engine will not crank or start unless transmission selector lever is in neutral (N) position.
The gear range dial and indicator will illuminate when the LIGHTS switch is in the 1st and 2nd positions.
0005
Key
TM 9-2320-273-10 0005
Table 18. Range Selector Control M915A1 - Continued.
Control/Indicator
Transmission Range
Selector Control
(M915A1)
Function
To operate the selector control, apply service brakes, release parking brakes, depress push button, and move selector lever until gear range indicator is aligned with the desired gear position on the gear range dial.
Automatic upshift and downshift points are influenced by the pressure of your foot on the accelerator pedal. For example, when the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the transmission will automatically upshift near the governed speed of the engine (2,100 rpm). A partially depressed accelerator pedal will cause upshifts to occur at a lower engine speed.
In all forward gear ranges, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically upshift to the highest gear shown in the gear range selected. For example, in gear range
1-5, the vehicle will start in first gear and upshift automatically through second gear, third gear, fourth gear, and fifth gear. If gear range 1-3 is selected, the transmission will automatically upshift from first gear through second gear, and into third gear. It will not upshift beyond third gear until the selector lever is manually moved to a higher gear range.
Manual downshifts, performed by depressing the push button and moving the selector lever, should be avoided when the vehicle is above the maximum speed obtainable in the next lower gear. If a downshift or shift to
REVERSE (R) is made at too high a speed, the transmission hydraulic system automatically prevents the shift from taking place until a safe lower speed is reached.
Normally, service brakes and the engine retarder should be used, as needed, to slow the vehicle to an acceptable speed where the transmission may be downshifted.
0005-25
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 19. Fifth Wheel Control Lever M915A1
.
0005
1
Key
1.
Figure 19. Fifth Wheel Control Lever M915A1.
Control/Indicator
Fifth Wheel Control
Lever (M915A1)
Function
Moving the fifth wheel control lever inside the cab to the
UNLOCK position operates an air cylinder under the fifth wheel which allows it to travel on the slide track a total of 12 inches (30.5 cm) forward or backward. This feature allows for adjustment of amount of cargo load carried by the rear tandem axles, within rated capacity.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 20. Steering Wheel and Column Mounted Controls
.
1
2
0005
3
5
4
4.
5.
Key
1.
2.
3.
Figure 20. Steering Wheel and Column Mounted Controls.
Control/Indicator Function
WARNING
Hazard switch will override brake lights when in use. Use hand signals and exercise extra care when using hazard switch. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Hazard Switch
Horn Button
Trailer Brake
Hand Control
To turn on hazard/emergency flashers, pull out hazard/emergency flasher switch.
To sound electric horn, push horn button.
CAUTION
Always return trailer brake hand control to OFF/UP position. Failure to comply may result in trailer brakes burning up.
To apply trailer brakes, pull down trailer brake hand control. The trailer brake hand control can be used on grades, when at a standstill, to prevent tractor from rolling backward when moving right foot from brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel in full steer position for more than 10 seconds. Failure to comply may result in overheating of power steering fluid and may cause damage to equipment.
Steering Wheel
Turn Signal Lever
Rotate steering wheel clockwise to rotate front wheels right, and counterclockwise to rotate front wheels left.
To turn on right turn signal, push turn signal lever up.
To turn on left turn signal, push turn signal lever down.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0005
Table 21. Transmission Air Control M915 through M920, Fan Clutch Actuator
Override M919, PTO Control M916 and M920, and Pusher Axle Controls M917,
M919, and M920
.
3
2
CONTROL
PRESSURE
KNOB
SET
SCREW
1
AIR PRESSURE
GAUGE
PUSHER
AXLE
CONTROL
4
Figure 21. Transmission Air Control M915 through M920, PTO Control M916 and
M920, Fan Clutch Actuator Override M919, and Pusher Axle Controls M917, M919, and M920.
Key
1.
2.
Control/Indicator
Power Take-Off
Control
(M916 and M920)
Fan Clutch Actuator
Override
(M919 Only)
Function
With transmission in 1st gear, pull cable knob to engage power take-off unit, then place transmission in neutral.
Push cable knob to disengage power take-off unit. When
PTO has disengaged, the indicator light will go off.
The override switch is used during mixing operations of the Concrete-Mobil® mixer to prevent the fan clutch from disengaging. Refer to TM 5-3895-372-10 for specific operation instructions. Place the switch in the override on position to override the fan clutch actuator and in the automatic position for normal fan clutch operation.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0005
Table 21. Transmission Air Control M915 through M920, Fan Clutch Actuator
Override M919, PTO Control M916 and M920, and Pusher Axle Controls M917,
M919, and M920 - Continued.
Key
3.
Control/Indicator
Pusher Axle Control
(M917, M919, and
M920)
Function
Use this control panel to lower and raise the pusher axle and to pressurize the system to adjust the amount of weight carried by the pusher axle.
TO LOWER PUSHER AXLE:
Rotate the control pressure knob counterclockwise to remove pressure from the pusher axle. Pressure gauge should indicate 0 psi. Place the pusher axle raise/lower control in the axle down position.
TO ADJUST LOAD ON THE PUSHER AXLE:
Rotate the control pressure knob clockwise (toward +) until the air pressure gauge indicates the proper pressure setting for the desired load. Tighten the setscrew to lock the control pressure knob at the pressure selected. With setscrew tightened at a particular setting, the control pressure knob can be closed (toward -) and reset to the previous setting.
CAUTION
Do not rotate the control knob counterclockwise to raise axle. This causes the air to exhaust and allows the bag to fold unevenly which can result in damage to air bags.
4.
Transmission Air
Control
TO RAISE THE PUSHER AXLE:
Set the axle raise/lower control at the AXLE LIFT position.
NOTE
The transmission will neutralize if the vehicle auxiliary air supply drops below 60 psi.
The auxiliary air supply does not register at the vehicles main air gauges. The auxiliary air supply will provide approximately 14 to 18 transmission shifts after loss of vehicle main air supply.
Push in on valve to provide the transmission with operating air from vehicle supply. When the vehicle air supply is 80 psi or greater, the charging valve will stay in when released. Pull out on the charging valve to remove air supply. The transmission will neutralize automatically.
0005-29
TM 9-2320-273-10
1
Table 22. Transmission Ratio Selector, M915 through M920
.
0005
GEAR
RANGE
DIAL
STRIP HEATER
INDICATOR LIGHT
Key
1.
Figure 22. Transmission Ratio Selector, M915 through M920.
Control/Indicator
Transmission Ratio
Selector (M915 through M920)
Function
CAUTION
The transmission clutch disengages at engine speeds of 1,100 rpm or less causing loss of braking efficiency of the engine as a brake. This condition can damage the transmission if held in low rpm range over 12 seconds. Down shifting within this time is mandatory.
The drivelines must be disconnected when towing the truck, otherwise the transmission will be damaged.
Use the service brakes to hold truck while stopped on a grade. Do not use the transmission to hold the truck as damage may result.
Do not use the inhibitor override while the truck is in motion.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0005
Key
Table 22. Transmission Ratio Selector, M915 through M920 - Continued.
Control/Indicator
Transmission Ratio
Selector (M915 through M920)
Function
Place the ratio selector in neutral (N) to start the engine.
The engine will not start with the selector lever in any other position. Place the ratio selector in R1 or R2 to back up. R1 should be used for heavy loads or where a slower reverse speed is required due to congestion or other hazards. Move the ratio selector forward or rearward to select the desired gear ratio position. The transmission will remain in the previously selected position until the ratio selector is moved into the notch adjacent to the newly selected gear ratio. Progression through the full range of 16 forward gear ratios may be done two steps at a time up to 11th gear ratio. A built-in inhibitor prevents more than a two step advance (or one step advance from 11th–16th positions). The inhibitor override is provided to allow selection of the proper gear ratio for startup. This is done by pulling upward on the ratio selector and may be used only when the truck is at a standstill. Do not use the inhibitor override when the truck is in motion.
The transmission is equipped with strip heaters to warm the transmission during cold weather. The strip heaters are thermostatically controlled for automatic operation at temperatures below 5° F (-15° C). The indicator light on the console illuminates with the key on when the strip heaters are on. Do not operate the transmission until the indicator light goes off.
0005-31
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 23. Seat Adjustment Controls
.
2
3
0005
6
5
4
OPERATOR SEAT
5
9
8
COMPANION SEAT
7
5.
6.
7.
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
8.
9.
Figure 23. Seat Adjustment Controls.
Control/Indicator
Ratchet Handle
Backrest Angle
Adjustment Lever
Preload Indicator
Forward and
Backward Seat
Adjustment Lever
Seatbelt
Ratchet Trip Lever
Function
Used to increase or decrease preload on seat.
Used to tilt backrest forward or rearward in three positions.
Indicator will be in the center position when seat preload is set for proper weight.
Lever will unlock seat so seat can be moved forward or rearward.
Used for safety when operating vehicle.
Used to lock ratchet handle in locked position after preload is set.
Used to tilt backrest forward or rearward in three positions.
Companion Seat
Backrest Angle
Adjustment Lever
Companion Seat
Cushion Adjustment
Lever
Companion Seat
Forward and
Rearward Seat
Adjustment Lever
Used to tilt seat cushion in three positions.
Lever will unlock seat so seat can be moved forward or rearward.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 24. Additional Cab Controls
.
1
0005
7
2
3
6
4
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
5
Cab Door Window
Regulator Handle
Ash Tray
Driver Fresh Air
Vent
Cab Door Inside
Handle
Cab Vent Window
Handle
Door Lock Knobs
Figure 24. Additional Cab Controls.
Control/Indicator
Air Horn Chain
Function
To sound air horn, pull downward on chain. Release chain to silence air horn.
To lower left window glass, rotate left window regulator handle clockwise. To raise left window glass, rotate left window regulator handle counterclockwise. To lower right window glass rotate right window regulator handle counterclockwise. To raise right window glass, rotate right window regulator handle clockwise.
To open ash tray, lift top.
To bring fresh air into cab, push handle forward. To exhaust inside air from cab, pull fresh air vent back. To close fresh air vent, place handle in center position.
To open cab door from inside cab, pull cab door handle.
Lock knob will unlock automatically when door handle inside is pulled.
Raise lever to unlock window. Push outward on vent window handle to open vent window. Pull inward on vent window handle to close vent window.
Push down lock knob to lock doors. Pull lock knob up to unlock doors. Door lock knob will unlock automatically when inside door handle is pulled, or door is unlocked with a key from the outside.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0005
Table 25. Crew Protection Cab Doors, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and
M920P1
.
2
3
1
6
7
4
8
5
5.
6.
7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 25. Crew Protection Cab Doors, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and
M920P1.
Key Control/Indicator Function
NOTE
Crew protection cab doors are applicable to
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and
M920P1 vehicles equipped with Crew Protection
Kit.
8.
Glove Box Handle
Glove Box Latch
Window Latch
Exterior Door
Handle
Grab Handle
Door Latch
Interior Door
Handle
Interior Grab
Handle
Used to open glove box.
Unscrew both latches to open glove box door.
Lift up latch and slide window to open or close.
Allows driver or passenger side door to be opened from the outside.
Provides a hand hold for opening the door.
Secures side door closed.
Allows driver or passenger side door to be opened from the inside.
Provides a hand hold for entering or existing the vehicle.
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 26. Defroster Fans, Dome, and Map Lamps
.
2
0005
3
Key
1.
2.
3.
Figure 26. Defroster Fans, Dome, and Map Lamps.
Control/Indicator
Defroster Fans
Map Lamps
Dome Lamps
Function
To operate fan at high speed, turn knob at base of fan clockwise. To operate fan at slower speeds, turn knob further clockwise. To turn fan OFF, turn knob counterclockwise. Fan may be swiveled on its base to direct air flow as required by conditions.
To turn ON map lamps, push rocker switch on lamp base.
To turn OFF map lamps, push other side of rocker switch. Map lamp sockets may be swiveled to direct light as needed.
Dome lamps provide general illumination of the cab interior. To turn dome lamp ON, push button on lamp base. To turn dome lamp OFF, push button on lamp base again.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0005
Table 27. Air Conditioning Kit Controls, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and
M920P1
.
1
4
3
2
1.
2.
3.
Figure 27. Air Conditioning Kit Controls, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1.
Key Control/Indicator Function
NOTE
4.
A/C Evaporator
A/C Filters
Fan Speed Switch
A/C On-Off
Switch
All vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit are equipped with Air Conditioning Kit.
Supplies cool air to cab.
Directs air flow.
Controls the speed of A/C blower fan. Move switch to left position for LOW, center position for MEDIUM, and right position for HIGH speed.
Operates A/C system and A/C blower fan.
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 28. Rear Sliding Window, M916 through M920
.
0005
Key
1.
Figure 28. Rear Sliding Window, M916 through M920.
Control/Indicator
Rear Sliding Window
Latch, M916 through
M920
Function
To open rear sliding window, squeeze at center of latch and slide window toward passenger side of cab. To close rear sliding window, squeeze at center of latch and slide window toward driver side of cab.
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 29. Crew Protection Kit Escape Hatch, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1,
M917P1, and M920P1
.
0005
1
2
Key
1.
2.
Figure 29. Crew Protection Kit Escape Hatch, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1,
M917P1, and M920P1.
Control/Indicator
Escape Hatch Grab
Handle
Function
Use grab handle to open escape hatch.
Escape Hatch Latch Pull to release latch and slide escape hatch open.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
INITIAL SETUP:
References
AR 70-1
DA Form 2404
DA Form 5988-E
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
References - Continued
GENERAL
This work package provides instructions for operation of the vehicle under normal conditions. It describes the process by which the operator utilizes the equipment and the order in which operational tasks are performed. Operation Under Usual Conditions includes Assembly and Preparation for Use; Initial Adjustments, Before Use, and
Self-Test; Operating Procedures; Decals and Instruction Plates; and Preparation for
Movement. Follow the instruction for each heading listed below.
WP 0007 through WP 0014 provide specific instructions for the operation of M915
series and M915A1 vehicles, and WP 0010 and WP 0013 provide additional
instructions for the operation of M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 vehicles under normal conditions. For operating instructions under unusual conditions,
ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE
M915 series and M915A1 vehicles require minor preparation before operation. When the vehicle is transferred between property accounts, Component of End Item (COEI) and Basic Issue Items (BII) must be removed from the vehicle and packaged and shipped separately. When the vehicle is received, COEI and BII must be unpacked and stowed on the vehicle before operation. In some cases, one or more items may require assembly and/or installation on the vehicle.
Perform the following steps prior to operating the vehicle:
1.
Unpack COEI and BII and stow them in designated stowage locations. Stowage
locations are noted in WP 0037.
2.
Ensure Service Upon Receipt of Materiel is performed by Field Maintenance and all subsequent Field Level Maintenance is performed per the required service intervals; refer to DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E, Equipment Inspection and
Maintenance Worksheet.
0006-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE - CONTINUED
3.
If any auxiliary equipment will be used in conjunction with vehicle operation, review the associated technical manuals for assembly and preparation for use requirements of the auxiliary equipment.
END OF TASK
INITIAL ADJUSTMENTS, BEFORE USE, AND SELF-TEST
Perform the following checks prior to vehicle operation:
1.
Check fuel level and fill fuel tank as necessary (WP 0028).
2.
Check fluid levels for the following components and add proper fluids as necessary: a.
b.
c.
d.
Power steering fluid (WP 0035)
e.
Windshield washer fluid (WP 0025)
3.
Check battery terminal connections and battery voltage (WP 0025).
4.
Check fire extinguisher for full charge (WP 0025).
5.
Check tire pressure including spare tire (WP 0030).
END OF TASK
OPERATING PROCEDURES
WARNING
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the limits specified in the TM in accordance with (IAW) AR 70-1. Operation beyond these limits without written approval from the Commander, U.S.
Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN:
AMSTA-CG, Warren, MI 48397-5000, is prohibited. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Operators must know how to use the controls and indicators before starting and driving the vehicle. In addition, operators must know the capabilities and limitations of the vehicle and be able to use the features of the vehicle in the safest and most efficient way to accomplish their mission. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
0006
0006-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATING PROCEDURES - CONTINUED
0006
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The following procedures are required to bring the equipment from OFF through
STANDBY condition to FULL OPERATION:
1.
Perform all operator/crew Before, During, and After Operation PMCS as required
2.
Perform Operator PMCS for auxiliary equipment installed on vehicle. Refer to associated TMs.
3.
Review operating instructions prior to performing mission. Refer to operating
procedures in WP 0007 through WP 0014 and Operation Under Unusual
4.
If trailer is connected to fifth wheel, ensure fifth wheel primary and secondary
locks are engaged as described in Fifth Wheel Operation, WP 0012.
5.
Ensure wheel chocks are removed from tractor and trailer prior to operation.
Refer to Placing Vehicle in Motion, WP 0010.
6.
Operate vehicle IAW operator instructions in WP 0007 through WP 0014.
END OF TASK
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES
The operator must become familiar with the decals and instruction plates associated with equipment operation. In addition, all safety related warning and caution decals and
instruction plates must be understood and adhered to during operation (WP 0014).
END OF TASK
PREPARATION FOR MOVEMENT
Refer to Towing Vehicle WP 0021 for preparation for movement procedures.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0006-3/4 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
SEAT AND SEATBELT OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
GENERAL
WARNING
The driver and passenger must wear seatbelts during vehicle operation. Ensure seatbelts are fastened and properly adjusted before placing vehicle in motion. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
All seat and seatbelt adjustments are performed while occupant is seated in normal driving position with feet flat on cab floor and hands on steering wheel. Ensure driver seat is adjusted for comfort and all controls are easily accessible.
The vehicle is equipped with an adjustable driver seat and either a two-point lap seatbelt or three-point lap and shoulder harness seatbelt. The companion seat is also adjustable and has a two-point lap seatbelt. The driver seat can be adjusted in three ways: ride level, backrest angle, and forward and backward. Ensure the driver seat is adjusted for comfort and ensure all controls are within easy reach prior to operating the vehicle.
For description and use of controls associated with the operation of the driver and
companion seats and seatbelts, refer to WP 0005.
0007-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0007
DRIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Ride Level Adjustment:
NOTE
The driver seat ride level is the up and down shock absorbing movement of the seat assembly. The ride level on
M915 through M920 vehicles is controlled by adjusting the preload of the seat assembly torsion bars. The preload is the amount of tension or twist applied to the torsion bars against the weight of the occupant. The correct ride level is established by increasing or decreasing the preload until preload indicator is in line with the side frame of the seat.
Ride level will adjust to occupant weights of 130–275 lb
(59–125 kg).
Perform step 2 to increase preload (raise ride level) or perform step 3 to decrease preload (lower ride level).
1.
While seated in driver seat, observe position of preload indicator and determine if adjustment is necessary.
2.
Pull up on ratchet trip lever and rotate adjustment lever back and forth until preload indicator is in line with seat side frame.
3.
Push down on ratchet trip lever and rotate adjustment lever back and forth until preload indicator is in line with seat side frame.
Backrest Angle Adjustment:
NOTE
The backrest angle can be adjusted to three positions.
Lift lever up with left hand, angle backrest forward or backward to desired position, and lower lever until locked in one of three notched positions.
Forward And Backward Position Adjustment:
NOTE
The driver seat may be moved forward or backward 6 in.
(15 cm).
Pull and hold lever out, use legs and body to move seat assembly forward or backward to desired position, and release lever to lock seat in position.
0007-2
RATCHET
TRIP
LEVER
SEATBELT
TM 9-2320-273-10
RATCHET HANDLE
BACKREST ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
PRELOAD
INDICATOR
0007
FORE AND AFT
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
LEVER
Figure 1. Operator Seat.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10 0007
M915A1 COMPANION SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Backrest Angle Adjustment:
Lift backrest angle adjustment lever up with left hand, angle backrest forward or backward to desired position, and lower backrest angle adjustment lever until locked in one of three notched positions.
Forward And Backward Position Adjustment:
Pull and hold fore and aft seat adjustment lever out, use legs and body to move seat assembly forward or backward to desired position, and release fore and aft seat adjustment lever to lock seat in position.
Seat Tilt Adjustment:
NOTE
The front edge of the seat can be tilted up or down to three positions.
Using legs, take weight off seat cushion and turn seat cushion tilt adjustment lever clockwise to tilt seat cushion up or counterclockwise to tilt seat cushion down.
SEATBELT
BACKREST ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
FORE AND AFT
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
LEVER
SEAT CUSHION TILT
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
Figure 2. Companion Seat.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10 0007
USE OF SEATBELTS
WARNING
Driver and companion seatbelts must be connected and adjusted for proper fit prior to placing the vehicle in motion.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Seatbelt must be completely extended from nonlocking retractor device. All excess webbing must then be adjusted at the buckle. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
Fasten seatbelt buckle.
2.
Remove slack by slipping belt through buckle until it fits snugly.
3.
To release, press center of buckle on driver seatbelt, or pull up on belt buckle on companion seatbelt.
DRIVER SEATBELT
BUCKLE RELEASE
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
COMPANION SEATBELT
BUCKLE RELEASE
Figure 3. Seatbelts.
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATING UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C)
INITIAL SETUP:
References
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C)
WARNING
Do not start engine with parking brake control pushed in
(released). The vehicle could roll in either direction once brake system reaches operating pressure and spring brakes release. Always pull out parking brake control prior to starting engine or damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Ensure scheduled PMCS are performed prior to starting vehicle. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
0008-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0008
1.
If not applied, pull out parking brake control knob (Figure 1, Item 1).
NOTE
M915 through M920 vehicles have a neutral safety switch which prevents the engine from being started with the transmission in gear.
2.
Place transmission manual control lever (Figure 1, Item 2) in neutral (N) position
(Figure 1, Item 3).
1
2
3
Figure 1. Applying Parking Brake and Selecting Neutral, (M915A1 Shown).
TM 9-2320-273-10
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0008
NOTE
When vehicle ignition is switched on, low air pressure warning buzzer will sound and the following warning indicators will illuminate: LOW AIR PRESSURE, ENG
OIL, PARK BRAKE, and transmission heater warning lamp on the M915 through M920.
3.
Insert ignition key in engine run switch (Figure 2, Item 1), and turn on ignition by moving engine run switch (Figure 2, Item 1) clockwise to IGNITION AND
ACCESSORY (ON) position (WP 0005).
4.
Observe low air pressure warning buzzer sound and LOW AIR PRESSURE indicator (Figure 2, Item 4), ENG OIL indicator (Figure 2, Item 2), PARK
BRAKE indicator (Figure 2, Item 3), and transmission heater warning lamp on the
M915 through M920 illuminate.
1
2
4
3
Figure 2. Turning On Ignition and Observing Warning Indicators.
TM 9-2320-273-10
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
WARNING
On M915 and M915A1 vehicles, cab controlled fifth wheel control lever must be in the LOCK position when a trailer is connected to the tractor fifth wheel. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
On M915 and M915A1 tractors only, perform step 5 if trailer is connected to the tractor fifth wheel.
5.
Move fifth wheel control lever (Figure 3, Item 1) to LOCK position.
1
0008
Figure 3. Control Lever, Cab Controlled Fifth Wheel.
TM 9-2320-273-10
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0008
NOTE
On M916 through M920 vehicles, the PTO control should be disengaged prior to starting vehicle engine. Perform step 6 for M916 through M920 models.
6.
Check PTO indicator light (Figure 4, Item 1). If illuminated, push in PTO control knob (Figure 4, Item 2) to disengage PTO, and observe red PTO indicator light
(Figure 4, Item 1) go off.
1
2
Figure 4. Disengaging PTO, (M916 through M920 Models).
TM 9-2320-273-10
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0008
NOTE
The DIFF LOCK OUT indicator will remain illuminated if the differential control switch is in LOCK position. For all normal driving conditions the differentials should be unlocked. If the differential control switch is in the LOCK position, perform step 7 for M915 and M915A1 vehicles or step 8 for M916 through M920 vehicles.
When the differential control switch is moved to the
UNLOCK position the red DIFF LOCK OUT indicator may remain illuminated until the vehicle is put in motion.
7.
Move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to UNLOCK position
8.
Move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to UNLOCK position
(WP 0005). When engine is started and DIFF LOCK OUT indicator
(Figure 5, Item 1) goes off, move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to
OFF position.
1
2
2
M915 AND M915A1 M916 THROUGH M920
Figure 5. Differential Control Switch and Engine Start Button.
9.
Turn off all vehicle accessories and ensure foot is off engine retarder foot switch
(Figure 6, Item 1) prior to starting engine.
TM 9-2320-273-10
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0008
1
2
Figure 6. Engine Retarder Foot Switch and Accelerator Pedal.
CAUTION
Do not crank engine continuously for more than 15 seconds at a time. Allow two minute intervals between cranking engine for starter motor to cool. If engine fails to start after four attempts, troubleshoot starting problem. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
When cranking engine, the ENGINE START button should be released once the engine starts. Do not push the ENGINE
START button while engine is running. Failure to comply will result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
The engine cannot be started by pushing or towing the vehicle in gear.
The ENG TEMP indicator will illuminate while the ENGINE
START button is depressed.
10.
To crank and start engine, push and hold ENGINE START button
(Figure 7, Item 1) down and slightly depress accelerator pedal (Figure 6, Item 2), until engine starts. Release ENGINE START button (Figure 7, Item 1) immediately after engine starts. If engine fails to start after cranking engine over for 15 seconds, perform step 11.
1
ENGINE
START
Figure 7. Engine Start Button.
TM 9-2320-273-10
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0008
11.
Wait 2 minutes to allow starter motor to cool and repeat step 10. If engine fails to
start after four attempts, refer to Troubleshooting Procedures, WP 0022 and
CAUTION
Failure to shut off engine if no oil pressure is indicated on engine oil pressure gauge may result in severe engine damage. Do not attempt to restart engine until problem has been corrected.
12.
At engine startup, check engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1) for minimum of 5 psi (34 kPa) on M915 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) on M915A1. If no oil pressure registers on engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1) after 10 seconds, shut off engine immediately by turning engine run switch
(Figure 8, Item 5) to OFF position. Refer to Troubleshooting Procedures,
CAUTION
Do not rev or idle engine above 1,000 rpm during warm-up.
Damage to turbocharger or engine may occur if vehicle is operated without allowing sufficient time for oil circulation to reach turbocharger and for engine parts to warm up gradually.
Allow engine to warm up to normal operating temperature
(180–200 degrees F (82–93 degrees C)) to ensure proper oil pressure. At low idle, if engine oil pressure drops below
5 psi (34 kPa) on M915 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) on
M915A1 vehicles, shut off engine and troubleshoot problem.
Failure to comply may result in severe engine damage.
NOTE
On M915 through M920 vehicles, at low idle the engine oil pressure gauge should register 5–20 psi (34–138 kPa) at normal operating temperature.
If necessary during engine warm-up, set the hand throttle to maintain a smooth low idle speed.
13.
Warm up engine by idling engine at 580–650 rpm until engine temperature reaches 180–200° F (82–93° C) and a minimum oil pressure of 5 psi (34 kPa) on
M915 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) on M915A1 vehicles is maintained on engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1). Ensure ENG OIL (low oil pressure) warning indicator (Figure 8, Item 3) goes off.
14.
During warm-up period, observe instrument panel gauges and warning indicators for proper operation.
0008-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0008
15.
Ensure LOW AIR PRESSURE warning indicator (Figure 8, Item 2) and buzzer go off before releasing parking brake, PARK BRAKE warning indicator
(Figure 8, Item 4) will remain illuminated until parking brake is released prior to driving vehicle.
1
3
2
4
5
Figure 8. Instrument and Indicator Panel Gauges and Indicators.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATING UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C)
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C)
1.
Install winter front cover on radiator grille (WP 0016).
WARNING
Do not start engine with parking brake control pushed in
(released). The vehicle could roll in either direction once brake system reaches operating pressure and spring brakes release. Always pull out parking brake control prior to starting engine or damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Ensure scheduled PMCS are performed prior to starting vehicle. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
0009-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0009
2.
If not applied, pull out parking brake control knob (Figure 1, Item 1).
NOTE
M915 and M915A1 vehicles have a neutral safety switch that prevents the engine from being started with the transmission in any gear other than neutral.
3.
Place transmission manual control lever (Figure 1, Item 3) in neutral (N) position
(Figure 1, Item 2).
3
2
1
3
2
M915A1
M915 THROUGH M920
Figure 1. Applying Parking Brake and Selecting Neutral.
NOTE
Ensure all accessories are turned off and engine retarder system is disengaged.
When the vehicle ignition is switched on, the low air pressure warning buzzer will sound and the following warning indicators will illuminate: LOW AIR PRESSURE,
ENG OIL, and PARK BRAKE. On M915 through M920 series vehicles, the strip heater indicator light, located on the shift console, will also illuminate in cold weather.
4.
Insert ignition key in engine run switch (Figure 2, Item 1) and turn on ignition by moving engine run switch (Figure 2, Item 1) clockwise to IGNITION AND
ACCESSORY (ON) position (WP 0005).
5.
Observe low air pressure warning buzzer sound and LOW AIR PRESSURE indicator (Figure 2, Item 4), ENG OIL indicator (Figure 2, Item 2), and PARK
BRAKE indicator (Figure 2, Item 3), and transmission heater warning lamp on the
M915 through M920 illuminate.
TM 9-2320-273-10
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
1
2
0009
4
3
Figure 2. Turning Engine Run Switch On and Observing Warning Indicators.
WARNING
On M915 and M915A1 vehicles, the cab controlled fifth wheel control lever must be in the LOCK position when a trailer is connected to the tractor fifth wheel. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
On M915 and M915A1 tractors only, perform step 6 if trailer is connected to the tractor fifth wheel.
6.
Move fifth wheel control lever (Figure 3, Item 1) to LOCK position.
1
Figure 3. Control Lever, Cab Controlled Fifth Wheel.
TM 9-2320-273-10
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0009
NOTE
On M916 through M920 vehicles, the PTO control must be disengaged prior to starting vehicle engine. Perform step 7 for M916 through M920 models.
7.
Check PTO indicator light (Figure 4, Item 1). If illuminated, push in PTO control knob (Figure 4, Item 2) to disengage PTO, and observe red PTO indicator light
(Figure 4, Item 1) go off.
1
2
Figure 4. Disengaging PTO, (M916 through M920 Models).
TM 9-2320-273-10
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0009
NOTE
The DIFF LOCK OUT indicator will remain illuminated if the differential control switch is in LOCK position. For all normal driving conditions the differentials should be unlocked. If the differential control switch is in the LOCK position, perform step 8 for M915 and M915A1 vehicles or step 9 for M916 through M920 vehicles.
When the differential control switch is moved to the
UNLOCK position, the red DIFF LOCK OUT indicator may remain illuminated until the vehicle is put in motion.
8.
Move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to UNLOCK position
9.
Move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to UNLOCK position
(WP 0005), and once engine is started and DIFF LOCK OUT indicator
(Figure 5, Item 1) goes off, move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to
OFF position.
1
2
2
M915 AND M915A1 M916 THROUGH M920
Figure 5. Differential Control Switch and Engine Start Button.
TM 9-2320-273-10
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0009
10.
Turn off all vehicle accessories and ensure foot is off engine retarder foot switch
(Figure 6, Item 1) prior to starting engine.
1
2
Figure 6. Engine Retarder Foot Switch and Accelerator Pedal.
CAUTION
Do not crank engine continuously for more than 15 seconds at a time. Allow two minute intervals between cranking engine for starter motor to cool. If engine fails to start after four attempts, troubleshoot starting problem. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
When cranking engine, the ENGINE START button must be released once the engine starts. Do not push the ENGINE
START button while engine is running. Failure to comply will result in damage to equipment.
Never depress the ether quick-start button before cranking engine. Do not hold the ether start button down for more that 4 or 5 seconds while cranking the engine. A build up of ether can result in combustion in the intake manifold and damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
The engine cannot be started by pushing or towing the vehicle in gear.
The ENG TEMP indicator will illuminate while the ENGINE
START button is depressed.
TM 9-2320-273-10
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0009
11.
To crank and start engine, push and hold ENGINE START button
(Figure 7, Item 1) down, slightly depress accelerator pedal (Figure 6, Item 2), and depress and hold ETHER quick-start button (Figure 7, Item 2) for 4 or 5 seconds until engine starts. Release ENGINE START button (Figure 7, Item 1) immediately after engine starts. If engine fails to start after cranking engine over for 15 seconds, perform step 10.
1
2
Figure 7. Starting Engine.
NOTE
At temperatures below 0° F (-18° C) it may be necessary to repeat steps 11 and 12 more than once.
12.
Wait two minutes to allow starter motor to cool and repeat step 11. If engine fails
to start after four attempts, refer to Troubleshooting Procedures, WP 0022 and
TM 9-2320-273-10
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
0009
CAUTION
Failure to shut off engine if no oil pressure is indicated on engine oil pressure gauge may result in severe engine damage. Do not attempt to restart engine until problem has been corrected.
13.
At engine startup, check engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1) for 5 psi
(34 kPa) minimum on M915 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) minimum on M915A1. If no oil pressure registers on engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1) after 10 seconds, shut off engine immediately by turning engine run switch
(Figure 8, Item 5) to OFF position. Refer to Troubleshooting Procedures,
CAUTION
Do not rev or idle engine above 1,000 rpm during warm-up.
Damage to turbocharger or engine may occur if vehicle is operated without allowing sufficient time for oil circulation to reach turbocharger and for engine parts to warm up gradually.
Allow engine to warm up to normal operating temperature
180–200° F (82–93° C) to ensure proper oil pressure. At low idle, if engine oil pressure drops below 5 psi (34 kPa) on
M915 through M920 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) on M915A1 vehicles, shut off engine and troubleshoot problem. Failure to comply may result in severe engine damage.
NOTE
On M915 through M920 vehicles, at low idle the engine oil pressure gauge should register 5–20 psi (34–138 kPa) at normal operating temperature.
If necessary during engine warm-up, set the hand throttle to maintain a smooth low idle speed.
14.
Warm up engine by idling at 580–650 rpm until engine temperature reaches
180–200° F (82–93° C) and 5 psi (34 kPa) minimum oil pressure on M915 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) minimum oil pressure on M915A1 vehicles is maintained on engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1). Ensure ENG OIL
(low oil pressure) warning indicator (Figure 8, Item 2) goes off.
15.
During warm-up period, observe instrument panel gauges and warning indicators for proper operation.
16.
Ensure LOW AIR PRESSURE warning indicator (Figure 8, Item 4) and buzzer go off before releasing parking brake. PARK BRAKE warning indicator
(Figure 8, Item 3) will remain illuminated until parking brake is released prior to driving vehicle.
0009-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
1
2
4
3
5
Figure 8. Instrument and Indicator Panel Gauges and Indicators.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0009
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATING UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION
WARNING
To prevent fifth wheel movement during transit, ensure cab mounted sliding fifth wheel control lever is in LOCK position before moving vehicle. Follow procedure to verify fifth wheel control lever is locked in position when tractor is coupled to trailer, and never move fifth wheel control lever to UNLOCK position during transit. Failure to comply may result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not operate vehicle with low tire pressure on wet smooth roads at high speeds. Doing so may result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
Ensure BII and auxiliary equipment are stowed and locked for travel (WP 0037).
2.
If tractor is coupled to trailer, ensure fifth wheel primary and secondary kingpin lock releases are properly engaged, tractor-to-trailer air and electrical connections are checked, and the sliding fifth wheel control lever is in LOCK position for the
M915A1 (WP 0012). If using towing pintle, ensure pintle is properly locked
0010-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION - CONTINUED
0010
NOTE
If available, assistant will adjust mirrors with driver seated in cab.
3.
Adjust rear view mirrors and driver seat as necessary. Put seatbelt(s) on and
NOTE
Ensure scheduled PMCS are performed prior to operating tractor.
4.
Start engine (WP 0008 or WP 0009).
5.
Check engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 1, Item 3) for at least 10 psi (69 kPa) at idle. Cold engine will read higher.
6.
Check engine water temperature gauge (Figure 1, Item 7) for approximately
165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through M920 or 160–180° F (71–82° C) for
M915A1 if pulling load.
7.
Check air pressure gauges (Figure 1, Items 4 and 6) for
105–140 psi (724–965 kPa). Air pressures below 60 psi (414 kPa) will result in brakes not releasing. LOW AIR PRESSURE warning lamp (Figure 1, Item 5) and buzzer should go off when both front and rear air system pressures reach approximately 64–76 psi (441–524 kPa).
8.
Voltmeter (Figure 1, Item 2) should indicate 12–15 V (green shaded area).
9.
Fuel gauge (Figure 1, Item 1) should indicate there is sufficient fuel for intended mission.
10.
If operating in conditions requiring use of service or blackout lamps, operate headlamp switch (Figure 2, Item 1) or blackout operation switch
(Figure 2, Item 2) as appropriate (WP 0005).
0010-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION - CONTINUED
1 2
3
4
5
0010
1
7
Figure 1. Instrument Panel Gauges and Indicators.
6
2
Figure 2. Instrument Panel Indicators and Controls.
TM 9-2320-273-10
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION - CONTINUED
0010
11.
For M915 through M920, depress the transmission Air Control Button
(Figure 3, Item 2). The button will lock in the depressed position as long as truck air pressure is 80 psi or higher. It may be necessary to shift through all gears at engine idle speed several times to eliminate transmission air leaks, particularly in cold weather.
CAUTION
For M915 through M920, use of the inhibitor override when the truck is in motion is prohibited. The shift inhibitor override should only be used when the vehicle is at a complete stop.
12.
For M915 through M920, select the starting gear ratio using the following as a guide. Pull up on the selector lever (Figure 3, Item 1) to override the inhibitor.
Suggested starting gears-level hard surfaces:
Empty to 75,000 lb GCVW, 6th gear
75,000 to 105,000 lb GCVW, 4th gear
105,000 to 130,000 lb GCVW, 3rd gear
NOTE
For M915A1, use the 1-5 gear range position for all normal driving conditions. For information on all gear ranges, refer to Use of Transmission Gear Ranges M915A1 in this work package.
13.
For M915A1, place transmission control lever (Figure 3, Item 1) in desired gear
1
1
2
M915 THROUGH M920
Figure 3. Transmission Control Lever.
M915A1
TM 9-2320-273-10
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION - CONTINUED
0010
CAUTION
For M915 through M920, never allow truck to coast in neutral. Severe transmission damage can result and engine braking action is not available during a neutral coast.
14.
Apply service brake pedal (Figure 4, Item 4) and release parking brake control
15.
If coupled to trailer, release trailer air supply control
16.
Put tractor in motion by releasing service brake pedal (Figure 4, Item 4) and gradually depressing accelerator pedal (Figure 4, Item 1).
2
3
1
4
Figure 4. Service, Park, and Trailer Brake Controls and Accelerator Pedal.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10
USE OF TRANSMISSION GEAR RANGES (M915A1)
0010
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Never allow vehicle to coast in neutral (N) position. Engine braking action is not available when transmission is out of gear, and damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not start engine with parking brake control pushed in
(released). The vehicle could roll in either direction once brake system reaches operating pressure and spring brakes release. Always pull out parking brake control prior to starting engine or damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
In low gear ranges 1, 1-2, 1-3, and 1-4, the transmission will not upshift above the highest gear selected unless engine governed speed is excessive.
1.
Use reverse (R) position (1) to back up tractor. Stop tractor completely before shifting gears from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward. Reverse has only one gear and provides the greatest traction advantage.
2.
Use neutral (N) position (Figure 5, Item 7) when starting engine and when tractor will be left unattended with engine running and parking brake applied. The neutral safety switch prevents engine from starting in all gear range positions other than neutral.
0010-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
USE OF TRANSMISSION GEAR RANGES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
0010
3.
Use 1-5 position (Figure 5, Item 6) for all normal driving conditions. When driving in 1-5 position (Figure 5, Item 6), the transmission will start in 1st gear, and as the accelerator is depressed, the transmission will upshift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears automatically. As the tractor is slowed, the transmission will downshift to the correct gear automatically
4.
Use 1-4 position (Figure 5, Item 2), 1-3 position (Figure 5, Item 3), or 1-2 position (Figure 5, Item 4) to limit the automatic shifting to a lower range when road, load, or traffic conditions make it necessary or desirable to do so.
5.
Use 1 position (Figure 5, Item 5) and R position (Figure 5, Item 1) when pulling through mud and snow or driving on steep grades. This is low gear, and maximum engine braking is accomplished in this position.
1
6
7
2
3
4
5
Figure 5. Transmission Control Lever and Range Indicator.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10
BASIC DRIVING GUIDELINES
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
During long idling periods, engine coolant temperature will fall below normal range. The incomplete combination of fuel in a cold engine will cause dilution of crankcase oil, formation of carbon on valves, pistons, and rings, and sludge build-up in engine. If prolonged engine idling is necessary, maintain at least 800 rpm.
1.
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
NOTE
If gauges or indicators show any abnormal conditions, bring tractor to a safe stop, shut down engine, and investigate cause of problem.
2.
Frequently check oil pressure gauge (Figure 6, Item 1). During normal driving conditions with engine running 1,800–2,100 rpm, engine oil pressure gauge
(Figure 6, Item 1) should register 40–75 psi (276–517 kPa) for M915 through
M920 or 35–50 psi (241–345 kPa) for M915A1.
0010
1
M915 THROUGH M920 M915A1
Figure 6. Oil Pressure Gauge.
TM 9-2320-273-10
BASIC DRIVING GUIDELINES - CONTINUED
0010
3.
Frequently check engine water temperature gauge (Figure 7, Item 1). Normal water temperature should range from 165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through
M920 or 180–200° F (82–93° C) for M915A1. Water temperature should be above 160° F (71° C) at low end, and up to 212° F (100° C) at high end. If temperature reaches 220° F (104° C), shut down engine and check cooling system.
1
M915 THROUGH M920
M915A1
Figure 7. Water Temperature Gauge.
4.
Check front air pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1) and rear air pressure gauge
(Figure 8, Item 2). The normal operating range is 105–140 psi (724–965 kPa). Air pressure should be at least 80 psi (552 kPa) for M915 through M920 or
90 psi (621 kPa) for M915A1. The low pressure warning lamp (Figure 8, Item 3) and buzzer will come on at approximately 64–76 psi (441–524 kPa).
2
1
1
M915 THROUGH M920
2
3
M915A1
Figure 8. Air Pressure Gauges and Low Air Pressure Indicator.
TM 9-2320-273-10
BASIC DRIVING GUIDELINES - CONTINUED
0010
5.
Frequently check transmission oil temperature gauge (Figure 9, Item 1). Normal operating temperature range is 40–220° F (4–104° C) for M915 through M920 or
100–250° F (38–121° C) for M915A1.
1
M915 THROUGH M920
M915A1
Figure 9. Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge.
6.
Frequently check voltmeter (Figure 10, Item 1). Normal battery voltage should be
12–15 volts.
1
M915 THROUGH M920
M915A1
Figure 10. Voltmeter.
7.
Check fuel gauge (Figure 11, Item 1) for adequate fuel supply.
TM 9-2320-273-10
BASIC DRIVING GUIDELINES - CONTINUED
1
0010
M915 THROUGH M920
M915A1
Figure 11. Fuel Gauge.
8.
Monitor engine rpm on tachograph for appropriate ranges. Refer to Optimum Use of Tachograph in this work package.
9.
After prolonged engine operation above 1,500 rpm, run engine at idle for a minimum of 3 minutes to allow sufficient cool down of turbocharger.
10.
The recommended and most efficient cruising speed for highway use is the posted legal speed limit at an engine speed of 1,800–1,900 rpm. Refer to Efficient and
Economic Driving Techniques in this work package.
11.
To conserve fuel and reduce high rpm engine noise when operating in city traffic or other reduced speed zones, match engine speed to road speed by selecting a gear range that permits operating engine near, but not lower than 1,500 rpm.
12.
When climbing uphill grades with the M915A1, accelerate at full throttle in gear range 1-5 and allow transmission to upshift automatically, or for all vehicles manually upshift transmission once engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, one gear at a time. Refer to Efficient and Economic Driving Techniques in this work package.
CAUTION
Never allow the engine to be pushed above the governed rpm when rolling down a grade. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
If a manual downshift or reverse shift is made at too high a road speed, the transmission hydraulic system will prevent the shift from occurring until the maximum lower speed is reached.
13.
When manually descending downhill grades, avoid over speeding engine by manually downshifting to next lower gear range before reaching maximum rpm.
TM 9-2320-273-10
BASIC DRIVING GUIDELINES - CONTINUED
0010
CAUTION
Holding steering wheel at full lock position for more than 10 seconds will cause oil to overheat, loss of oil from power steering reservoir, and damage to power steering pump.
14.
When maneuvering tractor in limited space, avoid holding steering wheel at full lock position.
END OF TASK
DRIVING GUIDELINES FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH CREW PROTECTION KIT
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
With Crew Protection Kit installed, vehicle is heavier than usual. Due to this increased weight, adjust driving to allow for greater stopping distance.
2.
Vehicle may steer differently with Crew Protection Kit installed. Adjust vehicle speed accordingly and exercise caution.
WARNING
Center of gravity is higher on vehicles equipped with Crew
Protection Kit. Always use slower speeds when driving vehicle. DO NOT operate vehicle on steep hills or inclines.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
3.
Due to higher center of gravity, use slower speeds when making turns or changing lanes. Also, use extreme caution when operating vehicle on any incline.
The higher center of gravity increases the chance of a vehicle rollover.
WARNING
Visibility is reduced on vehicles equipped with Crew
Protection Kit. Always use a ground guide when maneuvering vehicle near obstacles. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
0010-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
DRIVING GUIDELINES FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH CREW
PROTECTION KIT - CONTINUED
0010
4.
Visibility is reduced on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit. Operate vehicle with caution and use ground guides.
WARNING
Vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit have different door handles and latching hardware. Exercise caution when opening and closing armor doors to not allow clothing or equipment to catch on door hardware. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
5.
When entering or exiting vehicle, use three-point contact procedure at all times.
Keep clothing and equipment away from door hardware.
WARNING
DO NOT park vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit on a hill or incline. The parking brake may have insufficient braking capacity to hold vehicle due to increased vehicle weight. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
6.
Always park vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit on a level surface, set parking brake, and chock wheels.
7.
Operate heater/air conditioning system as needed to ensure proper cab ventilation.
Refer to Operating Air Conditioning Kit (WP 0013).
8.
Maintain good visibility during vehicle operation. Keep all ballistic glass clean.
Follow cleaning instructions for ballistic glass (WP 0027).
END OF TASK
STARTING OUT ON GRADE (M915 THROUGH M920)
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
0010-13
TM 9-2320-273-10
STARTING OUT ON GRADE (M915 THROUGH M920) - CONTINUED
0010
CAUTION
With transmission engaged, do not operate vehicle with the engine speed below 1,200 rpm or above 2,100 rpm. Failure to comply many result in transmission damage.
When staring with a load, engine speed must accelerate through 1,200 rpm in three seconds or less to prevent damage to front clutch. If rpm does not increase above
1,200 rpm in three seconds, ease off accelerator and shift to a lower gear. Failure to comply may result in transmission damage.
Do not start trucks in gears one, two, or three with fast acceleration. If it is necessary to start in these lower gears, fradually accelerate when starting while shifting through these gears. Failure to comply may result in transmission damage.
M915 through M920 vehicles are equipped with strip heaters to warm transmission during cold weather. The strip heaters are thermostatically controlled for automatic operation at temperatures below 30° F (-1° C). The indicator light on the console lights when the strip heaters are on. DO not operate the transmission until indicator light goes off. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
If gear grinding is heard during a shift immediately move shift lever to the left and then back into the detent. If gear grinding persists, stop vehicle immediately and notify your supervisor. Do not operate vehicle.
1.
Upshifts can be made at any engine speed above 1,750 rpm. Ease up on accelerator when shift selector is placed into the detent. This provides a smooth shit.
2.
Downshift must always be made when the engine speed is at or below 1,650 rpm.
Accelerate when shift selector is placed into the detent.
END OF TASK
OPTIMUM USE OF TACHOGRAPH
CAUTION
The maximum governed engine speed is 2,100 rpm under load. Never allow the engine to exceed this rpm or damage to engine may result.
0010-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPTIMUM USE OF TACHOGRAPH - CONTINUED
0010
NOTE
It is not necessary to operate the engine at maximum rpm for good performance. The engine performs efficiently at low and middle speed ranges and offers a definite fuel advantage at these reduced speeds. Control rpm by tailoring engine speed to the load requirements and desired road speed.
1.
Use tachometer hand (Figure 12, Item 3) of tachograph (Figure 12, Item 1) to monitor engine rpm in all gear ranges. When manually downshifting transmission while tractor is moving, monitor tachometer hand (Figure 12, Item 3) to ensure maximum 2,100 rpm engine speed is not exceeded.
2.
Control engine rpm through proper use of accelerator and gear selection for load requirements and desired road speed. For the M915A1 in normal driving situations, use gear range 1-5 and allow automatic transmission to control gear selection and engine speed.
3.
Use speedometer hand (Figure 12, Item 2) of tachograph (Figure 12, Item 1) to monitor tractor ground speed in miles per hour (mph). Ground speed and engine speed can be compared to help determine gear selection for any given condition
4.
Use odometer (Figure 12, Item 5) on tachograph (Figure 12, Item 1) to record distance traveled. Fuel consumption in miles per gallon (mpg) is calculated by dividing the number of miles traveled by the number of gallons consumed.
5.
Use clock hands (Figure 12, Item 4) on tachograph (Figure 12, Item 1) to estimate destination time based on miles per hour (mph). For example, if traveling at a ground speed of 60 mph, it will take one minute to travel one mile.
1
2
3
4
1
3
2
END OF TASK
5
M915 THROUGH M920
4
Figure 12. Tachograph.
M915A1
5
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915 THROUGH M920)
The following driving techniques should be learned to achieve efficiency, economy, and safe operation in the M915 through M920.
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Driving at Highway Speed
1.
When driving conditions permit, maintain the legal highway speed in gear that permits running the engine below governed speed. This is engine cruising range and it affords better fuel economy than higher engine speeds. Recommended normal highway cruising range is 1,800–1,900 rpm.
2.
Operate in the economy range at full throttle if satisfied with how the vehicle performs. There are times when hilly terrain, high winds, or other conditions make it impractical to operate without reserve power. Such conditions are better met if the truck is operated in a lower gear with reserve power available for changes in terrain, wind, etc.
Driving in the City
CAUTION
Engine rpm should not be less than 1,500 rpm for city driving. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1.
Operate the truck in high gear at reduced engine rpm to maintain the lawful speed. Reducing engine speed conserves fuel and lowers the noise level of the vehicle. When slowing down for towns and other posted speed zones along highway route, remain in running gear and reduce engine rpm. Avoid downshifting until ready to return truck to highway speed. Depending on gear selection recommended rpm range must not be less than 1,500 rpm for city driving.
0010-16
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915 THROUGH M920) -
CONTINUED
Hauling Uphill
1.
The engine works hardest when moving loaded truck up a grade. The proper use of gears shortens time on hills and minimizes the amount of shifting.
2.
Proceed uphill and depress the accelerator pedal completely, keeping it there as the truck moves up the grade. If there is sufficient power to maintain a satisfactory rpm, remain in that gear for the entire grade.
3.
If the hill causes a steady decline in engine rpm, downshift when engine rpm is at or below 1,650 rpm. Continue to downshift in this manner until engine rpm can be maintained.
4.
By remaining in each gear until arriving at the next lower shift point, truck will top the grade in the best possible time on less fuel and fewer shifts.
0010-17
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915 THROUGH M920) -
CONTINUED
Using Engine for Braking
WARNING
Do not use engine retarder on slippery road surfaces. Using engine retarder on wet, icy, or snow covered roads may result in loss of vehicle control. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Do not use engine retarder in first, second, or third gears except when descending steep grades. Never allow engine speed to drop below 1,200 rpm with the engine retarder applied. Do not engage the engine retarder when shifting or when the transmission is in neutral. Failure to comply may result in transmission damage.
1.
Vehicle is equipped with retarder system which enables the engine to act as a brake. The engine retarder should be used for descending grades in city traffic or any situation where slowing is required but not on slipper road surfaces such as rain, snow, or ice. Using the engine brake on slippery surfaces can cause the vehicle to skid. Excessive use of the service brakes is not desirable. The engine retarder is most effective between 1,750–2,000 rpm. The following procedures should be applied when appropriate: a.
Place engine retarder switch on the instrument panel in the low position. If more engine braking is needed, place engine retarder switch to the medium position. If more engine braking is needed, set the engine retarder switch to high.
b.
Keep vehicle in a gear that allows driver to maintain 1,750–2,000 rpm. This provides maximum engine braking effect.
0010-18
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915 THROUGH M920) -
CONTINUED
Downhill Braking
WARNING
Failure to comply to downhill driving procedures may cause loss of vehicle control and result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Excessive use of the service brake to control downhill speed will result in loss of braking power due to heat build up.
Failure to comply may result in severe injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
Follow proper downhill procedure by selecting a gear which allows the engine with the engine retarder applied to control truck speed with engine rpm at or below 2,000 rpm and service brakes not applied. When approaching a downgrade, progressively select a gear when combined with the engine retarder allows driver to maintain an engine speed of 1,750–2,000 rpm.
2.
As engine speed exceeds 2,000 rpm, use one positive application of the service brakes to slow the engine speed to 1,650 rpm, release engine retarder, downshift one gear, and reapply engine retarder. Repeat procedure until engine speed can be maintained between 1,750–2,000 rpm.
3.
In the event engine over speeds (above 2,100 rpm), make one positive firm application of the service brakes to slow vehicle speed.
4.
In the event transmission over speeds (above 2,300 rpm) and total transmission disengagement, perform the following: a.
Release engine retarder.
b.
Upshift c.
Make one positive application of the service brakes to slow vehicle speed and regain control of the vehicle.
5.
If the transmission totally disengages from the engine due to a shift being made with the engine retarder applied and engine speed has returned to low idle free wheeling, accelerate the engine to engage transmission.
6.
If experiencing a total loss of braking due to heat buildup: a.
Apply engine retarder (place switch in high mode).
b.
Upshift as engine speed approaches 2,100 rpm. Prior to each upshift, release engine retarder.
c.
In 16th gear, continue to apply engine retarder and maintain directional control of vehicle.
END OF TASK
0010-19
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1)
The following driving techniques should be learned to achieve efficiency, economy, and safe operation in the M915A1.
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Driving at Highway Speeds
NOTE
The transmission lockup clutch automatically engages after load is rolling and torque demand is low, and automatically disengages at lower tractor speeds. When engaged, increased fuel economy is achieved at highway cruising speeds.
1.
Learn to identify transmission lockup clutch engagement/disengagement. Lockup engagement is felt similar to transmission gear range shifts. In addition, a slight change in engine sound can be heard when lockup occurs, due to a drop in rpm.
With experience it is possible to tell the difference between gear range changes and lockup engagement/disengagement.
2.
When driving conditions permit, maintain legal highway speed in gear range 1-5
(Figure 13, Item 1). Gear range 1-5 (Figure 13, Item 1) permits running the engine below its governed speed (preferably 10–20 percent below governed speed), and affords better fuel economy than at higher engine speeds. The recommended normal highway cruising range is 1,800–1,900 rpm.
0010-20
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
1 2
Figure 13. Transmission Control Lever Range Indicator.
NOTE
Running in a low gear at a high rpm when restricted to
25–30 mph wastes fuel and creates a higher noise level than necessary.
3.
When driving conditions do not permit operating in economy range, it may be necessary to run engine at higher engine speeds (full throttle) or manually shift to a lower gear. When operating in hilly terrain, high winds, or at maximum GCWR, additional power to meet these conditions may require operating in gear range 1-4
(Figure 13, Item 2) or lower.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
Driving in City Stop-and-Go Traffic
CAUTION
Operating tractor below 1,500 rpm in gear range 1-5 will lug the engine, and is not recommend for city driving. Failure to comply may result in damage to engine.
1.
Operate the vehicle in gear range 1-5 (Figure 14, Item 1) or 1-4
(Figure 14, Item 2) for normal stop-and-go city driving. Operating in gear range
1-5 (Figure 14, Item 1) or 1-4 (Figure 14, Item 2) when conditions permit, will lower engine speed and increase fuel economy. Vehicle should not be operated in high gear ranges at engine speeds below 1,500 rpm for city driving.
NOTE
The automatic transmission can be manually upshifted through all gear ranges while accelerating at full throttle.
Manually down shifting is limited to the maximum allowable engine speed for the next lower gear range. However, if a manual down shift or reverse shift is made at too high a road speed, the transmission hydraulic system will prevent the shift from occurring until the maximum lower speed is reached.
2.
If traffic, road, or load conditions warrant, it may be desirable to limit the automatic upshift by selecting gear range 1-3 (Figure 14, Item 3). This prevents the engine from running below 1,500 rpm in gear range 1-4 (Figure 14, Item 2) or
1-5 (Figure 14, Item 1) at slower road speeds. When conditions allow for faster road speeds, manually upshift to gear range 1-4 (Figure 14, Item 2) followed by
1-5 (Figure 14, Item 1). This practice lowers engine speed and provides increased fuel economy.
Hauling on Uphill Grades
CAUTION
Use service brakes to hold tractor while stopped on a grade.
Never use the transmission to hold tractor on grade or severe overheating and damage to transmission will result.
1.
When starting from a stop on maximum uphill grades pulling maximum load, use gear range 1 (Figure 14, Item 4), accelerate at full throttle, and manually upshift once engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm one gear range at a time. If uphill grade prevents engine speed from reaching 1,700 rpm, downshift to next lower gear range to maintain at least 1,700 rpm.
0010-22
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
2.
When starting from a stop on uphill grades pulling normal loads, use gear range
1-5 (Figure 14, Item 1) and accelerate at full throttle. Allow transmission to upshift automatically until desired road speed is attained. If there is sufficient power to maintain the desired road speed, remain in gear range 1-5
(Figure 14, Item 1). Manually downshift transmission to gear range 1-4
(Figure 14, Item 2) or lower if the desired road speed cannot be attained.
3.
When operating at desired road speed and an uphill grade causes a steady decrease in road speed, manually downshift to the next lower gear range once engine speed reaches 1,700 rpm. Continue to downshift in this manner to match the power demands of the grade. Once at top of hill, return to gear range 1-5
(Figure 14, Item 1).
1 2
3
4
Figure 14. Transmission Range Indicator.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
Using Engine for Braking
WARNING
The engine brake loses its effectiveness to control speed of tractor when tractor is pushed by additional weight of trailer on downhill grades. Failure to downshift transmission to lower gear range and use service brakes to keep tractor and engine speeds under control may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not use engine retarder on slippery road surfaces. Using engine retarder on wet, icy, or snow covered roads may result in loss of vehicle control. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
To operate the engine retarder, switch ENGINE RETARDER switch
(Figure 15, Item 4) to the number of cylinders desired for braking action
(WP 0005). To slow tractor, move foot completely off accelerator pedal
(Figure 16, Item 1) and depress engine retarder control pedal (Figure 16, Item 2).
2.
To maximize the braking effect of the engine retarder, keep transmission in a gear range that matches road speed and rated engine rpm. Engine braking is increased by either downshifting to the next lower gear range and/or placing the ENGINE
RETARDER switch (Figure 15, Item 4) to MED position (Figure 15, Item 2) or
HIGH position (Figure 15, Item 1).
3.
When using the engine retarder on a downhill grade, select the same gear range necessary for climbing the same grade. To increase braking effect of engine retarder, either downshift transmission to the next lower gear range and/or switch the ENGINE RETARDER switch (Figure 15, Item 4) to MED position
(Figure 15, Item 2) or HIGH position (Figure 15, Item 1). To decrease braking effect of engine retarder, either upshift transmission to higher gear range and/or switch ENGINE RETARDER switch (Figure 15, Item 4) to MED position
(Figure 15, Item 2) or LOW position (Figure 15, Item 3).
4
Figure 15. Engine Retarder Switch.
ENGINE
RETARDER
3
1
2
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
WARNING
Never downshift to a gear range lower than the tractor road speed on slippery pavement. Sudden increase in engine rpm may cause drive wheels to lose traction with pavement and result in loss of control of tractor or jackknifing of trailer.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not use engine retarder on slippery road surfaces. Using engine retarder on wet, icy, or snow covered roads may result in loss of vehicle control. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Engagement of differential lockup may be helpful on
4.
The engine retarder should never be used on slippery surfaces such as wet, icy, or snow covered pavement. Initial braking force when applying the engine retarder may cause tractor drive wheels to lose traction with road surface. Use service brake pedal and/or trailer brake hand control when slowing or stopping tractor on slippery surfaces. Refer to Trailer Brake Hand Control, in this work package and
Snow and Ice in Unusual Terrain Operation (WP 0018).
1
2
Figure 16. Accelerator and Engine Retarder Control Pedals.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10 0010
OPERATING TRAILER BRAKE HAND CONTROL
CAUTION
After use, always return the trailer brake hand control to its off position (all the way up), or the trailer brakes will burn.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Use the trailer brake hand control to help avoid jackknifing. This control applies the trailer brakes only. To apply the trailer brakes, pull down on the control. Be sure to return the trailer brake hand control to its off position (all the way up) when finished.
END OF TASK
OPERATING INTER-AXLE DIFFERENTIAL LOCKUP
CAUTION
Do not operate the truck on hard surfaces any longer than necessary with the differential lockup engaged. Driveline windup may occur and damage the differential.
Inter-axle differential lockup provides additional traction by applying full torque to both rear axles. On M916 through M920 models, the front driving axle is also engaged. This feature should be used any time tractive conditions are poor, e.g., rainy or icy pavement. For M916 through M920 models, it should also be used in off-road operations.
The Differential Lock/Unlock control (Figure 16, Item 1) is located on instrument panel
(Figure 16, Item 2) to the right of driver. Use the following instructions to engage and disengage the system.
Engage Inter-axle Differential Lockup All Models
1.
Pull to the side of the road and stop truck.
2.
Place Differential Lock/Unlock control (Figure 17, Item 1) in the LOCK position.
3.
Observe that Differential Lockout indicator light (Figure 17, Item 3) comes on.
The truck is now ready for operation.
NOTE
On all models, if the Differential Lockup indicator light does not go off it may be necessary to back up slowly, go forward again, and repeat until the light goes off.
Disengage Interaxle Differential Lockup (M915)
1.
Remove foot from the accelerator pedal.
2.
Place Differential Lock/Unlock control (Figure 17, Item 1) in the LOCK position.
3.
Observe that Differential Lockup indicator light (Figure 17, Item 3) goes off. The system is now disengaged.
0010-26
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATING INTER-AXLE DIFFERENTIAL LOCKUP - CONTINUED
Disengage Inter-axle Differential Lockup (M916 through M920)
1.
Remove foot from the accelerator pedal.
2.
Place Differential Lock/Unlock control (Figure 17, Item 1) in the UNLOCK position momentarily and observe that Differential Lockup indicator light
(Figure 17, Item 3) goes off.
3.
Place Differential Lock/Unlock control (Figure 17, Item 1) in the center OFF position. Do not operate truck if Differential Lockup indicator light
(Figure 17, Item 3) stays on.
0010
1
2
M915 THROUGH M915A1
M915 THROUGH M920
3
Figure 17. Inter-axle Differential Lockup Controls.
END OF TASK
OPERATING PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920)
WARNING
Do not use the pusher axle as a step when in the raised position. When pusher axle wheels are off the ground, it freewheels. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Do not use pusher axle during off-highway operations.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATING PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920) - CONTINUED
0010
When operating the M917, M919, and M920 with payload on a highway, use (lower) pusher axle to comply with local requirements regarding maximum allowable load per axle.
Lowering Pusher Axle
1.
Rotate CONTROL PRESSURE valve knob (Figure 18, Item 1) to the full left position (toward –) until pressure gauge (Figure 18, Item 2) reads 0 psi.
2.
Place pusher axle control lift knob (Figure 18, Item 3) in AXLE DOWN position.
Adjusting Load On Pusher Axle
1.
Refer to pusher axle air pressure load chart located in vehicle glove box
(Figure 19 or 20) and determine required pressure setting.
2.
Rotate CONTROL PRESSURE valve knob (Figure 18, Item 1) right (toward +) until pressure gauge (Figure 18, Item 2) indicates proper pressure setting for desired load.
3.
Using screw driver, tighten setscrew (Figure 18, Item 4) at center of CONTROL
PRESSURE valve knob (Figure 18, Item 1) to lock knob in position at selected pressure.
4.
With setscrew (Figure 18, Item 4) tightened at selected pressure, CONTROL
PRESSURE valve knob (Figure 18, Item 1) can be closed (toward –) and reset to previous setting.
Raising Pusher Axle
1.
Place pusher axle control lift knob (Figure 18, Item 3) in AXLE LIFT position.
This should be done when turning sharp corners to shorten turning radius and avoid dragging tires. This can be done when the vehicle is in motion.
4
1
CONTROL
PRESSURE
2
GRANNING
SUSPENSIONS
40
60
80
100
120
10
140
160
AXLE
LIFT
AXLE
DOWN
Figure 18. Pusher Axle Controls.
3
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATING PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920) - CONTINUED
0010
MAX. GVWR
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
AIR PRESSURE GAUGE SETTING
(PSI)
90
Figure 19. M917 & M919 Pusher Axle Air Pressure for Vehicle Weight Load Chart.
MAX. GVWR
55
50
45
65
60
40
35
75
70
30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
AIR PRESSURE GAUGE SETTING
(PSI)
100 110
Figure 20. M920 Pusher Axle Air Pressure for Vehicle Weight Load Chart.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
STOPPING, SHUTTING DOWN ENGINE, AND PARKING VEHICLE
INITIAL SETUP:
References
STOPPING, SHUTTING DOWN ENGINE, AND PARKING VEHICLE
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Before shutting down the engine, idle (550–650 rpm) with no load for at least 3 minutes to allow turbocharger to cool.
Cooling time will depend on how hard the engine has been worked. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
To stop vehicle, perform the following:
1.
Release accelerator pedal, refer to WP 0005.
2.
Allow reduction in engine RPM and automatic downshifting of transmission to
help slow vehicle, refer to WP 0010.
3.
Apply service brakes to bring tractor to complete stop, refer to WP 0005.
4.
Continue to depress and hold service brake pedal, shift transmission control lever
to neutral (N) position, and apply parking brakes, refer to WP 0010.
5.
Idle engine for at least 3 minutes to allow turbocharger to cool.
6.
Turn OFF engine run switch, refer to WP 0005.
0011-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0011
STOPPING, SHUTTING DOWN ENGINE, AND PARKING VEHICLE - CONTINUED
WARNING
Never park tractor on a steep grade. It is never good practice to park a heavy truck on a steep slope even when parking brake holding capability exceeds federal safety standards.
Failure to comply may result in tractor moving unexpectedly, damage to equipment, and injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Parking brakes will provide sufficient holding force if parked on a normal, level surface.
To park the vehicle, perform the following:
1.
Stop truck.
2.
Pull parking brake control knob (WP 0005).
3.
If truck is parked on normal surfaces, parking brakes will provide sufficient holding force.
4.
If truck is parked on unusual surfaces, chock wheels and take any other steps to keep vehicle from moving.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0011-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION AND COUPLING AND UNCOUPLING TRAILERS
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
This work package covers fifth wheel operation and all procedures involved with coupling and uncoupling trailers for the M915, M916, M920, and M915A1 tractors. All tractors are similar, but the M915A1 is equipped with a cab controlled sliding fifth wheel and the M916 and M920 are equipped with a winch for use with light and medium equipment trailers.
0012-1
M915 FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION
TM 9-2320-273-10 0012
WARNING
All personnel must stand clear of tractor and trailer during coupling operations. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The M915 line haul tractor is equipped with a 36 in. (91.4 cm) fore and aft oscillating fifth wheel for use with a 2 in. (50.8 mm) kingpin. The single oscillating fifth wheel will pitch 15 degrees forward and 10 degrees aft. It is rated at 40,000 lb (18,144 kg) vertical load and 150,000 lb (68,000 kg) drawbar pull. There are two manual kingpin lock release handles on the right side of the fifth wheel as shown in figure 1. The primary release handle must be pulled first before releasing the secondary handle to uncouple the trailer.
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
SECONDARY RELEASE
HANDLE
END OF TASK
LOCK GUARD
Figure 1. M915 Fifth Wheel Controls.
TM 9-2320-273-10
M916 AND M920 FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION
0012
WARNING
All personnel must stand clear of tractor and trailer during coupling operations. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The M916 and M920 equipment transporter tractors are equipped with a
36 in. (91.4 cm) four way oscillating fifth wheel for use with a 3.5 in. (88.9 mm) kingpin. It is rated at 70,000 lb (31,752 kg) vertical load and 200,000 lb (90,720 kg) drawbar pull. There are two manual kingpin lock release handles on the left side of the fifth wheel as shown in figure 2. The secondary release handle must be pulled first before releasing the primary handle.
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
SECONDARY RELEASE
HANDLE
Figure 2. M916 and M920 Fifth Wheel Controls.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10
M915A1 FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION
0012
WARNING
To avoid unintentional fifth wheel movement during tractor operation, always ensure fifth wheel control is in the LOCK position before placing tractor in normal operation. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Never move fifth wheel control to the UNLOCK position during normal tractor operation. Failure to comply may result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
All personnel must stand clear of tractor and trailer during coupling operations. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The M915A1 truck tractor is equipped with a cab controlled sliding fifth wheel for use with trailers having a 2 in. (50.8 mm) diameter kingpin. The fifth wheel is
36 in. (91.4 cm) in diameter and can oscillate or pitch 15 degrees fore and aft. Rated vertical load capacity is 40,000 lb (18,144 kg). Drawbar pull capacity is 150,000 lb
(68,039 kg). There are two kingpin lock releases on the left side of the fifth wheel, as shown in figure 3. To uncouple trailer kingpin from the fifth wheel, first pull the primary lock release handle, then pull the secondary lock release handle.
Moving fifth wheel control lever inside the cab to the UNLOCK position operates an air cylinder under the fifth wheel which allows it to travel on the slide track a total of
12 in. (30.5 cm) forward or backward. This feature allows for adjustment of the amount of cargo load carried by the rear tandem axles, within rated capacity.
With trailer coupled to the fifth wheel and the control in the UNLOCK position, adjustment is made by driving forward or backward slowly with the trailer brake hand control applied. After sliding adjustment is made, move fifth wheel control lever to the
LOCK position and release trailer brake hand control.
Use of the sliding fifth wheel for axle weight distribution requires scales to determine weight placed on each axle of the tractor and trailer. The normal position of the sliding fifth wheel is between the two rear tandem axles of the tractor with an unloaded or loaded trailer. From this starting position, weight on the front axle of the tractor can be increased by moving the sliding fifth wheel forward, and decreased by moving the sliding fifth wheel backward. See normal location decals on both sides of the fifth wheel assembly for correct positioning when towing the M872 trailer.
0012-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
M915A1 FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION - CONTINUED
CONTROL LEVER
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
SECONDARY RELEASE
HANDLE
LOCK GUARD
SLIDE TRACK
Figure 3. M915A1 Fifth Wheel Controls.
AIR LINE
END OF TASK
0012
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHOCKING TRAILER WHEELS BEFORE COUPLING
CAUTION
Use chock blocks on trailers equipped with chock blocks.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Remove chock blocks from brackets and place as specified below.
UPHILL GRADE
Place chock blocks behind wheels on both sides of axle.
DOWNHILL GRADE
Place chock blocks on front of wheels on both sides of axle.
LEVEL GROUND
Chock front wheels of one axle and the rear side on the opposite side of axle.
CHOCK BLOCKS
0012
END OF TASK
Figure 4. Chock Block Placement (Level Ground).
TM 9-2320-273-10 0012
EQUIPMENT CHECKS
Check tractor and trailer as follows before backing tractor under trailer.
1.
Visually check fifth wheel for cracked, damaged, or missing parts.
2.
Check mountings for good condition and mounting bolts for tightness.
3.
Ensure all moving parts and top of fifth wheel are properly lubricated.
4.
Check lock guard for proper operation. Notify your supervisor to have lock guard replaced if damaged or missing.
5.
Ensure both primary and secondary lock release handles are pulled out and lock guard is open to accept trailer kingpin.
6.
Ensure fifth wheel ramps are down, level with, or slightly below, angle of trailer pickup ramps.
7.
Adjust trailer height so fifth wheel picks up trailer on fifth wheel ramps.
8.
On the M915A1, ensure sliding fifth wheel control lever is in LOCK position.
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
LOCK GUARD
SECONDARY
RELEASE
HANDLE
LOCK GUARD
SECONDARY
RELEASE
HANDLE
M915 M916 and M920
Figure 5. Fifth Wheel Equipment Checks.
END OF TASK
LOCK GUARD
M915A1
TM 9-2320-273-10
COUPLING AND CONNECTING TRACTOR TO TRAILER
0012
WARNING
Ensure no one is standing behind tractor or trailer during the coupling procedure. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure the kingpin couples with the fifth wheel. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment, and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Ensure the kingpin does not contact fifth wheel ramps when coupling. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
For M915A1 the M967/M969 fuel tankers must be hauled with fifth wheel placed two notches rearward from HAUL position. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
Two lamp cables, one 12V and one 24V, are stored in the tool box under the passenger seat. The cover at either end of the 24V cable should be locked in the open position, by sliding the metal tab back, before connecting the lamp cable.
1.
Ensure tractor is centered in front of trailer at centerline as shown in figure 6.
2.
Back tractor under trailer gooseneck until fifth wheel ramps meet trailer kingpin in throat of fifth wheel.
3.
Stop, shift to neutral (N), and apply parking brake.
4.
Verify correct alignment as shown in figure 6.
5.
Ensure contact between trailer and fifth wheel ramps. If kingpin is positioned too high, it will not engage fifth wheel correctly.
6.
Connect trailer service and emergency air hoses on tractor pressure couplings.
7.
Enter cab and push in trailer air supply control knob and set trailer brake hand control.
8.
Release parking brake control.
9.
Shift transmission control lever to reverse (R) and back up until fifth wheel locks firmly on kingpin.
10.
Shift transmission control lever to first gear (1) and pull against load with trailer brake hand control set. This applies pressure against kingpin and provides a test to ensure a secure coupling.
11.
Set parking and service brakes.
12.
Release trailer brake hand control and shift transmission control lever to neutral
(N).
0012-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
COUPLING AND CONNECTING TRACTOR TO TRAILER - CONTINUED
0012
13.
Leave cab and verify primary and secondary release controls on fifth wheel are in and fifth wheel has not moved from position selected.
14.
Kingpin must be in fifth wheel locks. Daylight should not be seen between upper fifth wheel plate of trailer and fifth wheel.
15.
Ensure kingpin is not hooked over front of fifth wheel.
16.
Lift and secure trailer landing gear and stow crank handle in holder.
17.
Connect necessary lamp cables, 12V for normal lamps and/or 24V for blackout lamp operation.
18.
Check operation of trailer lights.
19.
Using hand control in cab, check operation of trailer brakes.
20.
Check all tires.
21.
Ensure air supply is adequate before starting out.
TRACTOR
KINGPIN
AIR HOSES
FIFTH
WHEEL
CENTERLINE
HOLDER
KINGPIN
TRAILER
CRANK
HANDLE
Figure 6. Tractor and Trailer Coupling.
TRAILER
LANDING
GEAR
TM 9-2320-273-10
COUPLING AND CONNECTING TRACTOR TO TRAILER - CONTINUED
TRAILER EMERGENCY
AIR HOSE
TRAILER SERVICE
AIR HOSE
0012
12 VOLT
LAMP CABLE
24 VOLT
LAMP CABLE
Figure 7. M915, M916, and M920 Air Hose and Cable Connections.
TRAILER EMERGENCY
AND SERVICE AIR HOSES
END OF TASK
12 VOLT
LAMP CABLE
24 VOLT
LAMP CABLE
Figure 8. M915A1 Air Hose and Cable Connections.
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHOCKING TRAILER WHEELS BEFORE UNCOUPLING
CAUTION
Use chock blocks on trailers equipped with chock blocks.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Remove chock blocks from brackets and place as specified below.
UPHILL GRADE
Place chock blocks behind wheels on both sides of axle.
DOWNHILL GRADE
Place chock blocks on front of wheels on both sides of axle.
LEVEL GROUND
Chock front wheels of one axle and the rear side on the opposite side of axle.
CHOCK BLOCKS
0012
END OF TASK
Figure 9. Chock Block Placement (Level Ground).
TM 9-2320-273-10 0012
UNCOUPLING AND DISCONNECTING TRACTOR FROM TRAILER
CAUTION
M967/M969 fuel tankers must be hauled with fifth wheel placed two notches rearward from HAUL position. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1.
Shift transmission control lever to neutral (N) and apply parking brake. Verify that parking brake indicator lamp comes on. This prevents tractor from running out from under trailer when unlocking fifth wheel.
2.
Pull out trailer air supply valve.
3.
Leave cab and block trailer wheels with chocks.
4.
Lower trailer landing gear until bases or wheels touch ground. Turn crank two more revolutions so when trailer is uncoupled, it will not drop down sharply and will be nearly level.
5.
Disconnect and secure trailer service and emergency air hoses and lamp cable(s).
6.
Unlock fifth wheel by first pulling primary lock release handle and then secondary lock release handle.
CAUTION
Do not pull all the way out from under the trailer until verifying the landing gear will support the trailer. If it collapses, the rear frame area of the tractor will be able to catch the front of the trailer before equipment damage occurs.
7.
Enter cab and slowly pull tractor forward until trailer kingpin is free from lock guard and landing gear is supporting trailer weight. Stop the tractor.
8.
Have crew member observe trailer kingpin to ensure it clears properly during separation. Ensure kingpin clears tractor rear frame crossmember when pulling tractor out from under trailer.
9.
Pull tractor slowly forward, allowing the trailer gooseneck and kingpin to completely clear the rear frame area of tractor.
0012-12
TM 9-2320-273-10 0012
UNCOUPLING AND DISCONNECTING TRACTOR FROM TRAILER - CONTINUED
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
LOCK GUARD
PRIMARY
RELEASE
HANDLE
M915
SECONDARY
RELEASE
HANDLE
SECONDARY
RELEASE
HANDLE
M916 and M920
Figure 10. Fifth Wheel Controls.
END OF TASK
M915A1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0012
PINTLE TOWING
1.
Attach trailer or tow bar to pintle hook.
2.
Connect trailer or vehicle electrical lamp cables to electric lamp cable receptacle at rear of tractor.
3.
Connect trailer air hoses to air hose quick disconnect couplings at rear of tractor.
PINTLE
ELECTRICAL LAMP
CABLE RECEPTACLE
AIR HOSE QUICK
DISCONNECT COUPLINGS
Figure 11. Pintle Towing Trailer Connections.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10
MUD FLAP STOWAGE
NOTE
When towing an M127 trailer, the rear mud flaps must be removed from normal position and stowed on stowage brackets.
1.
Remove retaining pin from each mud flap.
NOTE
It may be necessary to tap upward on the mud flap spring with a hammer or similar tool.
2.
Remove mud flaps by pulling up on spring.
3.
Insert mud flaps in stowage brackets on right frame rail.
4.
Insert retaining pins in springs.
5.
When towing operations are complete, install mud flaps and retaining pins in normal position.
0012
SPRING
MUD
FLAP
STOWAGE
BRACKET
SPRING
MUD
FLAP
RETAINING
PIN
RETAINING PIN
Figure 12. Mud Flap Stowage.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10 0012
PREPARATION FOR LOADING LIGHT AND MEDIUM EQUIPMENT TRAILERS
(M916 AND M920)
1.
Align tractor and semi-trailer as close as possible to front of payload equipment.
2.
Place transmission ratio selector in neutral (N).
3.
Apply parking brakes.
4.
Prepare semi-trailer for loading.
END OF TASK
WINCH (M916 AND M920)
The M916 and M920 are each equipped with a full hydraulic winch mounted on the frame behind the cab as shown below. The winch has a fail-safe spring-loaded brake which automatically sets any time the winch control valve is in neutral or in case of power failure (hydraulic pressure drops to less than 200 psi). The winch operates at
2,100 psi hydraulic pressure from a dual pump which is driven by a power takeoff on the transmission. The rated capacity of the winch is 45,000 lb (20,250 kg).
WINCH HYDRAULIC
OIL RESERVOIR WINCH BRAKE
WINCH DRUM
END OF TASK
WINCH
OPERATOR
STATION
WINCH
CONTROLS
WIRE ROPE
Figure 13. Winch Components.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0012
WINCH CONTROLS (M916 AND M920)
The winch operator station is located on the left side of the tractor behind the cab.
Operator stands on the platform provided and operates winch using the controls on top of the panel.
WINCH
CONTROL
LEVER 1
WINCH
OPERATOR
STATION
WINCH
CONTROL
LEVER 2
END OF TASK
Figure 14. Winch Controls.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0012
OPERATING WINCH AT TEMPERATURES BELOW -25° F (-32° C)
(M916 AND M920)
CAUTION
Avoid winching operations that cause sudden shock loads.
At extremely cold temperatures, metals become brittle and sudden shock loads can cause equipment damage. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1.
After the winch has been serviced by Field Maintenance and before operating the winch, warm up hydraulic system by engaging PTO and operating tractor at fast idle for 30 minutes.
2.
After warming hydraulic system, operate the winch in no-load condition by paying out about 100 feet of the wire rope at low speed. Take up the wire rope at low speed. Winch should be ready for normal operation.
END OF TASK
ENGAGING POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) FOR WINCH OPERATION (M916 AND M920)
WARNING
Hearing protection is required during winching operations.
Failure to comply may result in damage to hearing. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Avoid quick jerking action on cables when operating winch to prevent excessive loading on the cable. Keep personnel not involved in winching away from winch cables and payload. A snapping cable or shifting load can cause serious injury. Stop winching immediately if shifting payload presents a hazard, or if any component fails, and notify Field
Maintenance. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
The winch is not to be used for moving or lifting people. Do not shift the transmission with the power take-off (PTO) engaged. The gears stop during shifting, which could cause excessive loading of power take off. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Keep engine speed above 1,100 rpm after engaging PTO.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1.
Place transmission ratio selector in neutral (N).
2.
Operate engine at low idle and set parking brakes.
3.
Move ratio selector to 1st speed and pull PTO knob to engage the PTO. Return ratio selector back to neutral (N).
0012-18
TM 9-2320-273-10 0012
ENGAGING POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) FOR WINCH OPERATION (M916 AND M920)
- CONTINUED
4.
At the winch control panel, increase engine speed to desired speed ABOVE 1,100 rpm. Normal operation is 2,100 rpm.
TRANSMISSION
RATIO
SELECTOR
PTO
CONTROL
KNOB
PTO INDICATOR
LIGHT
PARKING BRAKE
CONTROL
END OF TASK
Figure 15. PTO Control Knob and Indicator Light.
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATING WINCH (M916 AND M920)
WARNING
Hearing protection is required during winching operations.
Failure to comply may result in damage to hearing. Seek medical attention in the event of injury.
Always wear heavy gloves when handling the winch wire rope. Never allow the cable to run through your hands as broken wires can cause painful injuries. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Do not pull up on control lever 2. This position is for operating equipment not used on the M915 series vehicles.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Observe drum to ensure wire rope is not completely paid out. Never operate winch with less than four turns of line on drum. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
The rated winch pull is set by limiting the hydraulic system relief valve pressure to a maximum of 2,100 psi which provides 45,000 lb (20,250 kg) pull on the bare drum. As the winch drum is loaded with line, the effective line pull is reduced. The line pull per cable layer with 7/8 inch wire rope is:
1st layer 45,000 lb (20,250 kg)
2nd layer 39,265 lb (17,810 kg)
3rd layer 34,775 lb (15,773 kg)
4th layer 31,210 lb (14,156 kg)
5th layer 28,310 lb (12,841 kg)
0012
Loading procedures will vary depending on the size and type of equipment to be transported.
The winch speed is normal in low speed. High speed is recommended for paying line out or taking up slack only.
1.
Lower pusher axle.
2.
Have crew member disconnect the wire rope clevis from its anchor.
3.
Pull up on winch control lever 2 to the middle position.
4.
To pay out the line, pull up and hold winch control lever 1 in full up position.
The winch will unwind in low speed. Have crew member walk end of the wire rope out.
0012-20
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATING WINCH (M916 AND M920) - CONTINUED
0012
NOTE
High speed winch operation is recommended for paying out line or taking up slack only.
5.
To run winch in high speed, push down and hold winch control lever 2. This doubles winch speed.
6.
When the desired amount of line has been paid out, stop winch by releasing both control levers.
WINCH
CONTROL
LEVER 1
WINCH
OPERATOR
STATION
WINCH
CONTROL
LEVER 2
END OF TASK
Figure 16. Winch Operator Station.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0012
SECURING WINCH WIRE ROPE (M916 AND M920)
1.
Direct crew member to disconnect wire rope from payload.
2.
With crew member pulling on wire rope to keep it fairly taut, begin rewinding the drum by pushing down on winch control lever 1.
3.
Check that wire rope winds neatly onto drum without tangling, kinking, twisting, or overlapping. Ensure coils on the drum are tight and close together.
4.
Direct crew member to signal when enough slack has been taken up to anchor the clevis.
5.
Have crew member anchor wire rope clevis on winch wire rope hook.
WINCH WIRE
ROPE
WIRE
ROPE
CLEVIS
Figure 17. Securing Winch Wire Rope.
END OF TASK
NORMAL SHUTDOWN OF WINCH PTO (M916 AND M920)
1.
Release winch controls. Push in winch throttle control.
2.
Reduce engine rpm using throttle control at the winch station.
3.
Move PTO control to the disengage position.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
WINCH WIRE
ROPE HOOK
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
OPERATING AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
TOWING PINTLE
To open pintle:
1.
Remove cotter pin.
2.
Move latch and lift lock to open position.
To close pintle:
1.
Move latch and push lock down. Latch will engage in closed position.
2.
Insert cotter pin to secure lock.
LATCH
COTTER PIN
END OF TASK
Figure 1. Towing Pintle.
LOCK
TM 9-2320-273-10
TIE DOWNS AND LIFTING SHACKLES
WARNING
Improper use of lifting equipment and attachment of cables to tractor may result in injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Lifting sling must have a weight capacity greater than the weight of the vehicle. Refer to specified vehicle weight in
Equipment Description and Data (WP 0003). Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
To lift truck, attach lifting sling to designated lifting shackles. Refer to figures 2 through 5.
TIE DOWNS
LIFTING SHACKLE
TIE DOWNS
0013
LIFTING
SHACKLE
LIFTING SHACKLE
M915
Figure 2. M915 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs.
TM 9-2320-273-10
TIE DOWNS AND LIFTING SHACKLES - CONTINUED
TIE DOWNS
TIE DOWNS
0013
LIFTING SHACKLES
LIFTING
SHACKLES
M916 and M918
Figure 3. M916 and M918 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs.
TM 9-2320-273-10
TIE DOWNS AND LIFTING SHACKLES - CONTINUED
0013
WARNING
Ensure lifting area is clear of all non-essential personnel prior to lifting and no personnel enters during lifting operation. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
2.
Lift truck slowly and have observers watch for any signs of cable failure, unusual load shifts, and obstructions.
3.
During air or sea transport, secure truck by attaching cables to designated tie down points. Refer to figures 2 through 5.
TIE DOWNS
TIE DOWNS
LIFTING SHACKLE
LIFTING
SHACKLES
M917, M919, and M920
Figure 4. M917, M919, and M920 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs.
TM 9-2320-273-10
TIE DOWNS AND LIFTING SHACKLES - CONTINUED
LIFTING SHACKLES
AND TIE DOWNS
0013
TOWING EYES,
LIFTING
SHACKLES,
AND TIE DOWNS
TOWING EYES,
LIFTING
SHACKLES,
AND TIE DOWNS
LIFTING SHACKLES
AND TIE DOWNS
M915A1
Figure 5. M915A1 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs.
END OF TASK
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
TM 9-2320-273-10 0013
WARNING
Contact with fire extinguisher chemicals may cause skin irritation. Use caution while discharging chemicals. Do not spray on or at any personnel. Use chemical resistant gloves.
In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages. DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
To operate:
1.
Remove extinguisher from bracket located at rear of tool box to left of passenger seat.
2.
Hold extinguisher upright. Point nozzle toward base of fire and pull safety pin.
3.
Press top lever, discharging chemical at base of fire. Use side-to-side motion.
4.
After using fire extinguisher, notify Field Maintenance that a replacement for used extinguisher is necessary.
SAFETY PIN
LEVER
END OF TASK
NOZZLE
Figure 6. Fire Extinguisher.
EXTINGUISHER
TM 9-2320-273-10 0013
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE
NATO slave receptacle is mounted on side of battery box toward the front of the truck.
This receptacle is used primarily as a cable connection for jump starting your truck or another truck.
NATO
SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
END OF TASK
BATTERY
Figure 7. NATO Slave Receptacle.
TM 9-2320-273-10
AIR CONDITIONING (AIR CONDITIONING KIT EQUIPPED VEHICLES ONLY)
To operate:
1.
Start engine and allow engine to reach operating temperature (WP 0008).
2.
Move A/C ON/OFF switch to ON position (WP 0005).
3.
Adjust fan speed switch as necessary (WP 0005).
4.
Adjust blower unit vents as desired.
0013
A/C ON/OFF
SWITCH
END OF TASK
FAN SPEED
SWITCH
BLOWER UNIT
VENTS
Figure 8. Air Conditioning.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0013
ESCAPE HATCH (CREW PROTECTION KIT EQUIPPED VEHICLES ONLY)
To operate:
1.
Pull escape hatch latch out.
NOTE
Escape hatch latch will engage when escape hatch is moved to full open position.
2.
Pull grab handle toward passenger side of cab, and slide escape hatch to full open position.
ESCAPE HATCH
LATCH
ESCAPE
HATCH
Figure 9. Opening Escape Hatch.
GRAB HANDLE
TM 9-2320-273-10
ESCAPE HATCH (CREW PROTECTION KIT EQUIPPED VEHICLES ONLY) -
CONTINUED
0013
3.
Release rear window latch, and slide rear sliding window toward passenger side of vehicle to full open position.
REAR SLIDING
WINDOW
REAR WINDOW
LATCH
Figure 10. Opening Cab Rear Sliding Window.
TM 9-2320-273-10
ESCAPE HATCH (CREW PROTECTION KIT EQUIPPED VEHICLES ONLY) -
CONTINUED
0013
NOTE
On vehicles equipped with rear window stone shield, stone shield pins can be removed from inside cab through sliding rear window.
4.
On driver side of cab, remove two pins from rear window stone shield.
5.
Open stone shield and exit vehicle through opening in escape hatch and sliding rear window.
STONE SHIELD
PINS
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
Figure 11. Opening Stone Shield.
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
GENERAL
Locations and descriptions of data plates and decals found on the vehicles are provided under this heading. If any data plate or decal is worn, broken, unreadable, painted over, or missing, it must be replaced. Notify your supervisor.
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES
Engine Retarder Instruction Decal - This decal, located on driver sun visor, describes engine retarder operation.
Noise Emission Control Information Decal - This decal, located on driver sun visor, describes transmission operation.
Power Take-Off Instruction Decal - This decal, located on driver sun visor, describes power take-off (PTO) operation for M916 through M920 vehicles.
Transmission Instruction Decal - This decal, located on driver sun visor, describes transmission operating instructions.
ENGINE RETARDER
INSTRUCTION DECAL
NOISE EMISSION
CONTROL INFORMATION
DECAL
TRANSMISSION
INSTRUCTION DECAL
POWER TAKE-OFF
INSTRUCTION DECAL
Figure 1. Sun Visor Instruction and Information Decals.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge Decal - This decal, located on instrument panel, describes transmission oil temperature gauge reading.
Ether Quick Start Instruction Decal - This decal, located on instrument panel, describes ether quick start system operation.
Differential Lockup Instruction Decal - This decal, located on instrument panel, describes inter-axle differential control operation.
Vehicle Warranty Decal - This decal, located on instrument panel, describes vehicle warranty.
TRANSMISSION OIL
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE DECAL
ETHER QUICK START
INSTRUCTION DECAL
DIFFERENTIAL
LOCKUP
INSTRUCTION
DECAL
VEHICLE WARRANTY
DECAL
Figure 2. Instrument Panel Instruction and Information Decals.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Rust Proofing Data Decal - This decal, located on inside of driver door, describes vehicle rust proofing data.
Transmission Service Instructions Decal (M915 through M920) - This decal, located on inside of the driver door, describes transmission service instructions.
Towing Instruction Decal (M915A1) - This decal, located on inside of driver door, describes towing instructions.
No Spin Operating Instructions Decal (M915 through M920) - This decal, located on inside of driver door, describes no spin operating instructions.
Vehicle Identification Data - This decal, located on inside of driver door, identifies vehicle identification data.
Certification FMVSR Data - This decal, located on inside of driver door, identifies
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Regulation (FMVSR) data.
TRANSMISSION SERVICE
INSTRUCTION DECAL
RUST PROOFING
DATA DECAL
TOWING INSTRUCTION
DECAL
CERTIFICATION
FMVSR DATA
VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION
DATA
NO SPIN OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS DECAL
Figure 3. Driver Door Data Plates and Instruction Information Decals.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Relay Identification Decal (M915A1) - The decal, located below each relay, identifies the function controlled by the relay. Maintenance uses these decals to identify electrical circuits so repairs can be made.
Circuit Breaker Identification Decal (M915A1) - The decal, located under each circuit breaker, identifies them by number. Maintenance uses this decal to identify electrical circuits so repairs can be made.
RELAY
IDENTIFICATION
DECAL
CIRCUIT BREAKER
IDENTIFICATION
DECAL
Figure 4. M915A1 Circuit Breaker and Relay Identification Decals.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Transmission Air Pressure Control Operating Data (M915 through M920) - This data plate, located on side of shift console, describes transmission air pressure control operating instructions.
Seat Adjustment Instruction Decals - These decals, located on side of driver seat, describe how to operate seat adjustment controls.
Transmission Operating Instructions (M915 through M920) - This data plate, located on top of shift console, describes transmission operating instructions.
Cab Controlled Fifth Wheel Instruction Data (M915A1) - This data plate, located on fifth wheel control, identifies when fifth wheel control is in Locked or Unlocked position.
TRANSMISSION AIR
PRESSURE CONTROL
OPERATING DATA
CAB CONTROLLED
FIFTH WHEEL
INSTRUCTION DATA
TRANSMISSION
OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
INSTRUCTION DECALS
M915 THROUGH M920
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
INSTRUCTION DECALS
M915A1
Figure 5. Driver Seat Instruction Decals.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) Air Filter Warning
Decal - This decal, located on the air cleaner, warns if CBRN exposure is suspected.
All air filter media should be handled by personnel wearing protective equipment.
Consult your unit CBRN officer or noncommissioned officer for appropriate handling or disposal instructions.
Hood Latching Safety Precautions Decal - This decal, located under the hood, describes proper instructions for raising and supporting the hood safely.
CBRN AIR FILTER
WARNING DECAL
HOOD LATCHING SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS DECAL
Figure 6. Engine Compartment Decals.
TM 9-2320-273-10
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Fan Clutch Actuator Safety Precautions Decal - This decal, located on the fan shroud, alerts personnel to fan clutch actuator safety precautions.
0014
FAN CLUTCH ACTUATOR
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DECAL
Figure 7. Fan Shroud Decals.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
M872 Trailer Fifth Wheel Alignment Arrow Decals (M915A1) - These decals, located on both sides of fifth wheel, identify proper position of fifth wheel for towing the M872 trailer.
Fifth Wheel Positioning Instructions Decal (M915A1) - This decal, located on both sides of fifth wheel, describes sliding fifth operation.
M872 TRAILER FIFTH WHEEL
ALIGNMENT ARROW DECALS
FIFTH WHEEL POSITIONING
INSTRUCTIONS DECAL
Figure 8. Fifth Wheel Decals.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Winch Control Operating Instructions Decal (M916 and M920) - These decals, located on top of the winch control station, describe the operation of winch controls.
Tank Capacity and Filling Instruction Decal (M916 and M920) - This decal, located on the winch hydraulic reservoir tank, identifies tank capacity and instructions for filling tank to the proper level.
Winch Identification Data Plate (M916 and M920) - This data plate, located on right side of winch frame, lists the winch manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
WINCH CONTROL
OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
DECAL
TANK CAPACITY
AND FILLING
INSTRUCTION DECAL
WINCH
IDENTIFICATION
DATA PLATE
Figure 9. Winch Decals and Data Plates.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
AR 70-1
FM 55-30
FM 21-305
References - Continued
WARNING
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the limits specified in the TM in accordance with (IAW) AR 70-1. Operation beyond these limits without written approval from the Commander, U.S.
Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN:
AMSTA-CG, Warren, MI 48397-5000, is prohibited. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
GENERAL
NOTE
For maintenance under unusual conditions, refer to
This work package (WP), and WP 0016 through WP 0021 and WP 0034, provide
operating and maintenance procedures for operating the vehicle under unusual conditions, including extreme temperatures, humidity, difficult terrain, fording, spring brake operation, and towing the vehicle.
For information on operation under unusual conditions for M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit and Air
Conditioning Kit, refer to WP 0016 through WP 0021 and WP 0034. For emergency
use of Crew Protection Kit escape hatch, refer to WP 0013.
0015-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0015
GENERAL - CONTINUED
When operating under unusual conditions, it is especially important to keep vehicle clean and adequately lubricated. Become familiar with these WPs and the referenced publications. FM 55-30 contains important information on driver selection and training.
FM 21-305 provides basic instruction for operators of wheeled vehicles. Use the information in these manuals along with the guidelines in the following WPs to operate the vehicle properly under unusual conditions.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0015-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
EXTREME COLD CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
FM 9-207
References - Continued
WARNING
The driver and passenger must wear seatbelts during vehicle operation. Ensure seatbelts are fastened and properly adjusted before placing vehicle in motion. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
OPERATION IN EXTREME COLD CONDITIONS
1.
M915 through M920 and M915A1 vehicles require special attention and care during periods of extreme cold weather. Remember that in extreme cold: a.
Lubricants thicken.
b.
Batteries may lose power or freeze.
c.
Electrical insulation can crack causing short circuits.
d.
Fuel may not combine properly with air to form the necessary mixture for starting the engine.
e.
Metals and other materials may become hard or brittle.
f.
The cooling system requires adequate protection from extreme cold.
g.
Fuels, lubricants, and antifreeze compounds require special storage, handling, and use.
2.
Read and become familiar with the material in the referenced publications. They cover information needed when operating a vehicle in extreme cold. Keep in mind the problems characteristic of operation in cold weather, and ensure vehicle is adequately prepared and protected for existing weather conditions. Follow these guidelines when operating vehicle in conditions of extreme cold.
3.
For detailed guidance on antifreeze protection, lubrication, electrical system service, and other maintenance requirements for extreme cold operations, refer to
FM 9-207.
0016-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATION IN EXTREME COLD CONDITIONS - CONTINUED
0016
CAUTION
Never use a scraper to remove frost or ice from ballistic glass. Failure to comply may result in damage to outer layer of ballistic glass.
NOTE
To clear frost and ice from ballistic glass, perform step 3 for
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 vehicles.
Clearing frost and ice from ballistic glass requires more time than standard glass.
It will require more effort in extreme cold to open and close armor doors, egress window, and access door.
4.
On vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, extend vehicle warm-up time and operate heater and defroster to clear frost or ice from all ballistic glass.
END OF TASK
ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT
CAUTION
Do not attempt to use extension cords in conjunction with the supplied winterization auxiliary power cable unless wire size is sufficient to carry 40 amps of current. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1.
When operating in arctic conditions, ensure vehicle is equipped with Arctic
Winterization Kit. All vehicles assigned to arctic regions must be equipped with a winterization kit for protection of vehicle systems from freeze damage and to enable engine starting in extreme cold. The kit consists of four separate heaters which are: a.
Engine coolant heater (thermostatically controlled) b.
Transmission heater (immersion type) c.
Engine oil heater (immersion type - thermostatically controlled) d.
Battery heater (coil type - thermostatically controlled)
2.
The arctic winterization system is powered by use of an external alternating current (ac) power source. A 25 ft (7.6 m) auxiliary power cable, equipped with ground wire, is provided with the Arctic Winterization Kit. The auxiliary power cable is designed to connect to the receptacle located adjacent to the vehicle battery box and a compatible ac outlet. Each of the four heaters is turned on by a separate circuit breaker located inside a waterproof circuit breaker box. The heaters function automatically until the system is turned off. To turn on system:
0016-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT - CONTINUED
0016
a.
When low temperatures are expected and vehicle will not be driven again while still warm, park vehicle within 25 ft (7.6 m) of auxiliary power source.
b.
Ensure engine coolant heater shutoff valve (Figure 1, Item 2), located on right side of engine below turbocharger (Figure 1, Item 1), is open.
1
2
Figure 1. Engine Coolant Shutoff Valve.
c.
Open cover (Figure 2, Item 1) and connect auxiliary power cable to heater receptacle (Figure 2, Item 2). Connect opposite end of auxiliary power cable to external power source.
1
2
Figure 2. Heater Receptacle.
0016-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT - CONTINUED
d.
Open circuit breaker box door (Figure 3, Item 1) and switch four circuit breakers (Figure 3, Item 3) to ON position.
e.
Close circuit breaker box door (Figure 3, Item 1) to keep weather out.
0016
1
2
3
4
Figure 3. Circuit Breakers.
3.
To turn off system: a.
Open circuit breaker box door (Figure 3, Item 1) and switch four circuit breakers (Figure 3, Item 3) to OFF position.
b.
Close circuit breaker box door (Figure 3, Item 1).
c.
Disconnect auxiliary power cable from heater receptacle (Figure 3, Item 4) and close cover (Figure 3, Item 2). Disconnect opposite end of auxiliary power cable from external power source.
END OF TASK
0016-4
TM 9-2320-273-10 0016
STARTING OUT
CAUTION
M915 through M920 vehicles are equipped with strip heaters to warm transmission during cold weather. The strip heaters are thermostatically controlled for automatic operation at temperatures below 30° F (-1° C). The indicator light on the console lights when the strip heaters are on. Do not operate the transmission until indicator light goes off. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1.
Use your cold weather starting procedure (WP 0009), and give the engine time to
reach an operating temperature range of at least 120–140° F (49–60° C) for M915 through M920 or 140–160° F (60–71° C) for M915A1.
2.
Adjust the amount of winter front coverage over the radiator grille to maintain a normal coolant operating range of 165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through
M920 or 180–200° F (82–93° C) for M915A1.
3.
Start driving very slowly. Be alert to the possibility that tires may be frozen to the ground, frozen in the shape of flat spots, or that one or more brake shoes may be frozen and require preheating. Notify your supervisor if necessary.
4.
Drive very slowly for approximately 100 yards, being careful not to let the engine stall. By starting out slowly and carefully, you can more easily detect any initial problems caused by the cold weather, and your tractor’s fluids and components will have sufficient warm-up time.
END OF TASK
PROTECTING VEHICLE WHEN PARKED
1.
If you shut down your tractor for a short period, park in a sheltered area out of the wind. If there is no shelter available, park so that tractor does not face into the wind. Install the winter front.
2.
If parking your vehicle for a long shutdown period, try to park on high ground and use planks or brush to make a raised and relatively dry surface for the tires in case weather conditions worsen. Keep the tires out of snow, water, ice, and mud, if possible.
3.
Clean snow, ice, and mud from vehicle as soon as possible after shutdown.
4.
If your vehicle will be parked for an extended period of time during cold weather, notify your supervisor to have maintenance personnel remove batteries and store in a warm place. Fill fuel tank to guard against condensation. Drain any accumulated water from air reservoirs and fuel filter. Install winter front cover.
5.
Ensure tires are properly inflated (WP 0003).
0016-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
PROTECTING VEHICLE WHEN PARKED - CONTINUED
0016
6.
Notify your supervisor to have maintenance personnel check and service the cooling system to ensure vehicle is adequately protected against extreme cold.
Ensure transmission is in neutral (N) and that vehicle tires are blocked before leaving the area.
END OF TASK
POWER STEERING
The power steering system incorporates a cooler designed to reduce power steering fluid temperatures during normal or unusually warm conditions. In extremely cold weather, the cooler becomes restrictive and must be bypassed to prevent over pressure and possible rupture of the cooler. Notify supervisor to perform this maintenance when
0° F (–18° C) or below is expected.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0016-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
EXTREME HOT CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WARNING
The driver and passenger must wear seatbelts during vehicle operation. Ensure seatbelts are fastened and properly adjusted before placing vehicle in motion. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
OPERATING IN EXTREME HOT CONDITIONS
1.
During hot weather, it may be necessary to alter driving procedures to prevent vehicle from overheating. The following types of operation can cause vehicle to overheat: a.
Continuous high speeds b.
Long, hard pulls c.
Continuous use of low gear ranges on steep grades or in soft terrain
2.
Check water and transmission temperature gauges and stop vehicle if unusually high temperature readings are observed. Allow vehicle to cool.
3.
Check cooling system, air cleaner, engine oil level, and radiator fins frequently.
Perform necessary services and notify Field Maintenance of unusual gauge readings or other problems.
4.
Shorten differential oil change interval (WP 0035).
NOTE
Perform steps 5 through 7 for M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 vehicles.
The armored cab absorbs and retains more heat than a standard cab.
5.
Park vehicle away from direct sunlight whenever possible.
6.
Extend vehicle startup times in order to operate air conditioner to cool down interior of cab before performing mission.
7.
Extended operation of air conditioner is required to cool the interior of cab in extreme hot weather.
END OF TASK
0017-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0017
PROTECTING VEHICLE WHEN PARKED
1.
Park vehicle under cover, if possible to protect against the effects of sun, sand, and dust. If no shelter is available, cover vehicle with tarpaulins. Ensure tarpaulins cover the engine compartment and radiator to keep out sand and dust.
Cover window glass to protect against sandblasting.
2.
Check tires for damage and ensure all tires are inflated to proper pressures
3.
Check frequently for rust and fungus growth, which are common problems in hot, humid weather. Clean and lubricate vehicle to help prevent deterioration.
END OF TASK
POWER STEERING
The power steering system incorporates a cooler designed to reduce power steering fluid temperatures during normal or unusually warm conditions. Check oil level in power steering pump reservoir more often during periods of operation in extreme hot
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0017-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
UNUSUAL TERRAIN OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
FM 21-305
References - Continued
WARNING
The driver and passenger must wear seatbelts during vehicle operation. Ensure seatbelts are fastened and properly adjusted before placing vehicle in motion. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
GENERAL
Become familiar with the procedures in FM 21-305 for driving on unusual terrain. The information on unusual terrain listed in this work package is applicable to all models except where noted. The M915 and M915A1 are not designed or intended for off-road use. However, if the adverse conditions described in this work package are unavoidable, the recommended procedures given should be applied.
CAUTION
Do not use pusher axle during off-highway operations.
Failure to comply may result in decreased traction and possible damage to equipment.
NOTE
Perform step 1 for M917, M917P1, M919, M920, and
M920P1 vehicles having pusher axle.
When engaging the locking system, the driving axles will receive equal torque.
1.
Relieve air pressure load on pusher axle and raise pusher axle. This will increase traction by shifting weight to the driving axles.
2.
In areas where the ground surface provides poor traction, move differential
LOCK/UNLOCK lever to the LOCK position, refer to WP 0010.
3.
Use the differential LOCK/UNLOCK control as needed for better traction.
Disengage differential lockup when conditions return to normal. For instructions
on operating the inter-axle differential lockup system, refer to WP 0010.
END OF TASK
0018-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0018
WOODS AND ROCKY TERRAIN
1.
Ensure vehicle can clear ground obstructions such as stumps or rocks before driving over them. Objects can damage components underneath vehicle. Avoid hanging limbs which might cause damage.
NOTE
M915, M915A1, and M916 vehicles are equipped with a spare wheel and tire assembly. M917 through M920 vehicles are not equipped with a spare.
2.
When driving over rocky terrain, there will be a greater chance of tire punctures.
Ensure a spare wheel and tire assembly is available.
END OF TASK
MUD OR OTHER SOFT SURFACES
1.
Before entering mud or soft surfaces, check conditions and select the appropriate transmission gear to allow vehicle through the area. Enter the soft area at a medium speed for the gear you have selected.
2.
Maintain steady pressure on accelerator pedal to keep your vehicle rolling until solid ground is reached. Do not accelerate to the point of spinning the wheels.
3.
If vehicle becomes stuck, try to pull out slowly in a lower gear. If necessary, place boards, brush, or similar material under tires to provide traction.
NOTE
M916 and M920 vehicles are equipped with a winch.
Perform step 4 for self-recovery or to assist another stuck vehicle using winch.
4.
If vehicle is not coupled to a trailer, it may be possible to use the vehicle’s winch for self-recovery or to assist in pulling another stuck vehicle out. Attach winch cable to another vehicle or other stationary object that will not move under load when pulling on it.
END OF TASK
SAND
NOTE
If operating the M915 through M920 or M915A1 in sand, follow the guidelines in steps 1 through 4 below.
1.
Maintain steady, even movement with the transmission in low gear. Keep vehicle rolling without straining the engine and power train.
2.
If vehicle becomes stuck, adjust tire pressure to gain additional traction. Reduce pressure in the front tires to 50 psi (345 kPa) and reduce pressure in the rear tires to 45 psi (310 kPa). When vehicle is free, inflate all tires to normal pressure.
3.
If vehicle bogs down after reducing tire pressure, place boards, brush, canvas, or similar materials under and in front of tires to provide better traction.
0018-2
TM 9-2320-273-10 0018
SAND - CONTINUED
4.
If these efforts fail and operator cannot free vehicle under its own power, use another vehicle to assist in pulling out stuck vehicle or for M916 and M920, use winch for self-recovery or to assist in pulling another stuck vehicle out.
NOTE
If operating the M915 through M920 or M915A1 in sandy or dusty areas, follow the guidelines in steps 5 through 10 below.
5.
Ensure each tire has a valve cap.
6.
Check engine and transmission temperature and engine oil pressure gauges frequently.
7.
If vehicle overheats, stop vehicle, assess the problem, or notify your supervisor to have maintenance assess the problem.
8.
Clear engine oil level tube and transmission fluid level/filler tube before removing dipsticks to check fluids. Clean accumulations of sand and dirt from around fluid filler locations before checking or adding fluids.
9.
Clean spouts of fuel containers and areas around filler cap on fuel tank before adding fuel. Under extreme sandy or dusty conditions, filter fuel when filling tank.
10.
When parking vehicle overnight or for an extended period in sandy conditions, park so rear of vehicle faces toward the wind or cover the radiator and all window glass with canvas.
END OF TASK
SNOW AND ICE DRIVING
1.
Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the tires.
2.
Drive at slower speeds.
3.
Give signals sooner.
4.
Lightly pump brakes once or twice to give early warning of intention to stop.
This will also help to avoid skidding.
5.
Maintain at least double the normal distance from the vehicle ahead.
6.
Keep windshields, windows, mirrors, headlamps, stoplamps, and body lamps clean and free of snow and ice. Use defrosters and fans to help keep glass free of snow and ice.
7.
Descend moderate grades in the gear normally used to ascend the same grade. On steep or very slippery grades, lock differential, use at least one gear lower, and activate engine retarder system.
8.
After driving through slush or water, drive slowly and test the brakes. Continue driving slowly, maintaining moderate pressure on the service brake pedal to create a slight drag. Resume normal speed when brakes are dry and operating properly.
0018-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
SNOW AND ICE DRIVING - CONTINUED
0018
9.
If you come to a difficult stretch of road, stop and inspect it carefully before driving on it. Select the transmission gear most likely to allow vehicle over that stretch of road and lock differential.
10.
If tires start spinning, stop, back up, and try again. If necessary, rock out by locking the differential, shifting to forward gear and accelerating lightly. Shift into reverse when vehicle’s forward motion stops. Repeat alternate shifting and acceleration until vehicle can use the momentum to rock out of the slippery area.
Avoid spinning the tires and do not exceed 800–900 engine rpm.
END OF TASK
STOPPING
WARNING
Do not use engine retarder on slippery road surfaces. Using engine retarder on wet, icy, or snow covered roads may result in loss of vehicle control. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury to death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
Ease up on accelerator, leaving vehicle in gear already selected.
2.
Apply brakes evenly to slow vehicle, and gradually pump brakes to avoid skidding.
3.
Avoid sudden braking on slick roads which may cause vehicle to skid and trailer to jackknife.
END OF TASK
PARKING
1.
When parking vehicle on an icy, slushy, wet, or muddy surface, place boards, brush, or other material underneath tires to provide traction. This guards against tires freezing to the ground or becoming pocketed in ice, and provides traction when vehicle is started and moving again.
2.
Block tires and leave transmission control lever in neutral (N) rather than setting parking brake.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0018-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
FORDING OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
BEFORE FORDING
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
Before fording with the vehicle, check bottom surface condition of the water body. Ensure bottom surface is hard enough to ford without exceeding the maximum fording depth of 20 inches (51 cm). If the bottom surface is too soft, do not attempt fording. Ford to the maximum depth for short periods or short distances only.
2.
Ensure engine is operating properly before entering water.
3.
Lubricate unpainted surfaces properly before entering water.
0019-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
BEFORE FORDING - CONTINUED
4.
Engage driveline locking system. Move inter-axle differential control
(Figure 1, Item 2) to the LOCK position. For instructions on operating the
inter-axle differential lockup system, refer to WP 0010.
0019
1
2
3
Figure 1. Fording.
END OF TASK
DURING FORDING
1.
Put transmission selector lever (Figure 1, Item 1) in a low gear range.
2.
Enter water slowly.
3.
Observe speedometer (Figure 1, Item 3) and ford at speeds of no more than
3–4 mph (5–6 kph).
4.
When vehicle emerges from water, apply brakes repeatedly to dry brake linings.
Ensure brakes are working properly before driving vehicle at normal speeds.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10 0019
AFTER FORDING
NOTE
All models can ford up to 20 in. (51 cm) for five minutes without maintenance for vehicle to continue operation.
1.
During fording, water may enter vehicle or its components and contaminate the fluid systems. Ensure any accumulated water is removed from vehicle before it causes damage to systems, surfaces, or equipment.
2.
As soon as possible after fording, check vehicle using the following guidelines: a.
Let the engine run for sufficient time to drive out any accumulated water.
b.
Drain or dry areas on vehicle where water has accumulated.
c.
Check each fluid system in vehicle for evidence of water contamination. If water is found in one or more fluid systems, notify your supervisor to drain, flush, and refill the contaminated system.
d.
Notify your supervisor of any necessary service or repairs before returning
vehicle to normal use, refer to After Fording in WP 0034.
e.
Notify your supervisor if lubrication is needed after fording is complete,
refer to Lubrication Instructions in WP 0035.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0019-3/4 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
SPRING BRAKE POWER SPRING OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools
Adjustable wrench, 12 in.
Equipment Condition
WARNING
Chock wheels to keep vehicle from moving before brakes are released. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
GENERAL
NOTE
M915A1 vehicles equipped with anti-lock brake system
(ABS) have spring brake chambers added to rear-rear axle brakes.
In the event of an air system pressure loss, the spring brake chambers on the forward-rear axle will apply the forward-rear axle brakes on the M915A1. On M915 through M920 vehicles, the spring brake chambers on the forward-rear axle and rear-rear axle will apply the forward-rear axle and rear-rear axle brakes. If the vehicle must be moved and there is not enough air system pressure to compress the power spring in the spring brake chambers and release the brakes, you must do this manually.
0020-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0020
MANUALLY COMPRESSING SPRING BRAKE POWER SPRING
1.
Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 3), washer (Figure 1, Item 2), and release stud
(Figure 1, Item 1) from stowage pocket (Figure 1, Item 7) of failed spring chamber (Figure 1, Item 6).
2.
Remove dust cover (Figure 1, Item 4) from spring chamber (Figure 1, Item 6).
3.
Insert cross-pin end of release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) into opening under dust cover (Figure 1, Item 4) on spring chamber (Figure 1, Item 6).
4.
After release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) has been inserted far enough to engage pressure plate (Figure 1, Item 5), turn release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) ¼ turn to lock cross-pin end of release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) into pressure plate
(Figure 1, Item 5).
5.
Install washer (Figure 1, Item 2) and nut (Figure 1, Item 3) on release stud
(Figure 1, Item 1).
NOTE
Chock wheels to prevent vehicle from moving before brakes are released. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Observe that push rod retracts while tightening nut. This indicates pressure plate has been properly engaged.
6.
Tighten nut (Figure 1, Item 3) until 2.5–2.75 in. (6.4–7 cm) of release stud
(Figure 1, Item 1) remains visible above nut (Figure 1, Item 3). Spring brake is then fully engaged.
1
2
END OF TASK
7
6
5
4
2
3
Figure 1. Spring Brake Power Spring.
1
3
TM 9-2320-273-10 0020
MANUALLY RELEASING SPRING BRAKE POWER SPRING
NOTE
If power springs have been manually compressed, perform steps 1 through 4 to release them before returning vehicle to service.
1.
Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 3) and washer (Figure 1, Item 2) from release stud
(Figure 1, Item 1).
2.
Disengage cross-pin end of release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) from pressure plate
(Figure 1, Item 5) and remove release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) from spring chamber (Figure 1, Item 6).
3.
Install dust cover (Figure 1, Item 4) on spring chamber (Figure 1, Item 6).
4.
Install release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) in stowage pocket (Figure 1, Item 7) with washer (Figure 1, Item 2) and nut (Figure 1, Item 3).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0020-3/4 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
TOWING VEHICLE
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools
Personnel Required
Two
References
FM 20-22
FM 21-305
CAUTION
If the M915 or M915A1 must be towed with rear wheels on the ground, the transmission-to-rear axle prop shaft must be removed. Failure to comply may result in serious damage to automatic transmission and rear tandem axle differentials.
If the M916 through M920 vehicles must be towed with front wheels on the ground, the transmission-to-front axle prop shaft must be removed. Failure to comply may result in serious damage to automatic transmission and front axle differential.
NOTE
For cross-country towing, all tires should be on the ground.
GENERAL
Refer to FM 21-305 for general guidelines on vehicle recovery and use of warning kits and signals. FM 21-305, FM 20-22, and the following procedures provide instructions for towing.
PREPARATION FOR TOWING
M915 AND M915A1
1.
If possible, tow with rear wheels suspended. This eliminates the need for removal of prop shaft or axle shafts.
2.
If vehicle must be towed with rear wheels on the ground, set inter-axle differential
control to the UNLOCK position (WP 0010) and notify your supervisor to remove
transmission and forward-rear axle prop shaft at universal joints. After removal of prop shaft, secure prop shaft to truck undercarriage.
3.
If prop shaft cannot be removed, notify your supervisor to remove all four axle shafts from two rear axle assemblies. Secure axle shafts to vehicle to prevent damage.
0021-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0021
M916 THROUGH M920
1.
If possible, tow with rear wheels suspended. This eliminates need for removal of rear prop shaft or axle shafts.
2.
If vehicle must be towed with rear wheels on ground, set inter-axle differential
control to UNLOCK position (WP 0010) and notify your supervisor to remove the
transmission and forward-rear axle prop shaft at universal joints and front axle prop shaft at universal joint. After removal of prop shafts, secure prop shafts to vehicle undercarriage.
3.
If prop shafts cannot be removed, notify your supervisor to remove all four axle shafts from two rear axle assemblies and two front axle shafts from front axle.
Secure axle shafts to vehicle to prevent damage.
END OF TASK
USE OF TOW BAR
NOTE
Vehicle may be towed short distances (half mile to a maximum of 10 miles), at low speeds without removing prop shafts or axle shafts. Engine must be running at idle to turn transmission oil pump.
Ensure towing device is long enough to allow for complete turning radius.
Towing vehicle speed with prop or axle shafts removed should be restricted to a maximum of 15 mph (24 kph) on primary roads and 8 mph (13 kph) on secondary roads.
1.
Install medium duty tow bar (NSN 2540-01-267-2912) on pintle of towing vehicle and towing eyes of towed vehicle.
NOTE
Quick disconnect couplings are provided in the bumper for air brake operation.
2.
Connect air pressure hoses between towed vehicle and towing vehicle for air brake operation.
3.
Place transmission control lever in neutral (N).
4.
Release parking brakes.
5.
Turn on appropriate lights.
0021-2
USE OF TOW BAR - CONTINUED
TM 9-2320-273-10 0021
Figure 1. Air Pressure Hose Connections.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 3
TROUBLESHOOTING MASTER INDEX
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
TROUBLESHOOTING MASTER INDEX
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Symptom Page
AIR CONDITIONING (M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1)
AIR SYSTEM AND BRAKES
Air system loses pressure during tractor operation or low air pressure
warning lamp and buzzer come on during tractor operation ......................... WP 0023-10
Low pressure in air system
(low air pressure warning lamp and buzzer are on) .........................................WP 0023-9
Trailer brakes will not apply when brake pedal is used or hand control
DRIVELINE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
Driveline will not disengage (indicator lamp stays on) when differential
LOCK/UNLOCK is moved to UNLOCK position .........................................WP 0023-11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ENGINE
Engine cranks but does not start below 32° F (0° C) ......................................WP 0023-3
Engine does not crank when starter switch is activated ...................................WP 0023-2
Engine starts but misfires or runs rough after proper warmup period .............WP 0023-3
Excessive exhaust smoke after engine reaches normal operating temperature of 160–185° F (71–85° C) for M915 through M920 or
0022-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES - CONTINUED
Symptom
0022
Page
PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, and M920)
POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) (M916 THROUGH M920)
PTO indicator light stays on even though the PTO control knob is pushed
SLIDING FIFTH WHEEL AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (M915A1)
Fifth wheel cannot be locked in desired position when LOCK/UNLOCK
control is moved to LOCK position (tractor coupled to trailer) ....................WP 0023-12
Fifth wheel cannot be unlocked from previous position when control is
STEERING
TRANSMISSION
Transmission fluid temperature gauge indicates overheating ...........................WP 0023-8
WINCH (M916 AND M920)
WHEELS AND TIRES
Vehicle wanders or pulls to one side on level pavement ...............................WP 0023-17
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0022-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 4
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
References
DA Form 2404
DA Form 5988-E
DA Form 5504
References - Continued
INTRODUCTION
This work package contains operator level troubleshooting procedures for correcting unsatisfactory operation and basic equipment malfunctions.
Each troubleshooting procedure lists a fault symptom describing a specific problem.
Under each symptom is a list of possible malfunctions in the order of probability that may be the cause of the problem. Finally, a corrective action is provided for each malfunction followed by a work package or TM reference or instruction to notify supervisor to correct the problem.
Prior to performing any troubleshooting procedure, the following recommendations must be observed.
NOTE
This manual cannot list all possible malfunctions that may occur. If the symptom for a particular problem or malfunction is not listed in this work package, notify your supervisor.
1.
Isolate component where malfunction occurs by finding the symptom that most accurately describes the problem.
2.
Perform troubleshooting procedure in the order in which steps are listed.
3.
Consider the possibility that the problem could be simple in origin and may require only minor adjustment; use common sense.
4.
If a problem cannot be corrected after performing all corrective actions listed for a given symptom, notify supervisor.
5.
If the corrective action is not authorized at the operator level, operators must provide a brief written description of the problem using Equipment Inspection and
Maintenance Worksheet, DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E, and Maintenance
Request Form, DA Form 5504.
0023-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
ENGINE
WARNING
Hearing protection is required for personnel when engine is running for an extended period of time and personnel are close to vehicle. Noise levels produced by vehicle may exceed 85 dB. Long-term exposure to this noise level may cause hearing loss. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
If corrective action does not correct malfunction, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Engine does not crank when starter switch is activated.
MALFUNCTION
Engine run switch is not in ON position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Move engine run switch to ON position.
MALFUNCTION
Transmission range selector is not in neutral position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Move transmission range selector lever to neutral (N) position.
MALFUNCTION
Loose battery cables or terminals.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Tighten loose connections and clean dirty cables. If cables are broken, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Engine cranks but does not start.
MALFUNCTION
Empty fuel tank or fuel system malfunction.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
ENGINE - CONTINUED
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Visually check for fuel system leaks before completely filling fuel tank.
2. When fuel tank is completely drained and then refilled, the fuel system must be bled. If fuel system needs to be bled, notify supervisor.
3. Check fuel gauge (WP 0005). Fill fuel tank, as required.
4. Check air filter restriction gauge. If gauge indicates restriction (red instead of green), notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Engine cranks but does not start below 32° F (0° C).
MALFUNCTION
Ether starting aid is not being used correctly.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Follow proper cold weather starting procedures using ether starting aid
SYMPTOM
Engine starts but misfires or runs rough after proper warmup period.
MALFUNCTION
Restricted air filter.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check air filter restriction gauge. If gauge indicates restriction (red instead of green), notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Engine does not idle properly.
MALFUNCTION
Restricted air filter.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check air filter restriction gauge. If gauge indicates restriction (red instead of green), notify supervisor.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
ENGINE - CONTINUED
MALFUNCTION
Ether starting aid is not being used correctly.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Follow proper cold weather starting procedures using ether starting aid
SYMPTOM
Engine temperature exceeds 210° F (99° C).
MALFUNCTION
Radiator coolant level is low, cooling system leaking, clogged radiator fins, engine drive belts loose or missing, engine oil level is low, or transmission fluid level is low.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
WARNING
Hot coolant is under pressure. Be careful when removing coolant filler cap or inspecting cooling system. Engine cooling system is under pressure and may cause severe injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap in two steps. First, place a thick cloth over the cap and slowly rotate cap left to its first stop, pause, and let pressure escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap further left until you can remove it. Failure to comply may result in serious burns. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1. Check coolant level in radiator sight glass. Add coolant to fill radiator to
2. Check for leaks in coolant system. If any coolant leaks are found, notify supervisor.
3. Check radiator fins are free of mud, ice, snow, or debris. Remove any material clogging radiator fins. Shine flashlight through engine side and note light at radiator. Check cooling fins are not bent or clogged. Notify supervisor to straighten bent fins.
4. Check for loose, cracked, worn, or missing fan drive belts. If belt is loose, cracked, worn, or missing, notify supervisor.
5. Check engine oil is at proper level on dipstick. Add engine oil if
6. Check transmission fluid is at proper level on dipstick. Add transmission
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
ENGINE - CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Engine lacks power.
MALFUNCTION
Restricted air filter.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check air filter restriction gauge. If gauge indicates restriction (red instead of green), notify supervisor.
2. Check to make sure PTO is disengaged. Disengage PTO.
SYMPTOM
Low or no engine oil pressure.
MALFUNCTION
Low oil level.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check engine oil is at proper level on dipstick. Add engine oil (WP 0035) if
necessary. If no or low oil pressure is still present, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Excessive engine oil consumption.
MALFUNCTION
Engine oil leaks.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check engine for loose oil lines or oil leaks. If any leaks are found, notify supervisor.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
ENGINE - CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Excessive exhaust smoke after engine reaches normal operating temperature of
160–185° F (71–85° C) for M915 through M920 or 180–200° F (82–93° C) for
M915A1.
MALFUNCTION
Restricted air filter, contaminated fuel, or engine malfunction.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check air filter restriction gauge. If gauge indicates restriction (red instead of green), notify supervisor.
2. Open fuel tank filler cap and check for obvious fuel contamination. If fuel is contaminated, notify supervisor.
3. Check for smell of unburned fuel in or around engine cab area. If smell of unburned fuel is present, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Engine retarder does not reduce tractor speed.
MALFUNCTION
Engine retarder is not being operated correctly.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check engine retarder is engaged. Press down on engine retarder foot pedal and take foot completely off of accelerator pedal. If operating retarder control correctly but retarder system is not slowing vehicle, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Excessive exhaust noise or fumes in or near cab.
MALFUNCTION
Faulty exhaust system components.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
ENGINE - CONTINUED
CORRECTIVE ACTION
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless, deadly poison which, when breathed, deprives the body of oxygen and causes suffocation. Exposure to air containing carbon monoxide produces symptoms of headache, dizziness, loss of muscular control, apparent drowsiness, and coma. Permanent brain damage or death to personnel may result from severe exposure. Carbon monoxide occurs in exhaust fumes of internal combustion engines.
Carbon monoxide may become dangerously concentrated
observed to ensure safety of personnel.
1. Check exhaust manifold, pipes, flex tubes, muffler and stack for leaks and rusted through areas with engine running. If any leaks are found, notify supervisor that rusted leaking parts require replacement.
2. Check exhaust system clamps for leakage with engine running. If any leaks are found, notify supervisor that clamps require tightening or replacement.
END OF TASK
TRANSMISSION
SYMPTOM
Foamy fluid on transmission dipstick.
MALFUNCTION
Transmission oil level is low or transmission requires service.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
Perform corrective action 1 for M915 through M920 vehicles. Perform corrective action 2 for M915A1.
1. Check level on dipstick with engine off and vehicle on level ground. If fluid level is above FULL mark on dipstick, notify supervisor.
2. Check level on dipstick with engine at idle and vehicle on level ground.
If transmission is 100–250° F (38–121° C) and fluid level is above HOT
RUN band, or if temperature is below 100° F (38° C) and fluid level is below COLD RUN band, notify supervisor.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
TRANSMISSION - CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Slow or erratic transmission engagement.
MALFUNCTION
Transmission oil level is low.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
Perform corrective action 1 for M915 through M920 vehicles. Perform corrective action 2 for M915A1.
1. Check level on dipstick with engine off and vehicle on level ground. If fluid is low, add fluid as necessary to maintain proper level. If fluid is sufficient, notify supervisor.
2. Check level on dipstick with engine at idle and vehicle on level ground.
If transmission is 100–250° F (38–121° C) and fluid level is above HOT
RUN band, or if temperature is below 100° F (38° C) and fluid level is below COLD RUN band, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Transmission fluid temperature gauge indicates overheating.
MALFUNCTION
Transmission oil level is low or transmission requires service.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check level on dipstick with engine off on M915 through M920 or with engine at idle on M915A1 and vehicle on level ground. Check dipstick for evidence of foamy fluid. If transmission is 100–250° F (38–121° C) and fluid level is above HOT RUN band, or if temperature is below
100° F (38° C) and fluid level is below COLD RUN band, notify supervisor.
2. Check dipstick for evidence of discoloration that could indicate water/antifreeze in fluid. If there is discoloration of fluid, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Fluid leaking from transmission breather.
MALFUNCTION
Transmission oil level is low or transmission requires service.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
TRANSMISSION - CONTINUED
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check level on dipstick with engine at idle and vehicle on level ground. If transmission is 100–250° F (38–121° C) and fluid level is above HOT RUN band, or if temperature is below 100° F (38° C) and fluid level is below
COLD RUN band, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
AIR SYSTEM AND BRAKES
SYMPTOM
Low pressure in air system (low air pressure warning lamp and buzzer are on).
MALFUNCTION
Leak in air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check all reservoir drains are closed. Close any open reservoir drains.
2. If tractor is not coupled to trailer, check trailer air supply control is pulled out (OFF). Pull air supply control out (OFF).
3. Check for possible air leaks at air reservoirs, hoses, fittings, and at inter-vehicular air hose connections. If any leaks are found, notify supervisor.
4. If tractor is coupled to trailer, and your test and inspections of tractor do not reveal any trouble with tractor, troubleshoot trailer. If tests, inspections, and corrective actions for both tractor and trailer do not resolve low air pressure problem, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Trailer brakes will not apply when brake pedal is used or hand control on steering column is used.
MALFUNCTION
Inter-vehicular air hoses are not securely connected or trailer has air system leak.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check both inter-vehicular air hoses are connected securely between tractor
and trailer (WP 0012). Connect air hoses securely to trailer. Charge trailer
air system by pushing in (ON) trailer air supply control. If trouble continues, notify supervisor.
TM 9-2320-273-10
AIR SYSTEM AND BRAKES - CONTINUED
0023
SYMPTOM
Air system loses pressure during tractor operation or low air pressure warning lamp and buzzer come on during tractor operation.
MALFUNCTION
Leak in vehicle air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check trailer air supply control is pulled out (OFF).
2. Operate engine until warning lamp and buzzer go off and release parking brake.
3. Stop engine and note reservoir pressure.
4. Fully depress and hold service brakes for 2 minutes.
5. Check for leaks. Reservoir pressure loss should not exceed 5 psi in
2 minutes. Close any open reservoir drains. Check trailer air supply control is pulled out (OFF). If any leaks are found, notify supervisor.
6. If pressure loss does not exceed 5 psi in 2 minutes, check trailer air system in the next malfunction.
MALFUNCTION
Leak in trailer air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Push trailer supply control in (ON) to charge trailer air reservoirs.
2. Operate engine until warning lamp and buzzer go off, then release parking brake.
3. Stop engine and note reservoir pressure.
4. Fully depress and hold service brakes for 2 minutes.
5. Check for leaks. Reservoir pressure loss should not exceed 5 psi in
2 minutes. Note any trailer air leaks. If reservoir pressure loss exceeds
5 psi in 2 minutes, notify supervisor to troubleshoot trailer.
SYMPTOM
Trailer brakes will not release.
MALFUNCTION
Trailer brake control is in ON position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check trailer brake control is in OFF position. Move control to OFF position
TM 9-2320-273-10
AIR SYSTEM AND BRAKES - CONTINUED
0023
MALFUNCTION
Trailer air supply control is not pushed in (ON).
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check trailer air supply control is pushed in (charging position). Push in air
MALFUNCTION
Inter-vehicular air hoses are not securely connected between tractor and trailer.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check both inter-vehicular air hoses are connected securely between tractor
and trailer (WP 0012). Connect hoses securely (WP 0012).
MALFUNCTION
Leaks in air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for obvious leaks in tractor air system. If any leaks are found, notify supervisor. If no leaks are found, notify supervisor to troubleshoot trailer.
END OF TASK
DRIVELINE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
Driveline will not disengage (indicator lamp stays on) when differential
LOCK/UNLOCK is moved to UNLOCK position.
MALFUNCTION
Driveline has not had enough time to disengage since activated or excessive driveline wind up has occurred.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check system has been unlocked long enough for system to disengage.
Put LOCK/UNLOCK control in UNLOCK position and wait for lamp to
2. If LOCK indicator lamp stays on, excessive driveline wind up may have occurred. Back up slowly and check if LOCK indicator lamp goes off. If indicator lamp stays on, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10
SLIDING FIFTH WHEEL AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (M915A1)
0023
SYMPTOM
Fifth wheel cannot be locked in desired position when LOCK/UNLOCK control is moved to LOCK position (tractor coupled to trailer).
MALFUNCTION
Obstructions between fifth wheel plate and slide track rack.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for obstructions between fifth wheel plate and slide track rack. Clean or remove objects from area as necessary and check again.
MALFUNCTION
Air cylinder has not had sufficient time to engage.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check air cylinder has sufficient time to engage. Leave LOCK/UNLOCK
control in LOCK position, wait for 10 seconds, and check again (WP 0005).
MALFUNCTION
Fifth wheel hung up between segments of slide track rack.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Move LOCK/UNLOCK control to UNLOCK position, apply trailer brake hand control, and place gear range selector in (1) or (R). Move tractor slowly forward or backward an inch or two, stop and shift range selector to
NEUTRAL (N). Check fifth wheel is now locked. Release trailer brake hand control.
MALFUNCTION
Air leak in fifth wheel air control system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
If fifth wheel will not lock in position, check air line connections at cab mounted control and at air cylinder under fifth wheel plate. Check for sound of escaping air and loose fitting connections. If any leaks are found in air system connections at control or air cylinder, notify supervisor.
TM 9-2320-273-10
SLIDING FIFTH WHEEL AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (M915A1) - CONTINUED
0023
SYMPTOM
Fifth wheel cannot be unlocked from previous position when control is moved to
UNLOCK position.
MALFUNCTION
Obstructions between fifth wheel plate and slide track rack.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for obstructions between fifth wheel plate and slide track rack. Clean or remove objects from area as necessary and check whether fifth wheel position can be adjusted.
MALFUNCTION
Air cylinder has not had sufficient time to disengage.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check air cylinder has sufficient time to disengage. Leave LOCK/UNLOCK
control in LOCK position, wait for 10 seconds, and check again (WP 0005).
MALFUNCTION
Fifth wheel hung up between segments of slide track rack.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Move LOCK/UNLOCK control to UNLOCK position, apply trailer brake hand control, and place gear range selector in (1) or (R). Move tractor slowly forward or backward an inch or two, stop and shift range selector to
NEUTRAL (N). Check fifth wheel is now locked. Release trailer brake hand control.
MALFUNCTION
Air leak in fifth wheel air control system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
If fifth wheel will not lock in position, check air line connections at cab mounted control and at air cylinder under fifth wheel plate. Check for sound of escaping air and loose fitting connections. If any leaks are found in air system connections at control or air cylinder, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
One or more electrical systems not working.
MALFUNCTION
Switch(es) are not in the ON position or inter-vehicular cable is not securely connected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check appropriate switch(es) are in ON position and, if a lamp system, that blackout switch is in NORMAL position. If tractor is coupled to trailer and problem is with trailer lamp system, ensure inter-vehicular cable is connected securely between tractor and trailer. Turn appropriate switch(es) in
ON position. If necessary, securely connect inter-vehicular cable.
MALFUNCTION
Resettable circuit breakers have tripped (M915A1).
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
M915A1 is equipped with resettable circuit breakers.
1. Check resettable circuit breakers have not popped out, indicating a momentary overload or short circuit. Open access panel and push in to reset any circuit breakers which have popped out.
2. Recheck failing electrical system. If resetting fails to correct problem or breaker button pops out again, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
STEERING
SYMPTOM
Hard steering, shimmy, or wandering.
MALFUNCTION
Incorrect tire air pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check cold air pressure in all tires. Fill as required. Refer to Tire Pressure in
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
STEERING - CONTINUED
MALFUNCTION
Loose lug nuts.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for loose lug nuts. Tighten lug nuts, and notify supervisor to have lug nuts tightened to specified torque value.
MALFUNCTION
Worn, loose or damaged suspension parts, steering parts, wheels, or vehicle frame.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check front axle and suspension for worn, loose, or damaged parts. Check steering linkage, wheels, and front tractor frame. If any parts are loose or damaged, notify supervisor.
MALFUNCTION
Loose or damaged shock absorbers (M915 and M915A1).
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
M915 and M915A1 are equipped with front shock absorbers.
Check for loose or damaged shock absorbers. If shocks are loose or damaged, notify supervisor.
MALFUNCTION
Power steering fluid level is low.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check power steering fluid reservoir for proper fluid level (WP 0025). Add
SYMPTOM
Vehicle steering slow to respond or intermittent.
MALFUNCTION
Power steering fluid level is low.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Fill power steering reservoir to proper level and check for leaks (WP 0035).
If leak(s) are found, notify supervisor.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0023
STEERING - CONTINUED
MALFUNCTION
Power steering malfunction.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for proper power steering operation. With tractor standing still, turn wheels from stop to stop and hold against stop for 5 seconds. Repeat several times. If steering problem continues, notify supervisor.
MALFUNCTION
Loose lug nuts and loose or damaged suspension components.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for loose lug nuts and loose or damaged suspension components.
Tighten lug nuts and notify supervisor that lug nuts need to be tightened to specified torque value. If any parts are loose or damaged, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
WHEELS AND TIRES
SYMPTOM
Wheel vibrates or wobbles.
MALFUNCTION
Loose or missing lug nuts.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check wheels for loose or missing lug nuts. Tighten loose lug nuts and notify supervisor that lug nuts need to be tightened to specified torque value.
If any lug nut or stud is broken or missing, notify supervisor.
MALFUNCTION
Bent wheel.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check that wheel is not bent. If wheel is bent, change wheel and tire assembly. Notify supervisor that a replacement wheel is needed.
MALFUNCTION
Loose, worn, or damaged suspension components.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check suspension for loose, worn, or damaged components. If any components are damaged, notify supervisor.
TM 9-2320-273-10
WHEELS AND TIRES - CONTINUED
0023
SYMPTOM
Vehicle wanders or pulls to one side on level pavement.
MALFUNCTION
Incorrect tire air pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
Check air pressure when tires are cold.
Check air pressure in all tires. Fill as required. Refer to Tire Pressure in
MALFUNCTION
Improper tire size or type.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check that all tires are proper size and type. If tires are not properly matched and if more than one tire is involved, notify supervisor. If only one tire is improper and spare tire is of correct size and type, replace improper wheel and tire assembly with spare, and notify supervisor that a replacement is needed.
MALFUNCTION
Loose, worn, or damaged steering or suspension components.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check steering and suspension for loose, worn, or damaged components. If any components are damaged, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Excessive or uneven tire wear.
MALFUNCTION
Incorrect tire air pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check cold air pressure in all tires. Inflate or deflate tires to proper tire
pressure. Refer to Tire Pressure in WP 0003 for proper pressures.
TM 9-2320-273-10
WHEELS AND TIRES - CONTINUED
0023
MALFUNCTION
Bent wheel.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check that wheel is not bent. If wheel is bent, change wheel and tire assembly. Notify supervisor that a replacement wheel is needed.
MALFUNCTION
Loose wheel, worn, loose, or damaged suspension components.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Tighten loose lug nuts and notify supervisor that lug nuts need to be tightened to specified torque value. If any suspension parts are loose or damaged, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920)
SYMPTOM
Pusher axle will not come up.
MALFUNCTION
Low air system pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that air system pressure is sufficient (low pressure warning light and buzzer are both off). Let air pressure build up until warning light and buzzer go off.
MALFUNCTION
Raise/lower control in incorrect position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that raise/lower control is at the AXLE LIFT position.
Move pusher axle raise/lower controls to proper position for raising axle.
MALFUNCTION
Leaks in air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for air leaks in the area of hoses and check for cracks or holes in the air bags. If any air leaks in hoses or cracks or holes in air bags are found, notify supervisor.
TM 9-2320-273-10
PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920) - CONTINUED
0023
SYMPTOM
Pusher axle will not go down.
MALFUNCTION
Low air system pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that air system pressure is sufficient (low pressure warning light and buzzer are both off). Let air pressure build up until warning light and buzzer go off.
MALFUNCTION
Raise/lower control in incorrect position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that raise/lower control is set at the AXLE DOWN position. Set raise/lower control to AXLE DOWN position.
MALFUNCTION
Leaks in air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for air leaks in the area of hoses and check for cracks or holes in the air bags. If any air leaks in hoses or cracks or holes in air bags are found, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Pusher axle will not maintain load reaction.
MALFUNCTION
Low air system pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that air system pressure is sufficient (low pressure warning light and buzzer are both off). Let air pressure build up until warning light and buzzer go off.
MALFUNCTION
Air control pressure adjuster is in incorrect position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that air control pressure adjuster is turned fully to the right. Turn air control pressure adjuster fully to the right.
TM 9-2320-273-10
PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920) - CONTINUED
0023
MALFUNCTION
Leaks in air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for air leaks in the area of hoses and check for cracks or holes in the air bags. If any air leaks in hoses or cracks or holes in air bags are found, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) (M916 THROUGH M920)
SYMPTOM
PTO does not engage.
MALFUNCTION
PTO control is in incorrect position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check that cable is connected to the PTO. It may become loose from road vibrations
2. Check that PTO control is in ENGAGE position and bring engine rpm above 1100 rpm.
3. Move PTO control to ENGAGE position. If PTO still does not engage, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
PTO indicator light stays on even though the PTO control knob is pushed completely in.
MALFUNCTION
Throttle control is in incorrect position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check the throttle control on the winch control console to determine that it has been pushed down. Push the winch throttle control all the way down.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10
WINCH (M916 AND M920)
SYMPTOM
Winch drum will not operate.
MALFUNCTION
PTO not engaged, engine not at maximum rpm, or low oil level.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
0023
WARNING
Do not remove fill cap when hydraulic oil is hot. The hydraulic tank is pressurized to 5 psi (35 kPa). Remove fill cap slowly. Failure to comply may result is severe injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1. Check position of PTO and engine throttle controls. Ensure PTO control is engaged and engine throttle on winch control console is pulled out for maximum rpm.
2. Check hydraulic fluid level. Add fluid to reservoir if necessary. If winch will not operate properly, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Winch unusually noisy when operating.
MALFUNCTION
Winch cable is twisted, tangled, or causing drum to bind.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
WARNING
Always wear heavy gloves when handling the winch wire rope. Never allow the cable to run through your hands as broken wires can cause painful injuries. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Check to make sure that cable is not twisted, tangled, or causing drum to bind. Pay out or reel in cable as necessary to straighten it. If winch is still unusually noisy when operating, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10
AIR CONDITIONING (M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1)
0023
SYMPTOM
A/C unit does not function.
MALFUNCTION
Faulty switch or circuit breaker.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Verify A/C ON/OFF switch is in ON position. Position switch in ON position.
2. Verify circuit breaker on evaporator assembly is not tripped. Reset circuit breaker.
3. Notify supervisor to troubleshoot A/C ON/OFF switch or circuit breaker.
SYMPTOM
A/C unit not producing cool air.
MALFUNCTION
Faulty switch or loose wiring connection.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Verify A/C ON/OFF switch is in ON position. Position switch in ON position.
2. Verify circuit breaker on evaporator assembly is not tripped. Reset circuit breaker.
3. Notify supervisor to troubleshoot A/C ON/OFF switch or circuit breaker.
MALFUNCTION
Evaporator filter dirty or obstructed.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Inspect evaporator assembly filter. Replace filter if dirty or obstructed
2. If filter is not obstructed, notify supervisor to troubleshoot A/C system.
TM 9-2320-273-10
AIR CONDITIONING (M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, AND M920P1) -
CONTINUED
0023
SYMPTOM
Compressor noise or vibration.
MALFUNCTION
Compressor or drive belt loose.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Set A/C ON/OFF switch to OFF position (WP 0005).
2. Turn engine run switch to OFF position.
3. Check for loose drive belt. If drive belt is loose, notify supervisor.
4. Check compressor for loose or missing bolts. If bolts are loose or missing, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 5
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) INTRODUCTION
GENERAL
PMCS are required to keep the equipment in good operating condition. Operator level
PMCS is performed before, during, and after operation to ensure the equipment is fully operational and ready at all times. Failure to perform PMCS as required may result in major damage or a failure which could compromise the mission or cause injury to personnel. Operators will perform PMCS as follows:
Ensure operator PMCS is performed each time vehicle is operated.
When equipment is operated for the first time or has not been operated for a three month period, notify Field Maintenance to perform PMCS inspection.
Observe all warnings, cautions, and notes when performing PMCS.
Always perform PMCS in the same order as written. With practice, this enables operators to become familiar with the equipment and quickly identify anything wrong with the equipment.
Before operating vehicle, perform all “Before” PMCS steps.
During operation of vehicle, perform all “During” PMCS steps.
After operating vehicle, perform all “After” PMCS steps.
Weekly, perform all “weekly” PMCS steps.
Monthly, perform all “monthly” PMCS steps.
At any PMCS interval, if the item checked or serviced is found not ready or available, the problem must be corrected by troubleshooting and, if necessary, by notifying Field
Maintenance to perform the task.
When equipment is found to be not ready or available and the problem cannot be resolved at operator level, describe what is wrong with the equipment using DA Form
5988-E. This documents the problem and helps Field Maintenance locate and correct it.
For information on how to use this form, see DA PAM 750-8.
0024-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0024
PURPOSE OF PMCS TABLE
The purpose of the PMCS table is to provide a systematic method of inspection and servicing of equipment. In this way, small defects can be detected early and corrected before they become major problems causing equipment failure. The PMCS table is arranged with the individual PMCS procedures listed in sequence under assigned intervals. The most logical time (before, during, and after operation) to perform each procedure determines the interval to which it is assigned. Make a habit of performing the checks in the same order each time; anything wrong will be identified quickly.
Refer to WP 0025 for Operator PMCS.
The following is a list and description of the column headings in the PMCS table.
Item Number - This column shows the sequence in which the checks and services are to be performed and is used to identify equipment area on the Equipment
Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet, DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E.
Interval - This column indicates when each check is to be performed.
Item to be Checked or Serviced - This column identifies the item and location to be checked by part, component, or assembly name.
Procedure - This column explains what type of service, specific damage, or defect is to be checked.
Equipment Not Ready/Available If: - This column lists conditions that make the equipment unavailable for use as a result of damage, missing parts, or improper functioning that presents a safety hazard. Do not accept or operate equipment with a condition noted in this column.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC) (PMCS)
Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) is a continuing concern. It is important that any corrosion problems with this equipment be reported so improvements can be made and future problems eliminated.
Corrosion is typically associated with rusting of metals or galvanic corrosion, which produces a white powder. This category of corrosion also includes deterioration of other materials such as rubber and plastic. Unusual cracking, softening, swelling, or breaking of materials may be the result of corrosion. If a corrosion problem is identified, it can be reported using SF 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report. Use of key words such as “corrosion,” “rust,” “deterioration,” or “cracking” ensure the information is identified as a CPC problem. Submit the form to the address specified in
DA PAM 750-8.
0024-2
TM 9-2320-273-10 0024
FLUID LEAKAGE
It is necessary for you to know how fluid leakage affects the status of the M915 through M920 and M915A1 vehicles. Following are types/classes of leakage you need to know to be able to determine the status of the M915 through M920 and M915A1 vehicles. Learn these leakage definitions and remember - when in doubt, notify your supervisor. Equipment operation is allowed with minor leakage (Class I or II).
Consideration must be given to fluid capacity in the item/system being checked/inspected. When in doubt, notify your supervisor.
When operating with Class I or II leaks, continue to check fluid levels as required in the PMCS.
Class III leaks should be reported immediately to your supervisor.
(1) Class I Seepage of fluid (as indicated by wetness or discoloration) not great enough to form drops.
(2) Class II Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops, but not enough to cause drops to drip from item being checked/inspected.
(3) Class III Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops that fall from item being checked/inspected.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
The Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services Work Package (WP 0025) includes
inspection and service procedures that must be performed to maintain the vehicle in good operating condition.
TROUBLE SPOTS
Check bolts, nuts, and screws. If loose, tighten. If bent, broken, or missing, notify your supervisor.
Check painted surfaces. If paint is loose or chipped, or rust is observed on bare metal surfaces, notify your supervisor.
Check welds. If cracked or broken, notify your supervisor.
Check electrical wiring. If connection is loose, tighten. If insulation is cracked or broken, wires are bare, or connections are broken, notify your supervisor.
Check hoses and fluid lines. Ensure clamps and fittings are tight. If hoses or lines are worn, damaged, or leaking, notify your supervisor. Refer to Class Leakage Definitions for information about leaks.
0024-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS
0024
WARNING
Cleaning solvent is combustible. DO NOT use or store near heat, sparks, flame, or other ignition sources. Use mechanical ventilation whenever product is used in a confined space, heated above ambient temperatures, or agitated. Keep container sealed when not in use. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Contact with cleaning solvent may cause skin irritation. Use chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides.
Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages.
DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Dirt, grease, oil, and debris may cover up a serious problem.
Check as you clean. Follow precautions printed on container.
Use cleaning solvent to clean metal surfaces. Use soap and water to clean rubber and plastic.
Cleaning is an after-operation service performed by operators to maintain vehicle readiness. Vehicles must be kept as clean as possible, depending on the available cleaning equipment and materials and tactical situation.
General Cleaning Precautions
Perform all cleaning procedures in well-ventilated areas.
Wear protective gloves, clothing, and respiratory equipment when using caustic, toxic, or flammable cleaning materials.
Never use diesel fuel or gasoline for cleaning.
A fire extinguisher must be readily available during all cleaning operations using flammable cleaning materials.
0024-4
TM 9-2320-273-10 0024
GENERAL CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS - CONTINUED
Special Precautions
Do not allow cleaning materials to come in contact with rubber, leather, vinyl, or canvas.
Do not allow corrosion-removing cleaning materials to contact painted surfaces.
Do not use steam or high-pressure air to clean cab or van body interiors.
Do not steam clean rustproofed surfaces.
Remove mildew from canvas with a bristle brush before cleaning canvas.
Use low-pressure air or water to clear debris from radiator core. Force debris out front of radiator by applying low-pressure air or water to rear of radiator first.
General Guidelines
Table 1 provides general guidelines for the use of cleaning materials and equipment for removing contaminants from vehicle surfaces.
SURFACE
Body
Cab Interior
(Metal)
Cab Interior/
Cab Top (Fabric)
Frame
Table 1. Cleaning Instructions
.
OIL/GREASE
CONTAMINANT
DIRT/MUD/DUST/
SALT
SURFACE RUST/
CORROSION
CLEANING MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT/METHOD
Grease-cleaning compound, running water, and damp and dry rags
Grease-cleaning compound, running water, and damp and dry rags
Saddle soap, warm water, soft brush, and dry rags
Grease-cleaning compound, running water, and damp and dry rags
High-pressure water, warm soapy water, soft brush, and damp and dry rags
Damp and dry rags
Soft brush, warm soapy water, and damp or dry rags
High-pressure water, warm soapy water, wire brush, and damp and dry rags
Corrosion-removing compound, bristle brush, dry rags, and lubricating oil*
Corrosion-removing compound, bristle brush, dry rags, and lubricating oil*
—
Corrosion-removing compound, wire brush, dry rags, and lubricating oil*
TM 9-2320-273-10
GENERAL CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS - CONTINUED
0024
SURFACE
Table 1. Cleaning Instructions - Continued
.
OIL/GREASE
CONTAMINANT
DIRT/MUD/DUST/
SALT
SURFACE RUST/
CORROSION
CLEANING MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT/METHOD
Engine/
Transmission
Glass
(Vehicles w/o
Crew Protection)
Ballistic Glass
(Vehicles w/Crew Protection)
Cleaning solvent and damp and dry rags
Glass cleaning solution and clean dry rags
General Purpose
Liquid Detergent and water with soft clean cloth
High-pressure water, warm soapy water, soft wire brush, and damp or dry rags
Glass cleaning solution and clean dry rags
Radiator — Low-pressure water or air, warm soapy water, and damp and dry rags
Rubber Insulation Damp and dry rags Damp and dry rags
Tires Warm soapy water and bristle brush
High-pressure water and bristle brush
Wire Rope Cleaning solvent and wire brush
Wire brush
Wood Detergent, warm water, and damp and dry rags
General Purpose
Liquid Detergent and water with soft clean cloth
Low-pressure water, warm soapy water, and damp and dry rags
Bristle brush, warm soapy water, and dry rags
—
—
—
—
—
Wire brush and lubricating oil*
—
* After cleaning, apply a light grade of lubricating oil to all unprotected surfaces to prevent further rusting and corrosion.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0024-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
Two
References
AR 385-55
References - Continued
ITEM
NO.
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS).
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
WARNING
Observe all warnings, cautions, and notes while performing
Preventive Maintenance
Checks and Services
(PMCS). Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Vehicle operation with a class I or II leak is permitted; however, system fluid capacities must be considered and fluid levels must be checked more frequently. All leaks must be reported to your supervisor. Failure to comply may result in further damage to equipment.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
NOTE
Perform Weekly and
Before PMCS if you are the assigned operator but have not operated the vehicle since the last weekly inspection or you are operating the vehicle for the first time.
1 Before
WALK-
AROUND
CHECKS
EXTERIOR
Exterior Left
Front
Visually check for under-inflated and unserviceable tires including spare. Check tires for leaks, cuts, gouges, cracks, or bulges. Remove all penetrating objects.
Tires have leaks, cuts, gouges, cracks, or bulges which could result in tire failure during operation. Two or more tires, including the spare, missing or unserviceable.
2 Before Fuel Heater
NOTE
Fuel heater is located below driver-side door and above fuel tank on
M915A1 only.
Check fuel heater
(Figure 1, Item 1) for leaks or damage.
Any Class III leak is evident.
0025-2
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
1
3 Before
Figure 1. Fuel Heater.
NOTE
Perform step 3 for
M915, M915A1, M916, and M920 vehicles.
Trailer Coupling
Air Hoses and
Connectors
Inspect tractor-to-trailer coupling air hoses for cracking or damaged connectors. Inspect trailer cable and electrical connectors
(Figure 2, Item 1) and
(Figure 2, Item 2).
Air hose(s) or couplers missing, leaking, coupler(s) unserviceable, trailer electrical connectors damaged or cable missing.
2
1
12 VOLT
24 VOLT
Figure 2. Trailer Coupling Air Hoses.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
ITEM
NO.
4
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
INTERVAL
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Fifth Wheel and
Ramps
PROCEDURE
a. Check that lockjaw pins
(Figure 3, Item 7) do not protrude more than
1/16 in. (1.6 mm) above surface of top plate, or have any lateral or vertical movement.
b. Check for bent, worn, broken, or missing parts.
NOTE
Perform step c for the
M915A1 only.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Lockjaw pin extends more than
1/16 in. (1.6 mm) or has lateral or vertical movement.
Bent, worn, broken, or missing parts c. Check slide track
(Figure 3, Item 1) for damage and free movement of fifth wheel assembly
(Figure 3, Item 2).
d. Check primary
(Figure 3, Item 4) and secondary
(Figure 3, Item 3) release handles for operation and damage.
NOTE
Air lines and cylinders are located under fifth wheel top plate.
Primary or secondary release handles are damaged or do not function.
e. Check air lines
(Figure 3, Item 6) and air cylinder
(Figure 3, Item 5) for damage.
Any air leak is evident.
0025-4
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
1
~
2
3
4
5
4
3
7
M915A1
7
7
M916 and M920 M915
Figure 3. Fifth Wheel Controls.
NOTE
If leakage is detected, further investigation is required to determine location and cause of leak.
6
4
7
3
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
5
6
7
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
Before
Before
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Left Side and
Rear of Vehicle
Under Vehicle
Right Side and
Front Tires
Front of Vehicle
PROCEDURE
a. Look under vehicle for evidence of fluid
(fuel, oil, or coolant) leak.
b. Visually check for under-inflated and unserviceable tires including spare.
Check tires for leaks, cuts, gouges, cracks, or bulges. Remove all penetrating objects.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any Class III leak is evident.
Tires have leaks, cuts, gouges, cracks, or bulges which could result in tire failure during operation. Two or more tires, including the spare, missing or unserviceable.
c. Check that mud flaps are in place and intact.
Visually check for under-inflated and unserviceable tires including spare. Check tires for leaks, cuts, gouges, cracks, or bulges. Remove all penetrating objects.
Tires have leaks, cuts, gouges, cracks, or bulges which could result in tire failure during operation. Two or more tires, including the spare, missing or unserviceable.
Any Class III leak is evident.
Look under vehicle for evidence of fuel, oil, or coolant leak.
NOTE
Cracked or broken windshield may violate
AR 385-55.
0025-6
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
8
INTERVAL
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Windshield
Wipers and
Blades
PROCEDURE
Check windshield for any cracks that impair vision. Check wiper arms and blades for presence and damage.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Windshield cracked, shattered, or missing.
9 Before
ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
Cooling System
WARNING
After raising engine compartment hood, ensure S-shaped safety hook is properly inserted through two matching holes in prop channel to prevent hood from accidentally falling.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap in two steps. First, place a thick cloth over the cap and slowly rotate cap left to its first stop, pause, and let pressure escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap further left until you can remove it.
Failure to comply may result in serious burns.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
If leakage is detected, further investigation is required to determine location and cause of leak.
0025-7
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
Check coolant level in radiator sight glass
(Figure 4, Item 1). If level is low, add coolant
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any Class III leak is evident.
1
10 Before
Figure 4. Radiator Sight Glass.
INTERIOR
Cab Fire
Extinguisher a. Check for missing or damaged fire extinguisher
(Figure 5, Item 1) under dashboard on driver side.
b. Check gauge
(Figure 5, Item 2) for proper pressure of approximately 150 psi (1,034 kPa).
Ensure mounting bracket is secure.
c. Check for damaged or missing seal.
Fire extinguisher missing or damaged.
Pressure gauge needle in
RECHARGE area.
Seal damaged or missing.
1
2
Figure 5. Cab Fire Extinguisher.
NOTE
Missing, torn, or inoperative seatbelt may be in violation of AR
385-55.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
ITEM
NO.
11
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
INTERVAL
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Interior of
Vehicle
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
12 Before Controls and
Instruments
Check seat and seatbelt for proper adjustment and ability to lock, security of pins and bolts, and tears.
WARNING
If Chemical, Biological,
Radiological, and
Nuclear (CBRN) exposure is suspected, personnel wearing protective equipment should handle all air cleaner media. Consult your CBRN Officer or
CBRN NCO for appropriate handling or disposal procedures.
CBRN contaminated filters must be handled using adequate precautions and must be disposed of by trained personnel. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Wear eye protection when removing A/C air filter.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
While performing PMCS with engine running, wear approved hearing protection. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
A sudden rise in temperature during engine warm up indicates defective cooling system.
0025-9
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
NOTE
The engine must be running to perform the following checks.
a. Start engine and run at idle speed.
b. Check air cleaner indicator. If in red, clean filter and reset.
c. Check voltmeter
(Figure 6, Item 1) needle. Should be in green area. Normal operating range is
12–15V.
d. Check transmission oil temperature gauge
(Figure 6, Item 2).
Normal operating range is 40–220° F
(4–104° C) for
M915–M920 or
120–250° F
(49–121° C) for
M915A1.
e. Check air pressure gauges front
(Figure 6, Item 4) and rear
(Figure 6, Item 6).
Normal operating range is 90–120 psi
(621–827 kPa) for
M915–M920 or
95–125 psi
(655–862 kPa) for
M915A1. Ensure warning light
(Figure 6, Item 5) and buzzer are operational.
Engine does not operate.
Air cleaner indicator stays in red.
Voltmeter reads above or below the green area.
Oil temperature gauge exceeds
220° F (104° C) for M915–M920 or 250° F
(121° C) for
M915A1.
Reads less than
60 psi
(414 kPa).
Warning light and/or buzzer stays on or not operational.
0025-10
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
f. Check engine temperature gauge
(Figure 6, Item 7).
Normal operating range is 165–195° F
(74–91° C) for
M915–M920 or
160–220° F
(71–104° C) for
M915A1 with engine warmed up.
g. Check engine oil pressure gauge
(Figure 6, Item 3).
Normal operating range is 40–75 psi
(276–517 kPa) for
M915–M920 or
35–50 psi
(241–345 kPa) for
M915A1 at
2,100 rpm and
5–20 psi
(34–138 kPa) at idle.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Temperature gauge reads less than 165° F
(74° C) or exceeds 195° F
(91° C) for
M915–M920 or reads less than
160° F (71° C) or exceeds
220° F (104° C) for M915A1 after engine warms up.
Reads less than
40 psi
(276 kPa) for
M915 through
M920 or 35 psi
(241 kPa) for
M915A1 at
2,100 rpm or
30 psi
(207 kPa) for
M915 through
M920 10 psi
(69 kPa) for
M915A1 at at idle.
1
2
3 4
5
7
Figure 6. Instrument Panel.
6
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
h. Check transmission and ratio selector.
Shift in all ranges checking for unusual stiffness, abnormal operation, or binding.
NOTE
Perform step i for the
M917, M919, and M920 only.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Transmission or ratio selector inoperative or binding.
i. Check pusher axle controls and gauges.
j. Check engine retarder for braking ability.
k. Check steering response.
l. Listen for leakage in exhaust system.
m. Check tachograph rpm needle for proper response to throttle. Check idle speed 580–650 rpm with engine at normal operating temperature.
Gauges or pusher axle are inoperative.
Engine retarder is inoperable.
Steering binds or is unresponsive.
Pipe, clamp, or hardware damaged or missing.
Tachograph indicates less than 580 rpm or more than
650 rpm at idle with engine at normal operating temperature.
Disk is missing.
n. Check tachograph for recording paper disk.
o. Check parking brake; pull out to apply, push in to release.
With parking brake applied, place transmission in gear.
Vehicle should not move.
Parking brake is inoperative.
0025-12
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
p. Check service brakes for pulling, grabbing, or other abnormal operation by moving vehicle approximately
10 ft.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Brakes do not stop vehicle.
13 Before
EXTERIOR
Air Dryer
Automatic drain valve inoperative.
Check automatic drain valve (Figure 7, Item 1) operation. With engine running, when air pressure reaches 120 psi
(827 kPa), a sharp burst of air will be heard at the drain valve each time the compressor unloads.
1
Figure 7. Automatic Drain Valve.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
ITEM
NO.
14
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
INTERVAL
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Trailer Brakes
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
NOTE
Perform this check with the trailer loaded after the tractor and trailer are coupled.
a. Check for air leaks at the intervehicular connecting hoses, relay valve, and air reservoirs.
b. Apply trailer brakes only and attempt to move the tractor/trailer combination.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with Crew Protection
Kit, perform steps 15–22 before operation.
Any air leaks are evident.
Brakes fail to hold tractor/trailer combination from moving.
15 Before Front Armor a. Inspect wheel well armor
(Figure 8, Item 3) for damaged, loose, or missing armor plate and mounting bolts.
b. Open left hood and inspect exterior firewall armor
(Figure 8, Item 2) for damaged, loose, or missing armor plate and mounting bolts.
c. Inspect windshield ballistic glass
(Figure 8, Item 1) mounting hardware for damaged, loose, or missing brackets and mounting bolts.
Armor plate is damaged, loose, or missing, or mounting bolts are loose or missing.
Armor plate is damaged, loose, or missing, or mounting bolts are loose or missing.
Any windshield ballistic glass mounting hardware is damaged, loose, or missing, or mounting bolts are loose or missing.
0025-14
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
d. Inspect exterior surface of windshield ballistic glass
(Figure 8, Item 1) for cracks, scratches, or pitting.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Cracks, scratches, or pitting in the exterior layer of windshield ballistic glass that penetrates through to the inner layer.
e. If dirty, clean windshield ballistic glass
(Figure 8, Item 1)
1
2
~
~
3
Figure 8. Front Armor.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
16
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Side Armor
(Left Side)
PROCEDURE
a. Inspect door assembly
(Figure 9, Item 2) and door frame
(Figure 9, Item 3) for damaged, loose, or missing mounting hardware.
b. Inspect exterior surface of door ballistic glass
(Figure 9, Item 1) for cracks, scratches, or pitting.
c. Open door and enter cab. Close door using grab handle. Ensure door closes without binding and latches
d. Ensure door ballistic glass
(Figure 9, Item 1) can open, close, and securely lock.
e. Inspect interior surface of door ballistic glass
(Figure 9, Item 1) and windshield ballistic glass for cracks, scratches, or pitting.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any armor panel or door assembly is damaged or mounting hardware is loose or missing.
Cracks, scratches, or pitting in the exterior layer of door ballistic glass that penetrates through to the inner layer.
Door binds or does not latch.
Door ballistic glass will not close or lock.
Cracks, scratches, or pitting on the interior surface of the door ballistic glass or windshield ballistic glass.
0025-16
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
f. Open door assembly
(Figure 9, Item 2) and enter cab. Close door assembly
(Figure 9, Item 2) using grab handle.
Ensure door assembly
(Figure 9, Item 2) closes without binding and latches correctly.
g. If dirty, clean door ballistic glass
(Figure 9, Item 1)
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Door assembly binds or does not latch.
1
~
3
2
Figure 9. Side Armor (Left Side).
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
17
INTERVAL
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Floor and
Firewall Armor
(Left Side)
PROCEDURE
Inspect left side floor armor
(Figure 10, Item 2) and firewall armor
(Figure 10, Item 1) for damage or loose or missing armor plates and mounting bolts.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any floor or firewall armor is damaged, loose, or missing, or mounting bolts are loose or missing.
1
~
~
2
Figure 10. Floor and Firewall Armor (Left Side).
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
18
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Roof Armor
PROCEDURE
a. Inspect roof armor
(Figure 11, Item 1) for damage or missing components.
b. Inspect roof armor
(Figure 11, Item 1) mounting hardware for loose or missing components.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Roof armor is damaged.
Roof armor mounting hardware is loose or missing.
1
~
~
Figure 11. Roof Armor.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
19
INTERVAL
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Side Armor
(Right Side)
PROCEDURE
a. Inspect door assembly
(Figure 12, Item 4) and door frame
(Figure 12, Item 3) for damage or loose or missing mounting hardware.
b. Inspect exterior surface of door ballistic glass
(Figure 12, Item 1) for cracks, scratches, or pitting.
c. Inspect windshield ballistic glass
(Figure 12, Item 2) mounting hardware for damaged, loose, or missing brackets and mounting bolts.
d. Inspect exterior surface of windshield ballistic glass
(Figure 12, Item 2) for cracks, scratches, or pitting.
e. Inspect exterior surface of windshield ballistic glass
(Figure 12, Item 2) for cracks, scratches, or pitting.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Armor panel or door assembly is damaged or mounting hardware is loose or missing.
Cracks, scratches, or pitting in the exterior layer of door ballistic glass that penetrates through to the inner layer
Any windshield ballistic glass mounting hardware is damaged, loose, or missing, or mounting bolts are loose or missing.
Cracks, scratches, or pitting in the exterior layer of windshield ballistic glass that penetrates through to the inner layer
Cracks, scratches, or pitting in the exterior layer of windshield ballistic glass that penetrates through to the inner layer
0025-20
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
f. Ensure door ballistic glass
(Figure 12, Item 1) can open, close, and securely lock.
g. Inspect interior surface of door ballistic glass
(Figure 12, Item 1) and windshield ballistic glass
(Figure 12, Item 2) for cracks, scratches, or pitting.
h. Open door assembly
(Figure 12, Item 4) and enter cab. Close door assembly
(Figure 12, Item 4) using grab handle.
Ensure door assembly
(Figure 12, Item 4) closes without binding and latches correctly.
i. If dirty, clean ballistic
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Door ballistic glass will not close or lock.
Cracks, scratches, or pitting on the interior surface of the door ballistic glass or windshield ballistic glass
Door assembly binds or does not latch.
1
2
4
~
~
~
~
3
Figure 12. Side Armor (Right Side).
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
20
INTERVAL
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Floor and
Firewall Armor
(Right Side)
PROCEDURE
a. Inspect left side floor armor
(Figure 13, Item 3) and firewall armor
(Figure 13, Item 2) for damaged or loose or missing armor plates and mounting bolts.
b. Inspect glove box armor
(Figure 13, Item 1) for damaged, loose or missing armor plates and mounting bolts.
c. Ensure glove box armor
(Figure 13, Item 1) is securely latched
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any floor or firewall armor is damaged, loose, or missing or mounting bolts are loose or missing.
Any armor panel is damaged, loose, or missing or mounting bolts are loose or missing.
Glove box armor will not close or latch securely.
1
~
3
~
2
Figure 13. Floor and Firewall Armor (Right Side).
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
21
INTERVAL
Before
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Rear Armor and
Escape Hatch
PROCEDURE
a. Inspect rear armor
(Figure 14, Item 1) for damage or loose or missing armor plates and mounting bolts.
b. Inspect escape hatch
(Figure 14, Item 2) for damage.
c. From inside the cab, check that escape hatch
(Figure 14, Item 2) will open and securely latch closed.
Ensure there is no damage to latch and mounting hardware
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Rear cab armor is damaged, loose, or missing, or mounting bolts are loose or missing.
Escape hatch is damaged or mounting hardware is loose or missing.
Escape hatch will not open or latch closed securely.
1
~
~
2
Figure 14. Roof Armor and Escape Hatch.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
INTERIOR
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
NOTE
The Air Conditioning
Kit is installed on vehicles equipped with
Crew Protection Kit only.
If vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, perform during operation step 22.
22 During A/C Blower
Unit a. Start engine, refer to
b. Turn A/C switch
(Figure 15, Item 1)
ON and fan speed switch
(Figure 15, Item 3) to
HIGH position
c. Operate A/C system for five minutes and check temperature of air coming out of blower unit vents
(Figure 15, Item 2).
Temperature of air coming out of vents is not cold and A/C is required for mission.
1
3
2
Figure 15. A/C Blower Unit.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
23
24
25
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
During
During
After
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
Steering/Swaying
Observe any unusual sway, dip, or unstable handling. Check vehicle steering response for unusual free-play, binding, wandering, or shimmy.
Gauges
Turbocharger
Monitor all gauges and warning buzzers during operation.
When shutting down engine, listen to turbocharger
(Figure 16, Item 1) for rattling noises.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Loose or binding steering action or steering wheel difficult to turn.
Steering is unstable or inoperative.
Any gauge is not functioning properly.
Unusual or rattling noises or a defective turbocharger
1
Figure 16. Turbocharger.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
NOTE
Operation of vehicles with inoperative horn may violate AR 385-55.
26 After Horns
Check operation of horns if tactical situation permits.
27 After
EXTERIOR
Lights
28 After Exterior of
Vehicle
Check operation of headlights, taillights, turn signals, brake lights, and blackout lights.
Check for obvious damage to vehicle.
Mission requires blackout lights and lights are not operating.
Check under vehicle for signs of leaks.
Visually check for under-inflated and unserviceable tires including spare. Check tires for leaks, cuts, gouges, cracks, or bulges. Remove all penetrating objects.
Any damage that prevents operation
Any Class III leak is evident.
Tires have leaks, cuts, gouges, cracks, or bulges which could result in tire failure during operation. Two or more tires, including spare, missing or unserviceable.
0025-26
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
29
30
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
After
After
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Exterior of
Vehicle (Left
Side)
Air Reservoirs and System
PROCEDURE
Check left-side view and spotter mirrors and arms.
Drain air reservoirs completely. Check air lines and reservoirs for leaks and damage.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any air leaks, damage to air lines or reservoirs, or oil coming from air tanks is noted during draining.
31 After Exterior of
Vehicle (Right
Side)
Check right-side view and spot mirrors and arms.
0025-27
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
ITEM
NO.
32
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
INTERVAL
After
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Transmission
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
NOTE
Perform step a for the
M915 through M920 only.
a. Shut off engine and let vehicle sit for five minutes before checking transmission oil level. The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks on transmission dipstick
(Figure 17, Item 1).
If necessary to service, fill to within
1/4 in. (6.4 mm) of
FULL mark.
NOTE
Perform steps b and c for the M915A1 only.
The hot check method is preferred, but oil level may be checked with transmission temperature below 120° F (49° C) by reading cold run band on dipstick.
b. With transmission temperature gauge
120°–250° F
(49°–121° C) while idling in neutral with brake applied, remove dipstick
(Figure 17, Item 1) and check oil level.
Dipstick
(Figure 17, Item 1) should read between high and low mark on hot run band.
0025-28
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
c. If below low mark on hot run band, add oil to bring level to mid-point of band.
Approximately one quart will raise level from bottom line to middle of band.
1
33 After
Figure 17. Transmission Dipstick.
Winch and
Winch Reservoir
(M916 and
M920) a. Visually inspect winch, reservoir lines, and hoses for leakage and damage.
b. Check fluid level.
Fluid level should be at full mark on sight.
c. Check cable for kinks, frays, and breaks in wire.
d. During operation, check for oil leakage and adequate control response.
Hoses/lines are damaged. Class
III leaks are evident.
Winch cable frayed, has kinks that cannot be removed, is broken, or missing.
No control response. Class
III leaks evident.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
WARNING
After raising engine compartment hood, ensure S-shaped safety hook is properly inserted through two matching holes in prop channel to prevent hood from accidentally falling.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
When working in engine compartment with engine running, keep clear of cooling fan. The fan can engage at any time and serious injury to personnel may result.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The engine must be shut off before performing
PMCS steps 34 through
44. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Do not overfill engine oil crankcase. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
0025-30
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
34
INTERVAL
After
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Engine Oil
Level
PROCEDURE
Check oil dipstick
(Figure 18, Item 1) for proper oil level. Dipstick
(Figure 18, Item 1) should read between low and high marks. If below low mark, add oil through oil fill cap
(Figure 18, Item 2) to bring level to high mark.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Engine has used more than one quart of oil per
100 miles.
2
1
Figure 18. Engine Oil Dipstick.
CAUTION
If one quart or more of fuel must be drained from fuel filter before fuel is clear, fuel tank and fuel system must be inspected carefully.
Report fuel contamination to your supervisor. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
NOTE
Some fuel filters may not be equipped with drains.
With engine running, perform step 35.
35 After Fuel Filter a. Open drain (Figure
19, Item 2) on bottom of fuel filter
(Figure 19, Item 1).
Drain fuel into suitable container until fuel runs clear.
Close drain (Figure
19, Item 2) securely.
Dispose of fuel in accordance with local requirements.
b. Check for leaks or damage.
Any Class III leak is evident.
Any Class III leak is evident.
36 After
1
2
Figure 19. Engine Fuel Filter.
Engine
Compartment a. Check for fluid leakage and damage.
b. Check oil filters for leaks.
c. Visually check radiator, mounting brackets, and hoses for damages or coolant leaks.
Any Class III leak is evident.
Any Class III leak is evident.
Any Class III leak is evident.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
37
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
After
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Drive Belts
PROCEDURE
a. Check for frayed or cracked belts
(Figure 20, Item 1).
b. Check belt adjustment.
Deflection should not be more than 1/2 in.
(12.7 mm). If belts are loose, notify your supervisor.
c. Check pulleys
(Figure 20, Item 2) for damage or cracks.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any drive belt missing, broken, or cracked to belt fiber. More than one crack
1/8 in. (3.2 mm) deep (50% belt thickness) within a 6 in.
(152.4 mm) length. Frays greater than 2 in. (50.8 mm) or excessive play.
Deflection more than 1/2 in.
(12.7 mm).
Any pulley with large chips or cracked belt walls.
2
1
Figure 20. Drive Belts.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
38
INTERVAL
After
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Fan Clutch and
Actuator
PROCEDURE
d. Check water pump for coolant leaks.
e. Check air compressor for oil leaks or damage.
WARNING
Engine must be off to check the fan clutch and actuator. Failure to comply may result in severe injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any Class III leak is evident.
Any Class III leak or damage is evident.
a. Check fan clutch for damage. Look for loose attaching bolts.
b. Inspect hoses for looseness at fittings, for air leaks, fraying, cracks, and abrasions.
c. Check fan clutch actuator
(Figure 21, Item 1) for signs of leaks and loose hose connections.
Damaged or loose hardware.
Any air leak is evident.
Air leakage from the exhaust port when engine temperature is below 185° F
(85° C).
0025-34
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
1
Figure 21. Fan Clutch and Actuator.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
WARNING
If Chemical, Biological,
Radiological, and
Nuclear (CBRN) exposure is suspected, personnel wearing protective equipment should handle all air cleaner media. Consult your CBRN Officer or
CBRN NCO for appropriate handling or disposal procedures.
CBRN contaminated filters must be handled using adequate precautions and must be disposed of by trained personnel. Wear eye protection when removing A/C air filter.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
39 Weekly Air Cleaner
NOTE
Perform step a for
M915–M920. Perform step b for M915A1.
a. Empty automatic dust unloader.
b. Remove dust and moisture boot, and empty air cleaner canister.
Dust unloader missing or damaged.
Air cleaner canister dust and moisture boot missing or damage is evident.
0025-36
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
40
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Weekly Steering Pump and Reservoir
PROCEDURE
Inspect for loose steering pump mounting or damage. Check pump for leakage. Inspect pump hoses for deterioration and leaks.
CAUTION
Do not overfill steering pump reservoir. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any Class III leak or steering pump mounting damage is evident.
With engine hot and engine off, check fluid level in steering pump for proper level. If level is low, add fluid to bring level to full mark on dipstick (Figure 22, Item
1).
1
Figure 22. Power Steering Pump Reservoir.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
41
42
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Weekly Fan Clutch and
Actuator
Weekly Turbocharger
PROCEDURE
Check for leaks, damaged fins, loose or damaged hoses, debris, or dirt in radiator fins.
Inspect turbocharger
(Figure 23, Item 1), oil lines
(Figure 23, Item 2), and fittings for signs of leaks or damage. Check air intake and exhaust ducts for loose bolts and clamps. Look for signs of hose damage.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any Class III leak is evident.
Any Class III leak is evident.
1
2
Figure 23. Turbocharger.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
ITEM
NO.
43
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Weekly Oil Bypass
Filter
PROCEDURE
Check oil bypass filter
(Figure 24, Item 1) lines and fittings for leaks, looseness, and damage.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any Class III leak is evident.
1
Figure 24. Oil Bypass Filter.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
44
45
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Weekly Cooling System
Weekly Ether
Quick-Start
Assembly
PROCEDURE
Check for leaks, damaged fins, loose or damaged hoses, and debris or dirt in radiator fins.
Inspect ether quick-start assembly
(Figure 25, Item 1) mounting for loose hardware. Check lines, fittings, and canister for damage.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Class III leak is evident.
Any leak or reservoir damage is evident.
1
46
47
48
Figure 25. Ether Quick-Start Assembly.
EXTERIOR
Weekly Tires
Weekly Wheels, Studs, and Nuts
Weekly Air System a. Check tire tread depth. Tread should not be worn beyond level of wear bar.
b. Check for correct air pressure, refer to tire pressure data
Ensure all wheel stud nuts are tight using wheel stud nut wrench and handle.
With air system charged and engine off, check air lines and fittings for leaks and damage.
Tire worn to or beyond wear bar.
Any wheel stud is missing or stud nut is loose.
Any reservoir, line, or fitting leaks or damage is evident.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
49
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Weekly Frame
PROCEDURE
Visually inspect frame side rails, crossmembers, cab supports, and underbody supports for loose or missing bolts and cracked or broken welds.
NOTE
Perform step 50 for
M915, M915A1, M916,
M917, and M920.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Loose or broken side rails, cab supports, crossmembers, missing bolts, or broken welds
50
51
Weekly Fuel Tank
Weekly Trailer
Couplings
Check fuel tank, lines, and fittings for leakage.
a. Check electrical connectors
(Figure 26, Item 2) and cable for damage.
b. Check trailer air lines and quick disconnect couplings
(Figure 26, Item 1) for damage (front and rear).
Any Class III leak is evident.
Electrical cable missing or damaged.
Air lines leak or damage is evident.
2
1
Figure 26. Trailer Couplings.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
52
53
54
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Weekly Spare Tire Hoist and Winch
Weekly
Weekly
Winch (M916 and M920)
Pusher Axle Air
Bags (M917,
M919 & M920)
PROCEDURE
Check spare tire hoist and winch operation.
Check spare tire hoist and winch operation.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Spare tire hoist and winch damaged or does not operate.
Spare tire hoist and winch damaged or does not operate.
Air bags do not hold air or leak.
Check pusher axle air bags for gouges, cracks, cuts, and exposed cord fabric. Check for interference with surrounding structures.
Check for oil or diesel fuel on air bag. Clean as required. Air bags may be checked with pusher axle in the raised or lowered position.
WARNING
During normal operation the exhaust pipe and muffler will become very hot. Exercise caution not to make body contact or touch hot exhaust components with bare hands. Failure to comply may result in severe burns to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Operation of vehicle with damaged exhaust may violate AR 385-55.
0025-42
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
ITEM
NO.
55
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Weekly Exhaust System
PROCEDURE
Inspect exhaust stack
(Figure 27, Item 1) and muffler
(Figure 27, Item 2) for leaks, damage, and rusted through conditions.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Any pipe, clamp, or hose leak; damaged, missing, or rust through is evident.
1
2
Figure 27. Exhaust System.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
WARNING
Do not smoke, have open flame, or make sparks when performing battery maintenance.
Batteries may explode causing severe injury to personnel. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Remove all jewelry such as rings, bracelets, and identification tags. If jewelry comes in contact with battery terminals, a direct short can occur resulting in instant heating of jewelry or tools and damage to electrical system. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful.
Always wear safety goggles and rubber gloves when performing battery maintenance.
Failure to comply may result in severe injury to personnel if acid contacts eyes or skin.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
0025-44
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
56
57
58
59
60
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Weekly Batteries
Weekly
Weekly
Weekly
Weekly
Body
Cab
Front
Suspension
Cab Mounts
PROCEDURE
Check electrolyte level.
Electrolyte should be filled to level/split ring in battery filler opening
(vent). If fluid is low, fill with distilled water to level ring. Run vehicle at least 15 minutes to charge battery. If fluid is gassing (boiling), notify your supervisor.
Check body and cab for damage or rusted through conditions that could impair operation.
a. Check cab mounts for cracks, breaks, and damage.
b. Check doors, latches, and auxiliary equipment for proper operation.
Inspect front suspension springs and mounting hardware for cracks, breaks, or loose or missing hardware and/or shackles. Notify your supervisor of any damage found.
Inspect front and rear cab mounts for evidence of deterioration, over compression, or loose mounting hardware.
Notify your supervisor of any damage or looseness found.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Battery is unserviceable, missing, or leaking; terminals or cables are loose, corroded, or holddowns are not secure.
Cab mounts or welds cracked or broken.
Any cracks, breaks, or loose hardware or damage to suspension springs is noted.
0025-45
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
ITEM
NO.
61
62
63
64
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Weekly Wheels and
Wheel Rims
Weekly
Weekly
Weekly
Crew Protection
Kit Mounting
Hardware
Escape Hatch
Door
Assemblies and
Stops
PROCEDURE
Inspect wheel lug nuts and wheel rim bolts/nuts for looseness (e.g., polished surface, rust, or minor cracks around bolt and wheel mating surfaces). Notify your supervisor of any looseness found.
Check all armor kit mounting hardware for loose or missing hardware. Notify your supervisor of any loose or missing mounting hardware found.
From inside the cab, check that escape hatch will open and securely
Ensure there is no damage to latch and mounting hardware.
Check both door assembly seals, hardware, and door stops for damaged or loose components.
Notify your supervisor of any damage found.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Two or more studs or nuts are missing from the same wheel.
Escape hatch will not open or latch closed securely.
Loose components are evident.
Roof
NOTE
The Air Conditioning
Kit is installed on vehicles equipped with
Crew Protection Kit only.
If vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, perform item 65 through
68.
0025-46
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
ITEM
NO.
65
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
Weekly A/C Condenser
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
a. Inspect A/C condenser
(Figure 28, Item 1) for damage and loose or missing mounting hardware.
b. Inspect A/C condenser
(Figure 28, Item 1) for leaks. Leaks can be identified by oil residue on fittings
(Figure 28, Item 3), along A/C hoses
(Figure 28, Item 2), or on condenser core.
Condenser is damaged or mounting bolts are loose or missing and
A/C is required for mission.
Leaks are evident and A/C is required for mission.
c. Inspect A/C hoses
(Figure 28, Item 2) and electrical harness
(Figure 28, Item 4) for damage and loose or missing mounting hardware.
d. Inspect A/C hoses
(Figure 28, Item 2) for leaks. Leaks can be identified by oil residue on fittings
(Figure 28, Item 3) or along A/C hose
(Figure 28, Item 2).
A/C hoses or electrical harness are damaged or have loose or missing mounting hardware and
A/C is required for mission.
Leaks are evident and A/C is required for mission.
1
~
2
4
3
Figure 28. A/C Condenser.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
66
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
INTERIOR OF
CAB
Weekly A/C Evaporator
Assembly
PROCEDURE
a. Inspect evaporator assembly
(Figure 29, Item 2) for damage and loose or missing mounting hardware.
b. Inspect switch box
(Figure 29, Item 1) for damage and loose or missing mounting hardware.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Evaporator assembly unit is damaged or has loose or missing mounting hardware and
A/C is required for mission.
Switch box is damaged or has loose or missing mounting hardware and
A/C is required for mission.
WARNING
If Chemical, Biological,
Radiological, and
Nuclear (CBRN) exposure is suspected, personnel wearing protective equipment should handle all air cleaner media. Consult your CBRN Officer or
CBRN NCO for appropriate handling or disposal procedures.
CBRN contaminated filters must be handled using adequate precautions and must be disposed of by trained personnel. Wear eye protection when removing A/C air filter.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
0025-48
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
c. Inspect A/C filter
(Figure 29, Item 3) and clean or replace if necessary
d. Inspect two drain tubes
(Figure 29, Item 4) located at bottom corners of evaporator assembly
(Figure 29, Item 2) for damage, looseness, and blockage. Clean or replace as necessary.
2
1
4
Figure 29. A/C Evaporator Assembly.
3
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
67
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
OUTSIDE OF
CAB LEFT
SIDE
Weekly A/C
Receiver/Dryer
Unit
PROCEDURE
a. Inspect receiver/dryer
(Figure 30, Item 3) for damage and loose or missing mounting hardware.
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Receiver/dryer unit is damaged or has loose or missing mounting hardware and
A/C is required for mission.
Leaks are evident and A/C is required for mission.
b. Inspect receiver/dryer
(Figure 30, Item 3) for leaks. Leaks can be identified by oil residue on A/C hoses and hose fittings
(Figure 30, Item 1).
c. Inspect A/C hoses and hose fittings
(Figure 30, Item 1) and electrical harness
(Figure 30, Item 2) for damage and loose or missing mounting hardware.
A/C hoses and hose fittings or electrical harness are damaged or have loose or missing mounting hardware and
A/C is required for mission.
0025-50
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
d. Inspect A/C hoses and hose fittings
(Figure 30, Item 1) for leaks. Leaks can be identified by oil residue along A/C hoses and hose fittings
(Figure 30, Item 1).
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Leaks are evident and A/C is required for mission.
1
2
1
3
Figure 30. A/C Receiver/Dryer.
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
ITEM
NO.
68
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
Weekly A/C Compressor a. Open left side engine
b. Inspect compressor
(Figure 31, Item 4) for damage and loose or missing mounting hardware.
c. Inspect compressor
(Figure 31, Item 4) for leaks. Leaks can be identified by oil residue on fittings
(Figure 31, Item 3).
d. Inspect A/C hoses
(Figure 31, Item 2) and electrical harness
(Figure 31, Item 1) for damage and loose or missing mounting hardware.
e. Inspect A/C hoses
(Figure 31, Item 2) for leaks. Leaks can be identified by oil residue on fittings
(Figure 31, Item 3) or along A/C hose
(Figure 31, Item 2).
f. Inspect compressor belt
(Figure 31, Item 5) for damage and correct tightness
(120 lb for new belts).
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
Compressor is damaged or mounting bolts are loose or missing and
A/C is required for mission.
Leaks are evident and A/C is required for mission.
A/C hoses or electrical harness are damaged or have loose or missing mounting hardware and
A/C is required for mission.
Leaks are evident and A/C is required for mission.
Compressor belt is damaged or loose and A/C is required for mission.
0025-52
TM 9-2320-273-10 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
1
2
5
4
END OF WORK PACKAGE
Figure 31. A/C Compressor.
3
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
CLEANING VEHICLE
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
Rag, wiping (WP 0039, Item 25)
GENERAL CLEANING
Perform both exterior and interior cleaning procedures when cleaning the vehicle.
EXTERIOR
1.
Never wipe off dirt when vehicle is dry.
2.
Never wash vehicle in direct sunlight or if the vehicle exterior is hot to touch.
3.
Wash your vehicle often using cold or warm water (never use hot water or any strong detergent). Do not use abrasives to remove mud and dirt from your vehicle.
4.
While cleaning truck, look closely for evidence of rust, corrosion, bare metal, or other exterior damage. If any problems are found, notify your supervisor to treat affected areas.
INTERIOR
1.
Remove loose dust and dirt from cab interior.
2.
Clean upholstery and seatbelts using mild solution of warm water and soap (never use solvents or abrasives).
3.
Using clean rags, wipe dry all areas that have been washed.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0026-1/2 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
CLEANING BALLISTIC GLASS
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
Cleaning compound, windshield
Rag, wiping (WP 0039, Item 25)
Equipment Condition
Vehicle parked on level ground
Equipment Condition - Continued
CLEANING
CAUTION
Remove rings or other hard objects from hands before cleaning ballistic glass. DO NOT use hard, dirty, or gritty cloths on ballistic glass. DO NOT apply water or cleaning compound unless ballistic glass is cool and protected from heating effects of sunlight. Failure to follow these instructions will damage ballistic glass.
Do not use bug spray or other aerosol sprays on or near ballistic glass. Failure to follow these instructions will damage ballistic glass.
NOTE
Follow this procedure to clean inner plastic laminate surfaces of ballistic glass. Clean outside surfaces of ballistic glass in the same manner as plain glass.
1.
Add cleaning compound to 1 gal. (3.8 L) of water as directed by manufacturer label.
2.
Saturate a soft, clean cloth with cleaning solution and lightly rub plastic surfaces.
3.
Flush off cleaning solution with water and dry with a soft, clean cloth.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0027-1/2 blank
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
Diesel fuel, arctic
Diesel fuel, DF-1, regular
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
FILLING FUEL TANK
Materials/Parts - Continued
Diesel fuel, DF-2, regular
References
GENERAL
This work package provides general instructions for filling the fuel tank.
FUELING VEHICLE
WARNING
When fueling vehicle, ensure pump nozzle contacts the filling tube on top of the fuel tank to carry off static electricity. Do not smoke or have open flame in fueling area.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
Park vehicle, stop engine, and apply parking brake (WP 0011).
2.
Wipe off any dirt on fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1) around filler cap
(Figure 1, Item 2).
3.
Remove filler cap (Figure 1, Item 2) from fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1).
4.
Fill fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1) with appropriate diesel fuel.
5.
Install filler cap (Figure 1, Item 2) on fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1).
1
~
2
Figure 1. Fuel Tank and Filler Cap.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
Sealing compound (WP 0039, Item 26)
References
GENERAL
WARNING
Accidental or intentional introduction of liquid contaminants into the environment is a violation of state, federal, and
military regulations. Refer to Army POL (WP 0001) for
information concerning storage, use, and disposal of these liquids. Failure to comply may result in damage to environment and health of personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Use a drain pan to capture any draining coolant. Dispose of fluids in accordance with local policy and ordinances. Ensure all spills are cleaned up.
This work package provides instructions for draining the cooling system, filling an empty cooling system, and adding coolant to a partly filled cooling system.
0029-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0029
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING
Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap in two steps. First, place a thick cloth over the cap and slowly rotate cap left to its first stop, pause, and let pressure escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap further left until you can remove it. Failure to comply may result in serious burns. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Leaking or spilled coolant may cause a slip and fall hazard.
When draining cooling system, clean any leaking or spilled coolant immediately using suitable absorbent materials.
Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials in accordance with local procedures and plans. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
Remove radiator cap (Figure 1, Item 1) from radiator filler neck
(Figure 1, Item 2).
NOTE
Use a suitable drain pan to capture coolant when draining cooling system.
The radiator has one drain cock located on the left side of the radiator bottom tank, facing the engine.
Coolant is drained from the engine cylinder block by removing the temperature sending unit form the cylinder block. The temperature sending unit is located on the right side of the cylinder block near the back of engine.
A drain cock is located on the top of the thermostat manifold and on front of oil cooler. These drain cocks are used to drain coolant or allow air to escape the cooling system when filling or adding coolant.
2.
Position drain pan under radiator drain cock (Figure 2, Item 5). Open radiator drain cock (Figure 2, Item 5) and allow coolant to drain.
3.
Position drain pan under oil cooler drain cock (Figure 2, Item 2). Open thermostat manifold drain cock (Figure 2, Item 3) and oil cooler drain cock
(Figure 2, Item 2) and allow coolant to drain.
4.
Disconnect electrical connector from temperature sending unit (Figure 2, Item 1).
5.
Position drain pan under right side of cylinder block (Figure 2, Item 4). Remove temperature sending unit (Figure 2, Item 1) from cylinder block (Figure 2, Item 4) and allow all coolant to drain.
0029-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM - CONTINUED
1
2
1
2
Figure 1. Removing Radiator Cap.
3
~
4
END OF TASK
5
Figure 2. Draining Cooling System.
0029
TM 9-2320-273-10
FILLING EMPTY COOLING SYSTEM
0029
WARNING
Contact with sealing compound may cause skin irritation.
Use chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides.
Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages.
DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Leaking or spilled coolant may cause a slip and fall hazard.
When draining cooling system, clean any leaking or spilled coolant immediately using suitable absorbent materials.
Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials in accordance with local procedures and plans. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Fill cooling system with a mixture of clean water and antifreeze. If unknown, notify supervisor for proper mixture of water and antifreeze.
Perform steps 1 through 3 if temperature sending is removed from cylinder block.
1.
Apply thin coat of sealing compound to threads of temperature sending unit
(Figure 3, Item 1).
2.
Install temperature sending unit (Figure 3, Item 1) on cylinder block
(Figure 3, Item 4).
3.
Connect electrical connector to temperature sending unit (Figure 3, Item 1).
4.
Close radiator drain cock (Figure 3, Item 5) and oil cooler drain cock
(Figure 3, Item 3).
5.
Open thermostat manifold drain cock (Figure 3, Item 2), and pour coolant through radiator filler neck (Figure 4, Item 3) until coolant flows from thermostat manifold drain cock (Figure 3, Item 2). Close thermostat manifold drain cock
(Figure 3, Item 2).
6.
Continue filling radiator (Figure 3, Item 6) with coolant until coolant level is even with top of radiator sight glass (Figure 4, Item 2).
0029-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
FILLING EMPTY COOLING SYSTEM - CONTINUED
0029
7.
Start engine, and allow engine to reach normal operating temperature of
165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through M920 or 180–200° F (82–93° C) for
M915A1.
8.
Open and close oil cooler drain cock (Figure 3, Item 3) and thermostat manifold drain cock (Figure 3, Item 2) to allow any remaining air to escape from cooling system.
9.
Recheck coolant level and add coolant as necessary until coolant level is even with top of radiator sight glass (Figure 4, Item 2).
10.
Install radiator cap (Figure 4, Item 1) on radiator filler neck (Figure 4, Item 3).
11.
Check for leaks.
2
1
4
~
6
3
5
Figure 3. Filling Empty Cooling System.
1
2
3
END OF TASK
Figure 4. Checking Coolant Level.
TM 9-2320-273-10
ADDING COOLANT TO PARTIALLY EMPTY COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING
Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap in two steps. First, place a thick cloth over the cap and slowly rotate cap left to its first stop, pause, and let pressure escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap further left until you can remove it. Failure to comply may result in serious burns. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Leaking or spilled coolant may cause a slip and fall hazard.
When draining cooling system, clean any leaking or spilled coolant immediately using suitable absorbent materials.
Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials in accordance with local procedures and plans. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
0029
NOTE
Fill cooling system with a mixture of clean water and antifreeze. If unknown, notify supervisor for proper mixture of water and antifreeze.
1.
Remove radiator cap (Figure 5, Item 1) from radiator filler neck
(Figure 5, Item 3).
2.
Add coolant through radiator fill neck (Figure 5, Item 3) until coolant level is even with top of sight glass (Figure 5, Item 2).
3.
Open and close oil cooler drain cock (Figure 6, Item 3) and thermostat manifold drain cock (Figure 6, Item 2) to allow any residual air to escape from cooling system.
4.
Recheck coolant level and add coolant as necessary until coolant level is even with top of radiator sight glass (Figure 5, Item 2).
5.
Install radiator cap (Figure 5, Item 1) on radiator filler neck (Figure 5, Item 3).
6.
Check for leaks.
0029-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
ADDING COOLANT TO PARTIALLY EMPTY COOLING SYSTEM - CONTINUED
0029
1
2
3
1
Figure 5. Radiator Site Glass.
2
~
3
4
Figure 6. Adding Coolant to Cooling System.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND TIRE SERVICE
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
Two
References
References - Continued
WARNING
Exercise caution when raising or lowering spare wheel and tire assembly. All personnel must stand clear during lifting operations. Should wheel and tire assembly fall over or drop from lift, serious injury to personnel may result. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
In case of a flat on any model vehicle, if tactical situation permits, immediately stop the vehicle where there will be no hazard to other traffic or to the crew member changing the tire. Notify your supervisor as soon as possible so wheel nuts can be tightened to proper torque value and tire can be repaired and returned to service. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
Wheels and tires are inspected when performing weekly
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS),
A spare wheel and tire assembly is provided on M915,
M916, and M915A1 vehicles. On these vehicles a tire lift is provided to raise and lower the spare wheel and tire assembly from the stowed position.
On M917, M918, M919, and M920 vehicles, no spare is provided. Should you have a flat, use one of the pusher axle wheel and tire assemblies as a spare.
If you should have a flat on the rear of an M918 vehicle, reduce speed as much as practical and notify your supervisor as soon as possible. If you should have a flat on one of the front tires of an M918 vehicle, exchange the flat tire with one of the outside rear duals.
0030-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
NOTE
When changing tires, do not substitute type or size of tire unless all tires on the vehicle can be converted. Keep all tires the same.
0030
TIRE INFLATION
Checking tire air pressure is an important aspect of tire maintenance. Tire air pressure must be checked weekly. Recommended air pressures for all tires on all vehicle models have been carefully selected to provide maximum tire life and performance. Refer to
Equipment Data in WP 0003 for proper tire air pressure application. Check and adjust
tire air pressure when tires are cold. Recommended air pressures are specified for cold tires (i.e., tires that have not warmed up due to vehicle operation). When vehicle is operated and tire warms up, tire air pressure increases. Do not decrease warm tire air pressure to recommended air pressure for a cold tire. Following cross-country operations in mud, sand, or snow, ensure that tires are inflated for highway use.
WARNING
Stay clear of wheel when checking tire air pressure and inflating tire. Injury or death to personnel may result from exploding wheel components. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
Remove tire air pressure gauge from tool box.
2.
Remove tire valve stem cap.
3.
Check tire air pressure. Refer to Equipment Data in WP 0003 for proper tire air
pressure application.
4.
If necessary, remove air hose from tool box and use quick disconnect coupling provided at air reservoir as indicated in (Figure 1, Item 1), (Figure 2, Item 1), and
(Figure 3, Item 1) to put air in tires.
5.
Install tire valve stem cap and tighten finger tight.
6.
Store tire air pressure gauge and air hose in tool box.
1
1
Figure 1. M915, M918, and M915A1.
TIRE INFLATION - CONTINUED
TM 9-2320-273-10 0030
1
Figure 2. M916.
END OF TASK
1
Figure 3. M917, M919, and M920.
TM 9-2320-273-10
REMOVING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM TIRE CARRIER
(M915, M916, AND M915A1)
0030
WARNING
Exercise caution when raising or lowering spare wheel and tire assembly. All personnel must stand clear during lifting operations. Should wheel and tire assembly fall over or drop from lift, serious injury to personnel may result. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not touch hot clutch disc when raising or lowering spare wheel and tire assembly winch brake. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure winch cable drum has a minimum of four full turns of cable prior to lifting spare wheel and tire assembly.
Failure to comply may result in cable pulling off cable drum and injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
If winch brake disc shows signs of overheating, stop and allow 15 minutes for winch brake disc to cool down.
NOTE
The winch automatically brakes when pressure is taken off handle regardless of which direction it is being turned. If slack is needed to secure cable around wheel and tire assembly, you must pull on cable and turn handle in a counterclockwise direction at the same time. Do not pull out more cable than needed.
1.
Park vehicle on level ground, stop engine, apply parking brake, and chock wheels
2.
Install winch cable (Figure 4, Item 1) through wheel opening (Figure 4, Item 3), wrap it around wheel and tire assembly (Figure 4, Item 2), and secure snap hook
(Figure 4, Item 6) on winch cable (Figure 4, Item 1).
3.
Remove tractor-to-trailer electrical cable at tractor.
4.
Remove wing nut (Figure 4, Item 5) from bolt (Figure 4, Item 4), lower spare tire carrier side panel (Figure 5, Item 3), and remove bolt (Figure 5, Item 1) from tire carrier base (Figure 5, Item 2).
0030-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
REMOVING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM TIRE CARRIER
(M915, M916, AND M915A1) - CONTINUED
2
3
6
1
5
4
Figure 4. Spare Wheel and Tire Carrier
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
0030
1
2
3
Figure 5. Spare Tire Carrier Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
TM 9-2320-273-10
REMOVING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM TIRE CARRIER
(M915, M916, AND M915A1) - CONTINUED
0030
WARNING
Ensure winch cable drum has a minimum of four full turns of cable prior to lifting spare wheel and tire assembly.
Failure to comply may result in cable pulling off cable drum and injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure wheel and tire assembly does not suddenly drop from truck by guiding it down between fuel tank and fender.
Failure to comply could cause winch cable to snap and injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Ensure cable is paying out when turning handle counterclockwise or handle will unscrew and winch will become inoperative.
The winch automatically brakes when pressure is taken off handle regardless of which direction it is being turned. If slack is needed to secure cable around wheel and tire assembly, you must pull on the cable and turn the handle in a counterclockwise direction at the same time. Do not pull out more cable than needed.
This step requires two personnel.
5.
Remove wheel and tire assembly (Figure 6, Item 1) from spare tire carrier
(Figure 6, Item 3) and place on spare tire carrier side panel (Figure 6, Item 5).
6.
Take up slack in winch cable (Figure 6, Item 2) by turning winch handle
(Figure 6, Item 4) in clockwise direction.
7.
While guiding spare tire assembly (Figure 7, Item 3) over fuel tank
(Figure 7, Item 5) and fender, turn winch handle
(Figure 7, Item 2) counterclockwise and lower spare tire assembly
(Figure 7, Item 3) to ground.
8.
Remove winch cable (Figure 7, Item 1) from wheel and tire assembly
(Figure 7, Item 3) and leave winch cable (Figure 7, Item 1) payed out for storing flat wheel and tire assembly later.
0030-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
REMOVING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM TIRE CARRIER
(M915, M916, AND M915A1) - CONTINUED
2
1
3
0030
5
Figure 6. Wheel and Tire Assembly on Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
4
1
END OF TASK
5
2
4
3
Figure 7. Lower Wheel and Tire Assembly
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
TM 9-2320-273-10 0030
INSTALLING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ON CARRIER (M915, M916, AND M915A1)
WARNING
Exercise caution when raising or lowering spare wheel and tire assembly. All personnel must stand clear during lifting operations. Should wheel and tire assembly fall over or drop from lift, serious injury to personnel may result. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not touch hot clutch disc when raising or lowering spare wheel and tire assembly winch brake. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure winch cable drum has a minimum of four full turns of cable prior to lifting spare wheel and tire assembly.
Failure to comply may result in cable pulling off cable drum and injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
If winch brake disc shows signs of overheating, stop and allow 15 minutes for winch brake disc to cool down.
NOTE
The winch automatically brakes when pressure is taken off handle regardless of which direction it is being turned. If slack is needed to secure cable around wheel and tire assembly, you must pull on cable and turn the handle in a counterclockwise direction at same time. Do not pull out more cable than needed.
1.
Install winch cable (Figure 8, Item 1) through wheel opening (Figure 8, Item 4), wrap it around wheel and tire assembly (Figure 8, Item 3), and secure snap hook
(Figure 8, Item 5) back on winch cable (Figure 8, Item 1).
2.
Take up slack in winch cable (Figure 8, Item 1) by turning winch handle
(Figure 8, Item 2) in clockwise direction.
NOTE
This step requires two personnel.
3.
Turn winch handle (Figure 9, Item 2) clockwise to install wheel and tire assembly
(Figure 9, Item 1) on spare tire carrier side panel (Figure 9, Item 4) while guiding it around fuel tank (Figure 9, Item 3) and fender.
0030-8
TM 9-2320-273-10 0030
INSTALLING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ON CARRIER (M915, M916, AND M915A1) -
CONTINUED
1
1
2
5
3
4
Figure 8. Raising Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
4
3
Figure 9. Wheel and Tire Assembly on Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
2
TM 9-2320-273-10 0030
INSTALLING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ON CARRIER (M915, M916, AND M915A1) -
CONTINUED
4.
Install wheel and tire assembly (Figure 10, Item 1) on spare tire carrier
(Figure 10, Item 2).
NOTE
After wheel and tire assembly has been secured, cable may be slightly loose but should remain attached to wheel and tire assembly.
Crank handle must be in 12 or 6 o’clock position when not in use to avoid possible interference with trailer.
5.
Install bolt (Figure 10, Item 4) on tire carrier base (Figure 10, Item 3).
6.
Raise spare tire carrier side panel (Figure 11, Item 1) and install wing nut
(Figure 11, Item 3) on bolt (Figure 11, Item 2).
7.
Connect tractor-to-trailer electrical cable connector to trailer.
8.
Release parking brake and remove wheel chocks (WP 0011).
0030-10
TM 9-2320-273-10 0030
INSTALLING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ON CARRIER (M915, M916, AND M915A1) -
CONTINUED
1
4
2
3
Figure 10. Install Tire on Spare Tire Carrier
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
1
3
2
END OF TASK
Figure 11. Secure Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
TM 9-2320-273-10 0030
WHEEL AND TIRE REPLACEMENT
1.
Park vehicle on level ground, stop engine, apply parking brake, and chock wheels.
2.
Check tire pressure of wheel and tire assembly to be installed. Refer to
Equipment Data in WP 0003 for proper tire air pressure application.
NOTE
Wheel nuts on left side have left-hand threads and must be turned clockwise to loosen. Wheel stud nuts on right side have right-hand threads and must be turned counterclockwise to loosen. Studs and wheel nuts are stamped L (left) and R (right).
3.
Using spare tire mounting wrench, loosen all wheel nuts (Figure 12, Item 1) from wheel and tire assembly (Figure 12, Item 4) to be removed.
4.
Position jack as instructed in Jacking Procedure and raise axle until tire clears ground.
5.
Remove all wheel nuts (Figure 12, Item 1) from wheel and tire assembly
(Figure 12, Item 4) to be removed.
6.
Remove wheel and tire assembly (Figure 12, Item 4) from hub
(Figure 12, Item 2).
7.
If inner dual wheel and tire assembly is being replaced, remove inner wheel and tire assembly from hub (Figure 12, Item 2).
8.
If removed, install new inner dual wheel and tire assembly.
9.
Install outer dual wheel and tire assembly (Figure 12, Item 4) on hub
(Figure 12, Item 2) so inner valve stem is visible through hole in outer wheel
(Figure 12, Item 3).
NOTE
Wheel nuts on left side have left-hand threads and must be turned counterclockwise to tighten. Wheel stud nuts on right side have right-hand threads and must be turned clockwise to tighten. Studs and wheel nuts are stamped L (left) and R
(right).
10.
Using spare tire mounting wrench, install all wheel nuts (Figure 12, Item 1) on wheel (Figure 12, Item 4) snugly.
11.
Lower jack as instructed in Jacking Procedure.
12.
Tighten wheel nuts (Figure 12, Item 1) alternately as shown in figure 12 and notify your supervisor that wheel nuts (Figure 12, Item 1) need to be tightened to specified torque value.
13.
Release parking brake and remove wheel chocks (WP 0011).
0030-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
WHEEL AND TIRE REPLACEMENT - CONTINUED
1
2
0030
END OF TASK
4
3
Figure 12. Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence.
TM 9-2320-273-10
JACKING PROCEDURES
WARNING
The vehicle’s hydraulic jack is intended only for lifting and is not a safe support for performing maintenance. Do not get under vehicle unless it is properly supported by jack stands or wood blocks. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure parking brake is released and chocks are placed behind tires at opposite end of vehicle to be raised prior to jacking operations. Do not place chocks in front of tires at opposite end of vehicle to be raised. If vehicle is not free to roll during jacking operations, it may topple jack. Move chocks tight against tires after jacking and set parking brake.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
0030
OPERATING HYDRAULIC JACK
1.
To raise jack (Figure 13, Item 1), insert slotted end of two-piece handle
(Figure 13, Item 6) over release valve (Figure 13, Item 5), and turn release valve
(Figure 13, Item 5) right until seated.
2.
Insert two-piece handle (Figure 13, Item 6) in pump assembly socket
(Figure 13, Item 4), and operate pump assembly (Figure 13, Item 3) by moving handle (Figure 13, Item 6) up and down to raise jack cylinder (Figure 13, Item 2).
3.
To lower jack (Figure 13, Item 1), insert slotted end of two-piece handle
(Figure 13, Item 6) over release valve (Figure 13, Item 5), and slowly turn release valve (Figure 13, Item 5) left until jack cylinder (Figure 13, Item 2) lowers into jack (Figure 13, Item 1).
1
2
3
6
5
4
Figure 13. Operating Jack.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10 0030
FRONT AXLE JACK PLACEMENT (M915 AND M915A1)
1.
Place jack (Figure 14, Item 3) on ground or wood block if ground is soft.
2.
Position jack (Figure 14, Item 3) under first small leaf spring
(Figure 14, Item 6) just forward of front axle (Figure 14, Item 1).
3.
Turn adjustable ram (Figure 14, Item 5) left until it contacts first small leaf spring
(Figure 14, Item 6).
4.
Using jack handle (Figure 14, Item 4), raise jack (Figure 14, Item 3) until tire
(Figure 14, Item 2) clears ground.
1
2
4
5
6
3
Figure 14. Front Axle Jack Placement, M915 and M915A1.
END OF TASK
FRONT AXLE JACK PLACEMENT (M916 THROUGH M920)
1.
Place jack (Figure 15, Item 4) on ground or wood block if ground is soft.
2.
Position jack (Figure 15, Item 4) directly under front axle (Figure 15, Item 1) at center of front spring mounting pad (Figure 15, Item 3).
3.
Turn adjustable ram (Figure 15, Item 5) left until it contacts center of front spring mounting pad (Figure 15, Item 3).
4.
Raise jack (Figure 15, Item 4) until tire (Figure 15, Item 2) clears ground.
1
5
4
3
2
Figure 15. Front Axle Jack Placement, M916 through M920.
END OF TASK
TM 9-2320-273-10 0030
FORWARD-REAR OR REAR-REAR AXLE JACK PLACEMENT (M915 THROUGH
M920 AND M915A1)
1.
Place jack (Figure 16, Item 3) on ground or wood block if ground is soft.
2.
Position jack (Figure 16, Item 3) under walking beam (Figure 16, Item 1) inboard of walking beam trunion support (Figure 16, Item 5).
3.
Turn adjustable ram (Figure 16, Item 4) left until it contacts walking beam
(Figure 16, Item 1).
4.
Raise jack (Figure 16, Item 3) until tandem rear tires (Figure 16, Item 2) clear ground.
1
1
2
2
5
4
3
FORWARD-REAR AXLE
4
REAR-REAR AXLE
Figure 16. Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear Axle Jack Placement.
3
END OF TASK
5
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
BATTERY INSPECTION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WARNING
Battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful. Always wear safety goggles and rubber gloves when performing battery maintenance. Failure to comply may result in severe injury to personnel if acid contacts eyes or skin. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not smoke, have open flame, or make sparks when performing battery maintenance. Batteries may explode causing severe injury to personnel. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Remove all jewelry such as rings, bracelets, and identification tags. If jewelry comes in contact with battery terminals, a direct short can occur resulting in instant heating of jewelry or tools and damage to electrical system. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Check to make sure that the batteries are connected as shown in figure 1. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment or possible injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
GENERAL
M915 through M920 and M915A1 vehicles have four batteries connected in series-parallel that supply 12-volts to the electrical system and 24-volts to the starter motor.
0031-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0031
BATTERY INSPECTION
1.
Park vehicle, stop engine, apply parking brake and chock wheels (WP 0011).
2.
Disconnect two battery box latches (Figure 1, Item 3) from battery box cover
(Figure 1, Item 1).
3.
Remove battery box cover (Figure 1, Item 1) from battery box (Figure 1, Item 5) by pulling battery box cover (Figure 1, Item 1) from locating pins
(Figure 1, Item 2).
4.
Check charge level indicators (Figure 1, Item 4) for green color. If any charge level indicator (Figure 1, Item 4) is completely dark or yellow in color, notify your supervisor.
5.
Check the following connections. If connections are loose, notify your supervisor.
a.
Positive and negative battery posts.
b.
Jumper cable clamps-posts.
c.
All cable-clamp connections.
d.
Ground connection.
6.
Check battery box (Figure 1, Item 5) for signs of leaking batteries. If batteries are leaking, notify your supervisor.
7.
Align locating pins (Figure 1, Item 2) and install battery box cover
(Figure 1, Item 1) on battery box (Figure 1, Item 5).
8.
Secure battery box cover (Figure 1, Item 1) to battery box (Figure 1, Item 5) with two latches (Figure 1, Item 3).
9.
Release parking brake and remove wheel chock (WP 0010).
1 2
5
3
4
Figure 1. Battery Box, Battery, and Cables Inspection.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
FAN CLUTCH LOCKUP PROCEDURE (M915 THROUGH M920)
INITIAL SETUP:
Not Applicable
FAN CLUTCH LOCKUP
WARNING
Let radiator cool before performing this task. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
Using crescent wrench, remove bolt from fan adjusting bracket, located on right front side of engine.
2.
Manually rotate cooling fan until the hole in the cooling fan outer driven member aligns with any of the three holes in the cooling fan pulley.
3.
Insert bolt in aligned hole and tighten with crescent wrench.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0032-1/2 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
A/C AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
Vehicle parked on level ground (WP 0011).
Engine run switch in off position (WP 0011).
0033-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0033
REMOVAL
WARNING
If Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) exposure is suspected, personnel wearing protective equipment should handle all air cleaner media. Consult your
CBRN Officer or CBRN NCO for appropriate handling or disposal procedures. CBRN contaminated filters must be handled using adequate precautions and must be disposed of by trained personnel. Wear eye protection when removing
A/C air filter. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1.
Unlatch two clamps (Figure 1, Item 2) on evaporator assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
2.
Remove air filter (Figure 1, Item 3) from evaporator assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
END OF TASK
INSTALLATION
1.
Install air filter (Figure 1, Item 3) in evaporator assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
2.
Latch two clamps (Figure 1, Item 2) on evaporator assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
1
3
2
Figure 1. A/C Air Filter Replacement.
2
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
FM 9-207
References - Continued
GENERAL
This work package (WP) provides special instructions for maintaining vehicles under unusual conditions, which include extreme temperatures, humidity, fording, and difficult terrain. When operating under unusual conditions, it is especially important to keep the vehicle clean and adequately lubricated.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
1.
In extreme cold weather it is essential the vehicle is kept in top condition or it will be very difficult to get the vehicle started. Ensure all scheduled PMCS
(WP 0025) are carefully performed prior to operation, and be sure to notify
supervisor of any problems.
2.
Always give engine extra time to reach its operating temperature range of
165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through M920 or 180–200° F (82–93° C) for
M915A1.
3.
For detailed guidance on antifreeze protection, lubrication, electrical system service, and other maintenance requirements for extreme cold weather operations, refer to FM 9-207.
4.
The power steering system incorporates a cooler designed to reduce power steering fluid temperatures during normal or unusually warm conditions. In extremely cold weather, the cooler becomes restrictive and must be bypassed to prevent over pressure and possible rupture of the cooler. Notify supervisor to perform maintenance when 0° F (–18° C) or below is expected.
5.
For M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1, ensure procedure for
removing frost and ice from ballistic glass (WP 0016) is properly performed to
prevent damage to ballistic glass.
END OF TASK
0034-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0034
EXTREME HOT WEATHER
1.
Check engine coolant level frequently. Ensure coolant is maintained at proper
level (WP 0029). Check cooling system (radiator, hoses, and lines) for possible
leaks, and notify supervisor of any problems.
2.
The power steering system incorporates an oil cooler designed to reduce power steering fluid temperatures during normal and unusually warm conditions. Check oil level in power steering pump reservoir more often during periods of operation
in extreme hot weather (WP 0035).
3.
Check tires frequently to ensure each tire is inflated to the proper pressure
(WP 0003) (but be very careful not to over inflate tires). Wait until tires are cool
before adjusting tire pressures.
4.
For M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1, ensure procedures for operating in extreme heat with crew protection armor and air conditioning are
END OF TASK
EXTREME HUMID WEATHER
In hot humid weather, exposed metal surfaces can rust rapidly. Fungus can grow in the fuel tank and on canvas tarps, seats, and other equipment. Frequent inspection, cleaning, and lubrication are necessary to maintain vehicle readiness in humid conditions. Fuel filters and air reservoirs must be drained frequently due to increased condensation in fuel and air systems. Clean affected areas carefully and if necessary, notify supervisor of any needed parts.
END OF TASK
AFTER FORDING
1.
Always check for sand and mud after you have forded water with vehicle.
Thoroughly clean the vehicle. If water fording depth was 21 in. (53 cm) or more, notify supervisor and request after-fording maintenance for vehicle.
2.
If vehicle has been operated in salt water, let vehicle dry, then check it for evidence of salt accumulation. Use a clean damp cloth to immediately remove all salt accumulation.
3.
If salt water fording depth was 21 in. (53 cm) or more, notify supervisor and request vehicle needs after-fording maintenance as a result of operating vehicle in salt water.
END OF TASK
0034-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
AFTER OPERATING ON UNUSUAL TERRAIN
1.
After operating in mud, clean all accumulated mud from vehicle (WP 0026).
2.
Check and clean radiator if mud is stuck in cooling fins.
3.
If vehicle has been operated in sandy or dusty conditions, frequently check air cleaner, radiator cooling fins, and all system fluids. If any fluid is found to be contaminated with sand or dust, notify supervisor that vehicle needs special servicing after operation in sand or dust.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0034
0034-3/4 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
FM 9-207
References - Continued
WARNING
Accidental or intentional introduction of liquid contaminants into the environment is a violation of state, federal, and
military regulations. Refer to Army POL (WP 0001) for
information concerning storage, use, and disposal of these liquids. Failure to comply may result in damage to environment and health of personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Contact with any lubrication material called out in this work package may cause skin irritation. Use chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water.
Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least
15 minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages. DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Leaking or spilled lubrication material called out in this work package may cause a slip and fall hazard. When draining lubrication material, clean any leaking or spilled lubrication material immediately using suitable absorbent materials. Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials in accordance with local procedures and plans.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
0035-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0035
NOTE
These instructions are mandatory.
Use a drain pan to capture any draining fluids. Dispose of fluids in accordance with local policy and ordinances. Ensure all spills are cleaned up.
For lubrication instructions for the M917 w/ Dump Truck
Body, refer to your supervisor.
For lubrication instructions for the M918 w/ Bituminous
Distributor Body, refer to your supervisor.
For lubrication instructions for M919 w/ Concrete-Mobile
Mixer Body, refer to your supervisor.
1.
The lubrication procedures in this work package are to be performed on the vehicle daily under normal conditions in order to be mission-ready at all times.
2.
When the vehicle has been operated under unusual conditions, it may be necessary to perform procedures on vehicle more often. When in doubt, notify your supervisor.
3.
Localized lubrication figures 1, 2, and 3, identify lubrication points, required lubricants, and procedures performed by the operator/crew. Specific notes and illustrations and any special lubrication instructions are contained in the
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS section.
0035-2
TM 9-2320-273-10 0035
MILITARY SYMBOLS FOR LUBRICANTS AND INTERVALS
LUBRICANT SYMBOLS
ATF .......................................................................................
Fluid, Transmission (Dexron®)
GAA ..................................................................................
Grease, Automotive and Artillery
GO ................................................................................
Lubrication Oil, Gear, Multipurpose
OEA .............................
Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine, Tactical Services
OE/HDO .......................
Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine, Tactical Service
LUBRICANT INTERVALS
D ...........................................................................................................................................
Daily
W ......................................................................................................................................
Weekly
1 ................................................
1,000 mi (1,609 km) or 1 month, whichever occurs first
3 ..............................................
6 ..............................................
12 .....................................
3,000 mi (4,828 km) or 3 months, whichever occurs first
6,000 mi (9,656 km) or 6 months, whichever occurs first
12,000 mi (19,308 km) or 12 months, whichever occurs first
24 .....................................
24,000 mi (38,624 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first
0035-3
TM 9-2320-273-10 0035
CLEANING
WARNING
Cleaning solvent is combustible. DO NOT use or store near heat, sparks, flame, or other ignition sources. Use mechanical ventilation whenever product is used in a confined space, heated above ambient temperatures, or agitated. Keep container sealed when not in use. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Contact with cleaning solvent may cause skin irritation. Use chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides.
Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages.
DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
LUBRICANTS
NOTE
For arctic operation lubrication instructions, refer to
FM 9-207, Operations and Maintenance of Ordnance
Materiel in Cold Weather.
Perform lubrication after fording operations.
The following list of capacities should be used as a guide only. Do not overfill.
APPLICATION CAPACITY
Table 1. Use of Lubricants
.
LUBRICANT EXPECTED
TEMPERATURE
Engine
(M915 through
M920)
Engine
(M915A1)
Transmission
(M915 through
M920)
46 qt (43.5 L) with both filters
OE/HDO 30
OE/HDO 10
OEA (Arctic Grade) Oil
44 qt (41.6 L) OE/HDO 30
OE/HDO 10
OEA (Arctic Grade) Oil
22 qt (20.8 L) OE/HDO 30
OE/HDO 10
OEA (Arctic Grade) Oil
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -15° F (+4 to -26° C)
0 to +65° F (-18 to +18° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
TM 9-2320-273-10 0035
Differential
Rear-Rear
(M915 and
M915A1)
Differential
Rear-Rear
(M916 through
M920)
Transfer Case
(M916 through
M920)
Power Steering
(M916 through
M920 and
M915A1)
Winch Drum
(M916 through
M920)
Winch
Reservoir
(M916 through
M920)
GAA - Grease
Automotive and Artillery
APPLICATION CAPACITY
Transmission
(M915A1)
Differential
Front
(M916 through
M920)
Differential
Forward-Rear
(M915)
Differential
Forward-Rear
(M916 through
M920)
Differential
Forward-Rear
(M915A1)
32 qt (30.3 L) with external filter
Table 1. Use of Lubricants - Continued.
27 pt (12.8 L)
40 pt (18.9 L)
LUBRICANT
OE/HDO 30
OE/HDO 10
OEA (Arctic Grade) Oil
GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
34 pt (16.1 L) GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
38 pt (18.0 L) GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
36 pt (17.0 L) GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
28 pt (13.2 L) GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
5 qt (4.7 L) GO 80/90
GO 80/90
GO 75
2 qt (1.9 L) OE/HDO 10 or OEA
(Arctic Grade) Dexron®
ATF is preferred
EXPECTED
TEMPERATURE
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -15° F (+4 to -26° C)
0 to +65° F (-18 to +18° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -15° F (+4 to -26° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
All Temperatures
5 qt (4.7 L)
As Required
GO 80/90
GO 80/90
GO 75
42 gal (159 L) OE/HDO 10
OE/HDO 10
OEA (Arctic Grade) Oil
GAA
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
—
0035-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
LUBRICATION LOCATIONS
INTERVAL LUBRICANT PROCEDURE
D
OE/HDO 10
OEA
Power Steering
Pump Level
Check and Fill
(See note 1)
D GO
Front Wheel
Bearings Level
Check and Fill
(M915A1)
(See note 2)
D
Fuel
Filter/Water
Separator Drain
Moisture
(See note 3)
D OE/HDO
Engine Oil
Level
Check and Fill
(See note 4)
D
1
OE/HDO,
OEA
Transmission
Oil Level Check and Fill
(See note 5)
GAA
Fifth Wheel
Lubrication
(See note 6)
W
OE/HDO 10
Pintle Hook
Lubrication
(See note 8)
M915 and M915A1
Figure 1. Lubrication Locations
(M915 and M915A1).
0035
TM 9-2320-273-10
LUBRICATION LOCATIONS - CONTINUED
INTERVAL LUBRICANT PROCEDURE
D
OE/HDO 10
OEA
Power Steering
Pump Level
Check and Fill
(See note 1)
D
Fuel
Filter/Water
Separator Drain
Moisture
(See note 3)
D OE/HDO
Engine Oil
Level
Check and Fill
(See note 4)
0035
D
OE/HDO,
OEA
Transmission
Oil Level Check and Fill
(See note 5)
D
OE/HDO,
OEA
Winch Reservoir
(M916) Level
Check and Fill
(See note 7)
1 GAA
Fifth Wheel
(M916)
Lubrication
(See note 6)
W
M916 and M918
Figure 2. Lubrication Locations
(M916 and M918).
OE/HDO 10
Pintle Hook
Lubrication
(M916)
(See note 8)
TM 9-2320-273-10
LUBRICATION LOCATIONS - CONTINUED
INTERVAL LUBRICANT PROCEDURE
D
OE/HDO 10
OEA
Power Steering
Pump Level
Check and Fill
(See note 1)
D
Fuel
Filter/Water
Separator Drain
Moisture
(See note 3)
D OE/HDO
Engine Oil
Level
Check and Fill
(See note 4)
D
OE/HDO,
OEA
Transmission
Oil
Level Check and Fill
(See note 5)
D
1
OE/HDO,
OEA
Winch Reservoir
(M920)
Level Check and Fill
(See note 7)
GAA
Fifth Wheel
(M920)
Lubrication
(See note 6)
W
M917, M919, and M920
Figure 3. Lubrication Locations
(M917, M919, and M920).
OE/HDO-
10
Pintle Hook
Lubrication
(M917, M920)
(See note 8)
0035
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS
DIPSTICK
AND CAP
0035
~
DIPSTICK
AND CAP
POWER
STEERING
PUMP
POWER
STEERING
PUMP
M915 THROUGH M920
M915A1
Figure 4. Power Steering Pump Level Check and Fill.
NOTE 1 - Power Steering Pump Level Check and Fill
Check daily with fluid hot and engine off. Wipe all dirt and grease from around dipstick and cap assembly, remove cap, and check fluid level (Figure 4). Add fluid as necessary to bring fluid level on dipstick to full mark. If fluid contamination is suspected, notify your supervisor.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
DRAIN AND
FILL PLUG
FULL LINE
0035
DRAIN PLUG
TYPE 1 HUB
FILL PLUG
FULL LINE
TYPE 2 HUB
Figure 5. Front Wheel Bearing Level Check and Fill
(M915A1).
NOTE 2 - Front Wheel Bearing Level Check and Fill (M915A1)
Check fluid level daily. Fluid should be level with full line (Figure 5). Add fluid as necessary to bring fluid level to full line. If fluid contamination is suspected, notify your supervisor.
FUEL
FILTER
DRAIN COCK
FUEL
FILTER
DRAIN COCK
M915
THROUGH
M920 M915A1
Figure 6. Fuel Filter/Water Separator Drain Moisture.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
NOTE 3 - Fuel Filter/Water Separator Drain Moisture
WARNING
Do not perform fuel filter/water separator draining while smoking or near fire, flames, or sparks. Fuel may ignite causing injury or death to personnel and/or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Accidental or intentional introduction of liquid contaminants into the environment is a violation of state, federal, and
military regulations. Refer to Army POL (WP 0001) for
information concerning storage, use, and disposal of these liquids. Failure to comply may result in damage to environment and health of personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Do not overtighten drain cock. Failure to comply may result in damage to drain cock and fuel leaks.
NOTE
If one quart or more of fuel must be drained from fuel filter/water separator before fuel is clear, notify your supervisor.
Park vehicle on level ground with the parking brake applied.
0035
Wipe dirt and oil from drain cock (Figure 6). With engine running and transmission in neutral, open drain cock on bottom of fuel filter/water separator and drain fuel and any moisture into suitable container until fuel runs clear. Close drain cock securely and check for leaks. Notify your supervisor for disposal of fuel.
0035-11
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
OIL LEVEL
GAUGE
OIL FILL
CAP
0035
Figure 7. Engine Oil Level Check and Fill.
NOTE 4 - Engine Oil Level Check and Fill
CAUTION
Do not overfill oil in engine. Failure to comply may cause excess oil consumption or damage to engine.
NOTE
Shut engine off and let stand two minutes prior to oil level check.
Wipe dirt and oil from around dipstick (Figure 7). Using dipstick, check engine oil level. Engine oil level should be between the low and high marks. If engine oil is below the low mark, clean and remove oil fill cap and add engine oil to bring level to full mark on level gauge. If engine has used one quart or more of oil in 100 miles (161 km), notify your supervisor.
TRANSMISSION
DIPSTICK
TRANSMISSION
FILL TUBE
Figure 8. Transmission Level Check and Fill.
BATTERY BOX
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
0035
NOTE 5 - Transmission Oil Level Check and Fill
CAUTION
Do not overfill transmission. Overfilling may cause aeration of the transmission oil (milky appearance). If overfilling occurs, drain transmission oil to bring to proper level.
If fluid level is low, bring to proper level with same oil grade or type. Mixing of oil grade or type may cause damage to internal transmission components.
NOTE
Park vehicle on level ground with the parking brake applied.
1.
Start the engine and shift the transmission through all drive ranges to fill the clutch cavities and oil passages, then shift to neutral.
2.
Run the engine for at least one minute at 1,000–1,200 rpm to clear the system of air.
Hot Oil Check (HOT RUN band)
Be sure the temperature of the transmission has reached 120° F (49° C) or above. With the engine idling and the transmission in NEUTRAL, remove the dipstick (Figure 8) from the oil fill tube and check the oil level. If the oil registers in the HOT RUN band, the quantity of oil in the transmission is safe for operating the vehicle. If it registers on or below the bottom line of the HOT RUN band, add required amount of oil necessary to bring the oil level to the middle of the HOT RUN band (approximately one quart of oil is required to move the oil level from the bottom line of the HOT RUN band to the middle of the HOT RUN band).
Cold Oil Check (COLD RUN band)
Run the engine for one minute at 1,000 rpm to charge the system. With the transmission oil temperature gauge reading below 120° F (49° C), and the engine idling with the transmission in NEUTRAL, remove the dipstick (Figure 8) from the oil filler tube and check the oil level. If the oil level registers in the COLD RUN band the quantity of oil in the transmission is safe for operating the vehicle. If the oil level registers on or below the bottom line of the COLD RUN band, add the required amount of oil necessary to bring the oil level to the middle of the COLD RUN band
(approximately one quart of oil is required to move the oil level from the bottom line of the COLD RUN band to the middle of the COLD RUN band).
0035-13
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
LATCH
MECHANISM
~
WHEEL PLATE
SURFACE
~
LATCH
MECHANISM
0035
SLIDING FIFTH
WHEEL BRACKET
M915, M916, M920
Figure 9. Fifth Wheel Lubrication
(M915, M916, M920, and M915A1).
M915A1
NOTE 6 - Fifth Wheel Lubrication (M915, M916, M920, and M915A1)
1.
Latch Mechanism - Apply a liberal coat of GAA lubricant to the top and bottom latch mechanisms (Figure 9).
2.
Wheel Plate Surface - Apply a liberal amount of GAA lubricant to the wheel plate surface (Figure 9).
3.
Sliding Fifth Wheel Bracket (M915A1) - Apply a film of OE/HDO 10 lubricant on the rack and slide path of the bracket on the sliding fifth wheel (Figure 9).
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
FILL CAP
UPPER SIGHT
GLASS
0035
WINCH HYDRAULIC
RESERVOIR
Figure 10. Winch Reservoir Level Check and Fill
(M916 and M920).
WARNING
Winch system retains some pressure even when not in use.
Wear goggles/face shield when opening winch reservoir.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE 7 - Winch Reservoir Level Check and Fill (M916 and M920)
Check winch reservoir, oil should be visible in upper sight glass (Figure 10). If oil is not visible in upper sight glass, wipe any dirt or oil from fill cap and remove fill cap slowly to allow any residual pressure to release from system. Add necessary quantity of the proper oil to bring oil level to upper sight glass.
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
LATCH
COTTER
PIN
Figure 11. Pintle Hook Lubrication
(M915, M916, M917, M920, and M915A1).
NOTE 8 - Pintle Hook Lubrication
(M915, M916, M917, M920, and M915A1)
1.
Check latch for looseness.
2.
Lubricate cotter pin and latch (Figure 11) with OE/HDO 10.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0035
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 6
SUPPORTING INFORMATION
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
REFERENCES
SCOPE
This work package lists all field manuals, forms, technical manuals, and miscellaneous publications referenced in this manual.
PUBLICATIONS INDEX
The following indexes should be consulted frequently for the latest changes or revisions and for new publications relating to material covered in this manual.
DA Pam 25-30 Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms
FORMS
The following forms pertain to this manual. See DA Pam 25-30 for index of blank forms.
See DA Pam 750-8, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users
Manual, for instructions on the use of maintenance forms pertaining to this manual.
DA Pam 738-751
DA Pam 750-8
Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management Systems - Aviation (TAMMS-A)
The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS)
Users Manual
DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to DA Publications and Blank
Forms
DA Form 2404/5988-E Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet
DA Form 5504
SF 368
Maintenance Request Form
Product Quality Deficiency Report
FIELD MANUALS
FM 4-25.11
FM 9-207
FM 20-22
FM 21-305
FM 55-30
First Aid
Operations and Maintenance of Ordnance Material in Cold
Weather
Vehicle Recovery Operations
Manual for the Wheeled Vehicle Driver
Army Motor Transport Units and Operations
TECHNICAL MANUALS
TM 3-4230-204-12&P Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual for
Decontaminating Apparatus, Portable, ABC-M11
TM 5-3805-274-13&P Operator and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL) for M917 Truck Body
TM 5-3895-371-10 Operator Manual for M918 Bituminous Distributor Truck
Body
0036-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
TECHNICAL MANUALS - CONTINUED
0036
TM 5-3895-372-10
TM 750-244-6
TM 746-10
TM 9-2320-273-23-1
TM 9-2320-273-23-2
TM 9-2320-273-23-3
Operator Manual for M919 Concrete Mobile Mixer Truck
Body
Procedures for Destruction of Tank-Automotive Equipment to Prevent Enemy Use
Marking, Packaging, and Shipment of Supplies and
Equipment: General Packaging Instructions for Field Use
Field Maintenance Manual for M915, M915P1, M915A1,
M915A1P1, M916, M916P1, M920, M920P1 Truck Tractor and Chassis for M917, M917P1, M918, and M919
Field Maintenance Manual for M915, M915P1, M915A1,
M915A1P1, M916, M916P1, M920, M920P1 Truck Tractor and Chassis for M917, M917P1, M918, and M919
Field Maintenance Manual for M915, M915P1, M915A1,
M915A1P1, M916, M916P1, M920, M920P1 Truck Tractor and Chassis for M917, M917P1, M918, and M919
MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS
AR 70-1
AR 385-55
AR 700-138
CTA 8-100
CTA 50-909
CTA 50-970
Army Acquisition Policy
Prevention of Motor Vehicle Accidents
Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability
Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items
Field and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment
Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V Repair
Parts, and Heraldic Items)
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0036-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI)
AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS
INTRODUCTION
SCOPE
This work package lists COEI and BII for the M915, M915A1, M916, M917, M918,
M919, and M920 to help you inventory items for safe and efficient operation of the equipment.
GENERAL
NOTE
There is no authorized COEI for M915, M915A1, M916,
M917, M918, M919, or M920 vehicles.
There is no authorized COEI or BII for M915P1,
M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, or M920P1 vehicles.
The COEI and BII information is divided into the following lists:
Components of End Item (COEI). This list is for information purposes only and is not authority to requisition replacements. These items are part of the vehicle. As part of the end item, these items must be with the end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts. Items of COEI are removed and separately packaged for transportation or shipment only when necessary. Illustrations are furnished to help you find and identify the items.
Basic Issue Items (BII). These essential items are required to place the vehicle in operation, operate it, and do emergency repairs. Although shipped separately packaged,
BII must be with the vehicle during operation and when it is transferred between property accounts. Listing these items is your authority to request/requisition them for replacement based on authorization of the end item by the TOE/MTOE. Illustrations are furnished to help you find and identify the items.
0037-1
TM 9-2320-273-10 0037
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE COEI LIST AND BII LIST
Column (1) Item Number. Gives you the reference number of the item listed.
Column (2) National Stock Number (NSN). Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning purposes.
Column (3) Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). Identifies the Federal item name (in all capital letters) followed by a minimum description when needed. The stowage location of COEI and BII is also included in this column. The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code
(CAGEC) (in parentheses).
Column (4) Usable On Code. When applicable, gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for different models of equipment. These codes are identified below:
Code Used On
U21
U2A
U22
U23
U24
U25
U26
Model M915
Model M915A1
Model M916
Model M917
Model M918
Model M919
Model M920
Column (5) U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I). Indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per the National Stock Number shown in column (2).
Column (6) Qty Rqr. Indicates the quantity required.
0037-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS
1
Table 1. Basic Issue Items (BII).
2
3
0037
6
4
5
(1)
Item
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
(2)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
(3)
2540-00-670-2459 BAG ASSEMBLY, PAMPHLET (in tool box under passenger seat)
11676920 (19207)
5140-00-473-6256 BAG, TOOL (in tool box under passenger seat)
5140-00-473-6256 (64067)
7510-00-889-3494
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
BINDER, LOOSE-LEAF (in tool box under passenger seat)
11677003 (19207)
5510-00-491-0307 BLOCK, WOOD (in tool box under passenger seat)
CPR103023-2 (34623)
5995-01-082-6214 CABLE ASSEMBLY (in tool box under passenger seat)
BE27451 (06721)
6150-01-022-6004 CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER (in tool box under passenger seat)
11682336-1 (19207)
(4)
Usable
On
Code
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U22
Thru
U26
U2A
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
(5)
U/I
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
(6)
Qty
Rqr.
1
1
1
1
1
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
EA 1
TM 9-2320-273-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS -
CONTINUED
0037
Table 2. Basic Issue Items (BII).
1
2 4
3
6
5
(1)
Item
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
(2)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
6150-01-148-6944
(3)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL
PURPOSE (in tool box under passenger seat)
32-2051 (1F3G5)
4210-00-270-4512 EXTINGUISHER, FIRE (in rear of tool box)
SCD539482 (80063)
4210-00-775-0127 EXTINGUISHER, FIRE (in rear of tool box)
AA393-A2B (80244)
6545-00-922-1200 FIRST AID KIT, GENERAL PURPOSE
(on front of tool box)
11677011 (19207)
4910-01-003-9599 GAGE, TIRE PRESSURE,
SELF-CONTAINED (in tool box under passenger seat)
61-J2-1506 (94894)
5120-01-084-3298 HANDLE, WRENCH (in tool box under passenger seat)
967556 (34623)
(4)
Usable
On
Code
U21,
U22,
U26
(5)
U/I
EA
(6)
Qty
Rqr.
1
U2A
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
1
1
1
1
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS -
CONTINUED
0037
Table 3. Basic Issue Items (BII).
1
2 4
3
6
5
(1)
Item
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
(2)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
6220-01-327-3225 LAMP UNIT, VEHICULAR (in tool box under passenger seat)
1401152 (78422)
(3)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
4720-01-119-5206 HOSE ASSEMBLY (in tool box under passenger seat)
MB145-20065 (34623)
4720-00-328-5422 HOSE ASSEMBLY, PNEUMATIC, TIRE
INFLATOR, 40 FT LONG, QUICK
DISCONNECT (in tool box under passenger seat)
11624422-7 (19207)
4910-01-298-5479 INFLATOR-GAGE, PNEUMATIC TIRE,
10–120 psi (in tool box under passenger seat)
64A2-1506 (94894)
5120-00-224-7330 JACK, HYD, 12 TON (in tool box)
5120-00-224-7330 (80244)
5120-00-188-1788 JACK, HYD, 20 TON (in tool box)
5120-00-188-1788 (80244)
(4)
Usable
On
Code
U2A
(5)
U/I
EA
(6)
Qty
Rqr.
1
U21
Thru
U26
U2A
U2A &
U21
U22
Thru
U26
U22 &
U26
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
1
1
1
1
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS -
CONTINUED
0037
1 2
Table 4. Basic Issue Items (BII).
3
6
5
4
(1)
Item
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
(2)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
5120-00-223-7397
9905-00-148-9546
5120-00-224-7375
REFLECTOR SET, HIGHWAY
WARNING, TRIANGULAR (in tool box under passenger seat)
11669000 (19207)
5120-00-234-8913 SCREWDRIVER, CROSS TIP, 4-in. (in tool box under passenger seat)
B107.30 (05047)
(3)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
PLIERS, SLIP JOINT (in tool box under passenger seat)
B107.500 (05047)
SCREWDRIVER, CROSS TIP, 8-in. (in tool box under passenger seat)
B107.30 (05047)
5120-00-222-8852 SCREWDRIVER, FLAT TIP, 4-in. (in tool box under passenger seat)
B107.600 (05047)
5120-00-237-6985 SCREWDRIVER, FLAT TIP, 8-in. (in tool box under passenger seat)
B107.600 (05047)
(4)
Usable
On
Code
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U21
Thru
U26
(5)
U/I
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
(6)
Qty
Rqr.
1
1
1
1
1
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS -
CONTINUED
0037
Table 5. Basic Issue Items (BII).
1
2
3
7
6
4
(1)
Item
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(2)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
(3)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
5120-01-367-3746 SCREWDRIVER, FLAT TIP (in tool box under passenger seat)
B107.15 (05047)
N/A TECHNICAL MANUAL, OPERATOR’S
(in glove box)
TM 9-2320-273-10
5995-01-082-3172 WIRING HARNESS (in tool box under passenger seat)
MA365-20000 (34623)
5120-00-316-9217 WRENCH, SOCKET (in tool box under passenger seat)
GGG-W-644 (81348)
5120-01-088-2471 WRENCH, WHEEL STUD NUT (in tool box under passenger seat)
41-W-3838-40 (19207)
5120-00-240-5328 WRENCH, ADJUSTABLE, 8-in. (in tool box under passenger seat)
B107.8 (05047)
5120-00-264-3796 WRENCH, ADJUSTABLE, 12-in. (in tool bag under passenger seat)
B107.8 (05047)
5
(4)
Usable
On
Code
U2A
(5)
U/I
(6)
Qty
Rqr.
EA 1
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21,
U22 &
U26
U21
Thru
U26
U2A
EA
EA
EA
EA
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
EA
EA
1
1
1
1
1
1
END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (AAL)
INTRODUCTION
SCOPE
This work package lists additional items authorized for the support of the M915,
M915A1, M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920.
GENERAL
This list identifies items that do not have to accompany models M915, M915A1,
M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920 and that do not have to be turned in with it.
These items are all authorized to you by CTA, MTOE, TDA, or JTA.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE AAL
Column (1) National Stock Number (NSN). Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning purposes.
Column (2) Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). Identifies the Federal item name (in all capital letters) followed by a minimum description when needed. The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity
Code (CAGEC) (in parentheses).
Column (3) Usable On Code. When applicable, gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for different models of equipment. These codes are identified below:
Code
U21
U2A
U22
U23
U24
U25
U26
Used on
Model M915
Model M915A1
Model M916
Model M917
Model M918
Model M919
Model M920
Column (4) U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I). Indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per the National Stock Number shown in column (1).
Column (5) Qty Recm. Indicates the quantity recommended.
0038-1
(1)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 1. Additional Authorization List (AAL).
(2)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
(3)
Usable
On Code
5940-00-549-6583
5940-00-549-6581
5110-00-293-2336
5610-00-491-0307
5510-00-491-0306
2540-00-933-9034
2540-00-933-6935
5340-01-267-2908
4730-00-595-0083
2920-00-738-6272
4230-00-720-1618
5120-00-288-6574
4720-00-740-9662
6240-00-783-2853
5120-00-243-2395
5315-00-539-9174
5315-00-350-4326
5120-00-293-3336
2540-01-267-2912
2540-00-378-2012
ADAPTER, BATTERY TERMINAL
AA-52425-2 (58536)
ADAPTER, BATTERY TERMINAL MS
A-A-524325-1 (58536)
AX: SINGLE-BIT 4-16-HD-WT 36.5 IN. TO 36.5
IN. LG. 6150925 (19207)
BLOCK: WOOD, 4x8x9 in.
CPR103023-2 (34623)
BLOCK: WOOD, 7x8x9 in.
CPR103023-1 (19207)
CHAIN ASSEMBLY: TIRE
A-A-52507-2245 (58536)
CHAIN ASSEMBLY: TIRE
MS500055-23 (96906)
CLEVIS, ROD END 12322662 (19207)
COUPLING HALF, QUICK DISCONNECT
A52484-1 (58536)
COVER, BATTERY TERMINAL
10942521 (19207)
DECONTAMINATING APPARATUS,
MILD51048 (81349)
HANDLE: MATTOCK-PICK, 36.5 in. to 36.5 in. lg.
5120-00-288-6574 (80244)
HOSE ASSEMBLY, NONMETALLIC
MS39325-9-126-B (96906)
LAMP, INCANDESCENT, 12 V BEACON
A7079B12 (72914)
MATTOCK: PICK-TYPE, 5 LB, W/O HANDLE
5120-00-243-2395 (80244)
PIN, GROOVE, HEADED 10929861 (19207)
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26
U2A
PIN, LOCK 5213744 (19207)
SHOVEL: HAND RD-PT, D-HDL, SHORT SIZE 2
5120-00-293-3336 (80244)
TOWBAR, MEDIUM DUTY 8383002 (19207)
TOWBAR, MOTOR VEHICLE 8383802 (19207) composed of: 12322662, 10929861, and 5213744
END OF WORK PACKAGE
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U2A
U21 thru
U26, U2A
0038
(4)
U/I
(5)
Qty
Recm.
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
PR
PR
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
1
7
2
2
1
8
1
2
2
4
4
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST
INTRODUCTION
SCOPE
This work package lists expendable and durable items that you will need to operate and maintain the M915, M915A1, M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920. This list is for information only and is not authority to requisition the listed items. These items are authorized to you by CTA 50-970, Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class
V Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items), CTA 50-909, Field and Garrison Furnishings and
Equipment or CTA 8-100, Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE EXPENDABLE/DURABLE ITEMS LIST
Column (1) Item Number. This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is referenced in the narrative instructions to identify the item (e.g., Use Antifreeze
Column (2) Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item (C = Crew).
Column (3) National Stock Number (NSN). This is the NSN assigned to the item which you can use to requisition it.
Column (4) Item Name, Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). This column provides the other information you need to identify the item. The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC)
(in parentheses).
Column (5) U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I) code shows the physical measurement or count of an item, such as gallon, dozen, gross, etc.
0039-1
(1)
Item
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TM 9-2320-273-10
(2)
Level
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List.
(3)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
8040-00-902-3871
8040-00-865-8991
6850-01-464-9096
6850-01-464-9125
6850-01-464-9137
6850-01-464-9152
9150-00-190-0932
9150-00-231-9071
9150-01-102-9455
6850-01-474-2318
6850-01-474-2320
6850-01-474-2321
6850-00-926-2275
8030-00-251-3980
7930-00-282-9699
(4)
Item Name, Description, Part
Number/(CAGEC)
ADHESIVE
MIL-A-46106 (81349)
3 oz
12 oz
ANTIFREEZE, Arctic, type IP, ethylene glycol, prediluted
(60/40%), recycled engine coolant
A-A-52624 (58536)
55 gal
ANTIFREEZE, GLYCOL,
INHIBITED
A-A-52624 (58536)
1 gal
5 gal
55 gal
BRAKE FLUID, AUTOMOTIVE
J 1703 (81343)
1 pt
1 gal
BRAKE FLUID, AUTOMOTIVE,
Arctic type
MIL-PRF-46176 (81349)
1 gal
CLEANING COMPOUND, Solvent, type III
MIL-PRF-680 (81349)
1 gal
5 gal
55 gal
CLEANING COMPOUND,
WINDSHIELD
0854-000 (OFTT5)
16 oz
COMPOUND, ANTISEIZE
MIL-PRF-907 (81349)
1 Pound Can
DETERGENT, GENERAL
PURPOSE LIQUID
7930-00-282-9699 (83421)
1 gal
0039
(5)
U/I
KT
KT
DR
GL
CO
DR
PT
GL
GL
GL
BX
DR
BX
LB
BX
(1)
Item
Number
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
TM 9-2320-273-10
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List - Continued.
(2)
Level
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
(3)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
9150-00-286-5282
9150-00-286-5284
9150-00-286-5285
9150-00-286-5283
9140-00-286-5287
9140-00-286-5288
9140-00-286-5289
9140-00-286-5286
9140-00-286-5295
9140-00-286-5296
9140-00-286-5297
9140-00-286-5294
9150-01-197-7688
9150-01-197-7693
9150-01-197-7690
9150-01-197-7689
9150-01-197-7692
9150-01-197-7691
9150-00-698-2382
9150-00-657-4959
9150-00-935-9807
6810-01-075-5546
9150-00-189-6727
9150-00-186-6668
9150-00-191-2772
9150-01-496-1962
(4)
Item Name, Description, Part
Number/(CAGEC)
DIESEL FUEL, ARCTIC
VVF800GRADEDFAAR (81348)
5 gal
55 gal, 16 gauge drum
55 gal, 18 gauge drum bulk
DIESEL FUEL, DF-1 Regular
ASTM D 975 (81346)
5 gal
55 gal, 16 gauge drum
55 gal, 18 gauge drum bulk
DIESEL FUEL, DF-2 Regular
ASTM D 975 (81346)
5 gal
55 gal, 16 gauge drum
55 gal, 18 gauge drum bulk
GREASE, AUTOMOTIVE AND
ARTILLERY
M-10924-A (81349) 2-1/4 oz
M-10924-B (81349) 14 oz
M-10924-C (81349) 1-3/4 lb
M-10924-D (81349) 6-1/2 lb
M-10924-E (81349) 35 lb
M-10924-F (81349) 120 lb
HYDRAULIC FLUID,
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Dexron VI QT (24617) 1 qt
Dexron VI 5GL (24617) 5 gal
HYDRAULIC FLUID,
PETROLEUM BASE,
PRESERVATIVE
AVERX904 (77988)
1 qt
ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL
7618-19-4 (53390)
4 oz
LUBRICATING OIL, ENGINE,
OE/HDO 10
M2104-1-10W (81349) 1 qt
M2104-3-10W (81349) 5 gal
M2104-4-10W (81349) 55 gal
MIL-PRF-2104 (81349) bulk
0039-3
0039
(5)
U/I
QT
BT
QT
CN
DR
GL
CN
DR
DR
GL
CN
DR
DR
GL
CN
DR
DR
GL
TU
CA
CN
CN
CN
DR
QT
CN
TM 9-2320-273-10
(1)
Item
Number
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List - Continued.
(2)
Level
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
(3)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
9150-00-186-6681
9150-00-188-9858
9150-00-189-6729
9150-00-183-7808
9150-00-188-9865
9150-00-186-6699
9150-01-413-6892
9150-01-230-9748
9150-00-402-4478
9150-00-402-2372
9150-00-491-7197
9150-00-234-5197
9150-01-035-5390
9150-01-035-5391
9150-00-257-5440
9150-00-257-5443
9150-01-035-5393
7920-00-205-1711
8030-00-252-3391
(4)
Item Name, Description, Part
Number/(CAGEC)
LUBRICATING OIL, ENGINE,
OE/HDO 30
M2104-1-30W (81349) 1 qt
M2104-3-30W (81349) 5 gal
M2104-4-30W (81349) 55 gal
M2104-2-30W (81349) bulk
LUBRICATING OIL, ENGINE,
OE/HDO 50
MIL-L-2104 (81349)
5 gal
LUBRICATING OIL, ENGINE,
Multi-viscosity 10W/30 Grade
MIL-L-46152 (81349) 1 qt
J2362 (13873) 5 gal
J2362 (81343) 55 gal
LUBRICATING OIL, ENGINE
OEA ICE, Subzero
MIL-L-46167 (81349) 1 qt
MIL-PRF-46167 (81349) 5 gal
MIL-PRF-46167 (81349) 55 gal
LUBRICATING OIL, EXPOSED
GEAR
VVL751 (81348)
5 lb
LUBRICATING OIL, EXPOSED
GEAR, Subzero GOS
M2105-1-75W (81349) 1 qt
M2105-3-75W (81349) 5 gal
MILL10324 (81349) 5 gal
MILL10324 (81349) 55 gal
LUBRICATING OIL, GEAR
J2360 (81343)
5 gal
RAG, WIPING
7920-00-205-1711 (80244)
50 Pound Bale
SEALING COMPOUND, TYPE 2
MIL-S-45180 (81349)
11 oz
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0039
(5)
U/I
QT
CN
DR
GL
CN
QT
CO
DR
QT
CN
DR
CN
QT
CN
CN
DR
CN
BE
TU
0039-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
Subject WP Sequence No. - Page No.
A
A/C Air Filter Replacement .................................................................................
WP 0033-1
Accessories .........................................................................................................
WP 0003-13
Adding Coolant to Partially Empty Cooling System .........................................
WP 0029-6
Additional Authorization List (AAL) ..................................................................
WP 0038-1
Air Conditioning ..................................................................................................
WP 0013-8
Assembly and Preparation for Use ......................................................................
WP 0006-1
B
Basic Driving Guidelines .....................................................................................
WP 0010-8
Basic Issue Items (BII) List .................................................................................
WP 0037-3
Battery Inspection ................................................................................................
WP 0031-1
C
Capacities .............................................................................................................
WP 0003-5
Chocking Trailer Wheels Before Coupling .........................................................
WP 0012-6
Chocking Trailer Wheels Before Uncoupling ...................................................
WP 0012-11
Cleaning Ballistic Glass .......................................................................................
WP 0027-1
Cleaning Vehicle ..................................................................................................
WP 0026-1
Cold Weather Starting Below +32° F (0° C) ......................................................
WP 0009-1
Companion Seat Adjustment (M915A1) .............................................................
WP 0007-4
Components of End Item (COEI) and Basic Issue Items (BII) Lists ................
WP 0037-1
Controls and Indicators ........................................................................................
WP 0005-1
Cooling System Service .......................................................................................
WP 0029-1
Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) ...........................................................
WP 0001-2
Coupling and Connecting Tractor to Trailer .......................................................
WP 0012-8
Crew Protection Kit Function ..............................................................................
WP 0004-6
D
Decals and Instruction Plates ...............................................................................
WP 0014-1
Description and Use of Operator Controls and Indicators .................................
WP 0005-1
Destruction of Army Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use .......................................
WP 0001-3
Difference Between Models .................................................................................
WP 0003-1
Dimensions ...........................................................................................................
WP 0003-4
Draining Cooling System .....................................................................................
WP 0029-2
Driveline Chassis and Cab ...................................................................................
WP 0003-7
Driver Seat Adjustment ........................................................................................
WP 0007-2
Driving Guidelines for Vehicles Equipped with Crew Protection Kit .............
WP 0010-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
INDEX - CONTINUED
Subject WP Sequence No. - Page No.
E
Efficient and Economical Driving Techniques (M915 through M920) ............
WP 0010-16
Efficient and Economical Driving Techniques (M915A1) ................................
WP 0010-20
Engaging Power Take-Off (PTO) for Winch Operation
(M916 and M920) .....................................................................................
WP 0012-18
Engine and Transmission Function .....................................................................
WP 0004-4
Equipment Characteristics, Capabilities, and Features .......................................
WP 0002-1
Equipment Description .........................................................................................
WP 0002-1
Equipment Data ....................................................................................................
WP 0003-1
Escape Hatch ........................................................................................................
WP 0013-9
Expendable and Durable Items List ....................................................................
WP 0039-1
Extreme Cold Conditions .....................................................................................
WP 0016-1
Extreme Hot Conditions ......................................................................................
WP 0017-1
F
Fan Clutch Lockup Procedure (M915 through M920) .......................................
WP 0032-1
Field Manuals .......................................................................................................
WP 0036-1
Fifth Wheel Operation and Coupling and Uncoupling Trailers .........................
WP 0012-1
Filling Empty Cooling System ............................................................................
WP 0029-4
Filling Fuel Tank ..................................................................................................
WP 0028-1
Fluid Leakage .......................................................................................................
WP 0024-3
Fording Operation ................................................................................................
WP 0019-1
Forms ....................................................................................................................
WP 0036-1
Forward-Rear or Rear-Rear Axle Jack Placement ............................................
WP 0030-16
Front Axle Jack Placement ................................................................................
WP 0030-15
Fuel System Function ..........................................................................................
WP 0004-6
G
General Cleaning ..................................................................................................
WP 0026-1
General Information .............................................................................................
WP 0001-1
H
How to Use This Manual ...................................................................................................
x
I
Initial Adjustment, Before Use, and Self-Test ....................................................
WP 0006-2
Installing Spare Wheel and Tire on Carrier ........................................................
WP 0030-8
INDEX-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
INDEX - CONTINUED
Subject WP Sequence No. - Page No.
L
List of Abbreviations/Acronyms ..........................................................................
WP 0001-5
List of Effective Pages/Work Packages .............................................................................
A
Localized Lubrication Points ...............................................................................
WP 0035-9
Location and Description of Major Components ...............................................
WP 0002-4
Lubricants .............................................................................................................
WP 0035-4
Lubrication Instructions .......................................................................................
WP 0035-1
Lubrication Locations ..........................................................................................
WP 0035-6
M
Maintenance Forms, Records, and Reports .........................................................
WP 0001-2
Maintenance Under Unusual Conditions .............................................................
WP 0034-1
Military Load Classification (MLC) ..................................................................
WP 0003-14
Military Symbols for Lubricants and Intervals ...................................................
WP 0035-3
Miscellaneous Publications ..................................................................................
WP 0036-2
Model Number and Equipment Name ................................................................
WP 0001-1
Mud Flap Stowage .............................................................................................
WP 0012-15
N
NATO Slave Receptacle ......................................................................................
WP 0013-7
Nomenclature Cross Reference List ....................................................................
WP 0001-4
Normal Shutdown of Winch PTO (M916 and M920) ......................................
WP 0012-22
O
Operating Auxiliary Equipment ...........................................................................
WP 0013-1
Operating Hydraulic Jack ..................................................................................
WP 0030-14
Operating Inter-Axle Differential Lockup .........................................................
WP 0010-26
Operating Procedures ...........................................................................................
WP 0006-2
Operating Pusher Axle (M917, M919, and M920) ...........................................
WP 0010-27
Operating Trailer Brake Hand Control ..............................................................
WP 0010-26
Operating Winch (M916 and M920) .................................................................
WP 0012-20
Operating Winch at Temperatures Below -25° F (-32° C)
(M916 and M920) .....................................................................................
WP 0012-18
Operation Under Unusual Conditions .................................................................
WP 0015-1
Operation Under Usual Conditions .....................................................................
WP 0006-1
Optimum Use of Tachograph .............................................................................
WP 0010-14
INDEX-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
INDEX - CONTINUED
Subject WP Sequence No. - Page No.
P
Performance ..........................................................................................................
WP 0003-6
Placing Vehicle in Motion ...................................................................................
WP 0010-1
Pintle Towing .....................................................................................................
WP 0012-14
Portable Fire Extinguisher ...................................................................................
WP 0013-6
Power Train Function ...........................................................................................
WP 0004-2
Preparation for Loading Light and Medium Equipment Trailers
(M916 and M920) .....................................................................................
WP 0012-16
Preparation for Movement ...................................................................................
WP 0006-3
Preparation for Storage or Shipment ...................................................................
WP 0001-4
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) .....................................
WP 0025-1
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) Introduction ................
WP 0024-1
R
References ............................................................................................................
WP 0036-1
Removing Spare Wheel and Tire from Tire Carrier ...........................................
WP 0030-4
Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIR) ...........................
WP 0001-2
S
Seat and Seatbelt Operation .................................................................................
WP 0007-1
Securing Winch Wire Rope (M916 and M920) ................................................
WP 0012-22
Spring Brake Power Springs Operation ..............................................................
WP 0020-1
Starting Engine Above +32° F (0° C) .................................................................
WP 0008-1
Starting Out on Grade (M915 through M920) ..................................................
WP 0010-13
Stopping, Shutting Down Engine, and Parking Vehicle .....................................
WP 0011-1
T
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................
ii
Technical Manuals ...............................................................................................
WP 0036-1
Theory of Operation .............................................................................................
WP 0004-1
Tie Downs and Lifting Shackles .........................................................................
WP 0013-2
Tire Inflation .........................................................................................................
WP 0030-2
Towing Pintle .......................................................................................................
WP 0013-1
Towing Vehicle .....................................................................................................
WP 0021-1
Troubleshooting Master Index .............................................................................
WP 0022-1
Troubleshooting Procedures .................................................................................
WP 0023-1
INDEX-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
INDEX - CONTINUED
Subject WP Sequence No. - Page No.
U
Uncoupling and Disconnecting Tractor from Trailer ........................................
WP 0012-12
Unusual Terrain Operation ...................................................................................
WP 0018-1
Use of Seatbelts ...................................................................................................
WP 0007-5
Use of Transmission Gear Ranges (M915A1) ....................................................
WP 0010-6
Use of Tow Bar ....................................................................................................
WP 0021-2
W
Warning Summary ...............................................................................................................
a
Weights .................................................................................................................
WP 0003-2
Wheel and Tire Replacement .............................................................................
WP 0030-12
Wheel and Tire Service .......................................................................................
WP 0030-1
Winch Controls (M916 and M920) ...................................................................
WP 0012-17
INDEX-5/6 blank
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LC
L-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
Your mailing address
TM Number Date of the TM Title of the TM
Date you filled out this form.
SAMPLE
Your Name Your Phone Number
Your Signature
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LC
L-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
SAMPLE
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
TM
9-2320-273-10 14 DEC 2012
Operator’s Manual for
M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917,
M917P1, M918, M919, M920, AND M920P1
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
TM 9-2320-273-10 14 DEC 2012
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917,
M917P1, M918, M919, M920, AND M920P1
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
TM 9-2320-273-10 14 DEC 2012
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917,
M917P1, M918, M919, M920, AND M920P1
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army
1230506
0001802
RAYMOND T. ODIERNO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number (IDN) 380297, requirements for TM 9-2320-273-10.
1 Centimeter = 10 Millimeters = 0.01 Meter = 0.3937 Inch
1 Decimeter = 10 Centimeters = 3.94 Inches
1 Meter =10 Decimeters = 100 Centimeters
= 1000 Millimeters = 39.37 Inches
1 Dekameter = 10 Meters = 32.8 Feet
1 Hectometer =10 Dekameters = 328.08 Feet
1 Kilometer =10 Hectometers = 1000 Meters
= 0.621 Mile = 3,280.8 Feet
Millimeters = Inches times 25.4
Inches = Millimeters divided by 25.4
THE METRIC SYSTEM AND EQUIVALENTS
LINEAR MEASURE
WEIGHTS
1 Centigram = 10 Milligrams = 0.154 Grain
1 Decigram = 10 Centigrams = 1.543 Grains
1 Gram = 0.001 Kilogram = 10 Decigrams
=1000 Milligrams = 0.035 Ounce
1 Dekagram = 10 Grams = 0.353 Ounce
1 Hectogram = 10 Dekagrams = 3.527 Ounces
1 Kilogram = 10 Hectograms = 1000 Grams
= 2.205 Pounds
1 Quintal = 100 Kilograms = 220.46 Pounds
1 Metric Ton = 10 Quintals = 1000 Kilograms
= 1.1 Short Tons
SQUARE MEASURE
1 Sq Centimeter = 100 Sq Millimeters = 0.155 Sq Inch
1 Sq Decimeter = 100 Sq Centimeters = 15.5 Sq Inches
1 Sq Meter (Centare) = 10 Sq Decimeters
= 10,000 Sq Centimeters = 10.764 Sq Feet
1 Sq Dekameter (Are) = 100 Sq Meters = 1,076.4 Sq Feet
1 Sq Hectometer (Hectare) = 100 Sq Dekameters
= 2.471 Acres
1 Sq Kilometer = 100 Sq Hectometers
= 1,000,000 Sq Meters = 0.386 Sq Mile
CUBIC MEASURE
1 Cu Centimeter = 1000 Cu Millimeters = 0.061 Cu Inch
1 Cu Decimeter = 1000 Cu Centimeters = 61.02 Cu Inches
1 Cu Meter = 1000 Cu Decimeters
= 1,000,000 Cu Centimeters= 35.31 Cu Feet
TEMPERATURE
5/9 ( F - 32 ) = C
LIQUID MEASURE
1 Milliliter = 0.001 Liter = 0.034 Fluid Ounce
1 Centiliter = 10 Milliliters = 0.34 Fluid Ounce
1 Deciliter = 10 Centiliters = 3.38 Fluid Ounces
1 Liter = 10 Deciliters = 1000 Milliliters
= 33.82 Fluid Ounces
1 Dekaliter = 10 Liters = 2.64 Gallons
1 Hectoliter = 10 Dekaliters = 26.42 Gallons
1 Kiloliter = 10 Hectoliters = 264.18 Gallons
(9/5 x C) + 32 = F
-35 Fahrenheit is equivalent to -37 Celsius
0 Fahrenheit is equivalent to -18 Celsius
32 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 0 Celsius
90 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 32.2 Celsius
100 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 38 Celsius
212 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 100 Celsius
APPROXIMATE CONVERSION FACTORS
TO CHANGE TO MULTIPLY BY
Inches .......................... Centimeters ........................ 2.540
Feet .............................. Meters ................................. 0.305
Yards ........................... Meters ................................. 0.914
Miles ............................ Kilometers .......................... 1.609
Square Inches ............. Square Centimeters ........... 6.451
Square Feet ................. Square Meters .................... 0.093
Square Yards ............... Square Meters .................... 0.836
Square Miles ............... Square Kilometers ............. 2.590
Acres ............................ Square Hectometers .......... 0.405
Cubic Feet ................... Cubic Meters ...................... 0.028
Cubic Yards ................. Cubic Meters ...................... 0.765
Fluid Ounces ............... Milliliters .......................... 29.573
Pints ............................ Liters .................................. 0.473
Quarts.......................... Liters .................................. 0.946
Gallons ........................ Liters .................................. 3.785
Ounces ......................... Grams ............................... 28.349
Pounds ......................... Kilograms ........................... 0.454
Short Tons ................... Metric Tons ........................ 0.907
Pound-Feet .................. Newton-Meters ................... 1.356
Pounds-Inches ............. Newton-Meters ............... 0.11375
Pounds per Square Inch .. Kilopascals ......................... 6.895
Ounce-Inches ............... Newton-Meters ............. 0.007062
Miles per Gallon .......... Kilometers per Liter .......... 0.425
Miles per Hour ............ Kilometers per Hour .......... 1.609
TO CHANGE TO MULTIPLY BY
Centimeters ................. Inches .................................. 0.394
Meters .......................... Feet ..................................... 3.280
Meters .......................... Yards ................................... 1.094
Kilometers ................... Miles ................................... 0.621
Square Centimeters .... Square Inches ..................... 0.155
Square Meters ............. Square Feet ...................... 10.764
Square Meters ............. Square Yards ...................... 1.196
Square Kilometers ...... Square Miles ....................... 0.386
Square Hectometers .... Acres ................................... 2.471
Cubic Meters ............... Cubic Feet ......................... 35.315
Cubic Meters ............... Cubic Yards ........................ 1.308
Milliliters ..................... Fluid Ounces ...................... 0.034
Liters ........................... Pints .................................... 2.113
Liters ........................... Quarts ................................. 1.057
Liters ........................... Gallons ................................ 0.264
Grams .......................... Ounces ................................ 0.035
Kilograms .................... Pounds ................................ 2.205
Metric Tons ................. Short Tons .......................... 1.102
Newton-Meters ............ Pound-Feet ......................... 0.738
Kilopascals .................. Pounds per Square Inch ..... 0.145
Kilometers per Liter ... Miles per Gallon ................. 2.354
Kilometers per Hour ... Miles per Hour ................... 0.621
Fahrenheit ................. Celsius .............. C = ( F-32)x5/9
Celsius ........................ Fahrenheit ...... F = (9/5x C)+32
PIN 045568-000
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project